Home

2944B operations manual

1. po E o oo UUT oo pococo BNC O a sE SOCKET QU s A C6043 Fig 5 5 Carrier harmonics amp spurious check 1 Refer to Results table 5 6 on page 5 39 Connect the Spectrum analyzer to the BNC socket on the UUT as shown in Fig 5 5 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 0 4 MHz All modulation and noise measurements should be switched OFF 3 Tune the Spectrum analyzer to view the harmonics shown in the second harmonic and third harmonic column of Results table 5 6 checking that they are within the above specification 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the remaining frequencies shown in the table ACCEPTANCE TESTING 5 Refer to Results table 5 7 on page 5 39 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 0 4 MHz 6 Use the Spectrum analyzer to check that any spurious signals are 40 dBc Repeat for UUT carrier frequencies of 500 MHz and 1000 MHz Repeat for a UUT carrier frequency of 650 MHz checking that any spurious signals are lt 30 dBc Spectrum analyzer o Im o
2. Test mode screen and menu 2 0 Tx TEST with next levels 3 99 LOCAL OPERATION RECEIVER TEST RECEIVER TEST GEN FREQ 3868 688888hHz GEH FREH 388 88888HHz LOCAL 88 8dBm AUDIO FREQ H BHHz LEVEL 88 adem AUDIO FREQ 6 GHz 1 80006 H 2 54 MODI FREG 1 BGGGkHz LEVEL 57 SdEm 1l586kHz LEVEL sheen Sin LEVEL 1 58 kHz Rx A iui MOD FRED 1 8BBBkHz a san w2 FREm 1 0000 Hz f ab om 130 i in a Iz Sin LEVEL 1 500kHz off eel Locked TEST MIA 1 506kH Off EXT LEVEL 1 500kHz off TEST SOURCI Ext Mod ie AC SOURCE Ext Mod ir RC Increments Increments MODI FREQ 100Hz MODI FREG 1 G888kHz MODI LEVEL 1H HBBBkHz AF FILTER 0 3 to 3 4kHz Marea Rei ehe COUPLING A RECEIVER TEST GEN FREQ 309 09022MHz LEVEL 2198 adem AUDITO TEER Bv Hz LEVEL amy MODI FREQ 1 888BkHz Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz Off R RF RECEIUER TEST MOD FREQ 1 8888kHz Filter GEN FREU 300 GGGGAMH A Sin LEVEL 1 500kHz LEVEL 188 BdBm AUDIO FREQ H HHz Dist LEVEL amu 5 H MODI FREQ 1 888BEHz EXT LEVEL 15 88BkHz Off i 4 n4 SOURCE Ext Mod i ze AC Sin LEVEL 1 5BBkHz Off 0 xo 46 eb se 100 Audio _MODZ FREG 1 8688kHz ace Pk HidSin LEVEL 1 500kHz MODI FREQ 100Hz MODI LEVEL 14 BBBkHz Ed I
3. 3 76 IO BE RE e ert Ode oan n ds 3 76 T ne SelectlOD a en s dier e oom D utere e o Hr a HEU e E bn 3 76 Tone frequency shift cete let 3 76 3 1 LOCAL OPERATION DES une ein i 3 78 OVA e eti ote ete t 3 78 DCS receiver decoder testing ss 3 79 DCS transmitter encoder testing 3 80 A a E 3 81 O ea esi 3 81 Tx test DTMF tones function aaa a 3 81 Rx test DTMF tones function seins 3 82 Dx test DIME tones function regia 3 83 AF test DTMF tones f nction suce ec eta e ee EE 3 83 POGCSAQ3 entitled A eec T UU Ee Pete 3 85 OYEIVIEW 2 n 3 85 Testmp a radio pagers i epe eee me teen tee e Est RTE 3 87 O 3 88 SENSE UP Een 3 88 Exparided displays iu et E 3 89 Stores settings results 2 inserere ede Ee eee ere e UR UR 3 90 OVetVI6W iic De e P P Eae ete ete ERE eie D eH P Peter Hes 3 90 STORER CABLES SE SRS alere Atte ye E ne 3 90 A ao diete e elt e ee RR Nd etes te Ba ese reete 3 9 DISPLAY HOLD STORE rat Ree A rebel anne ees 3 91 Other memory functions x xe e ek A ehi GA 3 9 Tithing store locations ee in E E Ee oe bene 3 92 Ertorinessdges we isset eee e dere te ae e i 3 92 si do oliena LE DA AO LESS Per nonu n aA CLE ds 3 93 Paralle
4. 2 15 List of tables Table 2 1 Accessory socket pin numbering location and functions 2 7 Table 2 2 Accessory socket logic and applications sese 2 8 List of figures Fig 2 1 Preventing strap buckle from slipping 2 3 Fig 2 2 Accessory in out socket pin numbers 2 7 Fig 2 3 RS232 serial port connections 2 9 Fig 2 4 Null modem connections ss 2 9 Fig 2 5 IEEE488 parallel port connections 2 10 2 1 INSTALLATION Introduction This chapter deals with preparing the Service Monitor for use for the first time and with the checks to be made when the Service Monitor may have been used under unknown conditions The latter situation could well apply where the Service Monitor is used by several users for differing tasks Initial visual inspection of new instruments Ventilation CAUTION After unpacking the Service Monitor and before making any connections to a power source inspect for any signs of mechanical damage The Service Monitor is force cooled by a fan located in the rear panel The cooling air is drawn into the Service Monitor through the fan and expelled through ventilator grills located on the right and on the underside An air filter over the fan inlet prevents the ingress of dust and other particles The Service Monitor requires an unrestricted airflow to ensure that its performance meets
5. 3 69 3 18 RF Sequential tones encoder display main menu 3 72 3 19 RF Sequential tones standard selection menu nennen 3 72 3 20 RF Sequential tones decoder screen 3 74 3 21 RF CTCSS encoder screen and menu i 3 76 3 22 RF DCS ENCODER screen and Menu 3 79 3 23 DTMF DECODER screen and menu non 3 81 3 24 POCSAG radio pager test screen and MENU 3 85 3 25 Alternative address warning messages na 3 86 3 26 Parallel printer port socket contacts ene 3 93 3 27 Simplified diagram of rear accessory port switching eesesesssseesssrseesersessesersesserses 3 94 3 28 Rear accessory port socket connections sess 3 94 About this chapter This chapter deals with using the Communications Service Monitor as a stand alone instrument The front panel layout is described and a brief explanation of all controls and connections is glven The connectors and occasional controls on the rear panel are identified An introduction to each of the test modes explains the principles behind tests that can be carried out and suggests some applications for the use of the monitor The power up and setup procedures are explained The operating sequences for each of the test modes is explained and the relevant menus outlined The internal setup and results memories are described and their use
6. Audio S AUDIO FREG 5 x AUDIO FREG B BHz MP EE gu a LEE LEVEL LEVEL Em EM LELEL LEUEI Pope tah db 3 mE ND Um E E A Offset ize eem IF FILTER Z38kHz 30kHz BF FILTER 308 S 4kHz 300 3 4kHz SHB 3 4kHz Return FILTER 388 3 4kHz AFi FREH 1 BBBBkHz AF FILTER 388 3 4kHz 1 BEBBEBk Hz COUPLING AC Sim LEVEL 108 COUPLING AC 198 FILTER 3 4kHZ 1 BOB8kHz COUPLING 128 Bm RECEIVER MI DUPLEX TRANSMITTER RECEIVER amm DUPLEX TRANSMITTER Broad GEN FREQ 300 00000MHz 300 Narrow GEN FREQ 308 B0909MHz 388 BBaaaaHz 100 FI 87 44 LEVEL 88 BdBm Hz LEVEL 100 0dBm OFFSET 87 466 Perm POWER NO SIGNAL Dir MODI FREQ 1 gt POWER HO SIGNAL WE 001 EREA AZ ort MU Pouer Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz T W d X ctu T m MOD FREQ 9 0Hz Pk B AUDIO FREQ 8 8Hz H NAT PSP Edm LEVEL 6 GdBr FM LEVEL GHz 2 RI al kHz 9 20 40 60 100 o 2 4 2 i IF FILTER S8kHz IF FILTER 3
7. 3 32 Power requirements iii 2 3 Power Switch Sess eoe ens 3 8 Power EXCESSIVE se ce ote anna 4 10 Pre emphasis filter 4 14 Preparing for use isset 2 2 Printer UR 3 93 R Ranging circuits measurements 4 12 Receiver Circula etel 4 9 Index 2 Receiver test measurements 3 47 Receiver testing 1 4 3 38 Reference level spectrum analyzer 3 6 Remote control connections 2 9 Results tables acceptance tests 5 36 RF amplifier vacacionar 4 14 RE COUNTER i orbi rte ea eth ae 4 12 yir ne ann 4 13 RF input attenuators tones mode 3 70 RE level epe utis 3 16 RF power external atten sess 3 41 Ria Gunite 3 86 3 87 Routine maintenance 2 13 RS3232 Controlado Eesti nee 1 2 Rx frequency setting 3 40 Rx TEST mode sense rent 4 13 S Safety testing routine 2 14 Selttests iie eet ms 2 11 tette laa ESD 3 11 Setup menu PAGES 3 11 Signal routing tones mode 3 70 spectrum analyzer 1 3 Spectrum analyzer 1 6 3 19 3 55 Mode eon aane e neas 4 15 Setting Up eoe ose tens 3 56 Span adjustment 0 sss 3 6 SSB in
8. 3 7 Local oscillator first 4 10 Local oscillator 4 11 Logic lines setting up 3 95 Look and listen sss 3 60 Look and Listen 1 6 3 19 Look And Listen function 4 15 Loudspeaker ici 4 15 M Memories settings results 3 90 Memories set up results 3 25 Menus test modes n 3 10 Microphone press to talk 3 25 Modulation control 4 14 Modulation distortion 3 36 Modulation input 3 8 Modulation sources nen 3 41 Modulation Sources 4 7 Modulators cranica 4 14 N N Type connector eene 4 9 Naming CONVENtIONS iii 11 O Oscilloscope ee edes emnes 3 19 Oscilloscope display 4 13 Oscilloscope using 3 88 Overload detection 4 10 Overload warning message 4 10 P Parallel printer port option using 3 93 Positioning for USe 2 12 Power attenuator 20dB 4 9 Power consumption 2 3 Power overload
9. Centre 306MHz Span amp BBMHz Mkr 4s H8dBm 3B9MHz Res 3BBkHz AND LISTEN RET SPECTRUM ANALYZER mme 1 3 adem Level Ref Level Res Bl 1B4B4diw 9 dBm 10dB diw Uert i Scale Vid Filter On i Hkr Peak Hold 1 shkr Off 1 i 1 1 1 Mark NI AL ae ea 1 i 1 Manual Res Vid Filter On Peak Hold oft Demod FM Tr ack De eme OFT RF Gen Filt BP Look Listen Start GHz SIE Centre 338 563MHz Spano 1 gt Res Bll S60kHz Salch 78 9dEn Off Res 3BkHz B6036 Test mode screen and menu 5 0 SPEC ANA with next levels 3 105 LOCAL OPERATION LOCAL AUDIO TEST AUDIO FREQ AF1 FRED 1 B8BBBkHz LEVELS AF Sin LEVEL 188 8mU TEST AF2 FREQ 1 8888kHz Sin LEVEL 168 Uff Increments la88Hz 18 Amb AF FILTER 0 3 to
10. Increments 10 20 rs Increments 2 d 1 dEr REF 9 758kHz AFI FREQ 106Hz dEr REF 3 P6SkHz LEVEL 12 0m RF Ineut Level POGERS IF FILTER 36kHz IF FILTER 3kHz 15610 AF FILTER 300Hz HP RF FILTER 300 to 3 4kHz CCITT TRANSMITTER TEST TRANSMITTER TEST Select FREQ 300 000600MHz TE FREQ lkHzzdiu S mzzdiu OFFSET 29 61kHz on OFFSET 35 57kHz 388 BBBBASNH TRANSMITTER TEST Bchart TX FREB 300 Auto POWER NO SIGNAL POWER NO SIGNAL i AF1 FREG 1 GBBBkHz a ranae AFL FREU 1 BBBBkHz MOD FREQ 8 BHz Ec Sin LEVEL 108 EG ae Sin LEVEL 108 6m FM LEVEL BHz 8 RF2 FRED 1 9000kHz 4 HF FREQ 1 0G6GkHz POWER BE 4 Sin LEVEL Off Sin LEVEL 188 804 Off t di HD SIGNAL HOD FREG LEVEL E 4 B BHz Increments Increments EN LEUR AFI FREG 1BBHz AFi FREH i188Hz 10 Score AFi LEVEL 18 6m Bar AFi LEVEL 14 Bar IF FILTER Z kHZ IF FILTER ZBkHz AF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz AF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz Persistence Persis Low Med Hish Inf tence
11. TRANSCEIVER UNDER TEST C3376 Fig 3 11 One port duplex test setup With the Dx TEST mode selected the screen and menu shown in fold out diagram 4 0 is displayed The Dx TEST mode is provided so that transmitter and receiver functions of transceiver operation can be studied simultaneously One port and Two port transceivers can be tested See Fig 3 11 One port duplex test setup and Fig 3 12 Alternative two port duplex setups The Dx TEST mode display does not give all the information that is available from the individual Tx TEST mode and Rx TEST mode displays but these displays are available individually by selecting the appropriate test mode When interchanging between the Tx TEST mode Rx TEST mode or Dx TEST mode any active transmitter test and any active receiver test will remain functional There are two exceptions to this The first is with the modulation generators used for receiver tests and the audio generators used as a modulation source for transmitter tests The two AF generators in the monitor serve both functions Therefore although both can be assigned to either function if modulation is required on receiver and transmitter simultaneously only single tones are possible The second exception is that the distortion measuring functions can be made only on the AF signal taken from the receiver under test and fed into the AF input connector of the monitor The output from the Tx TEST mode de
12. UM 48 5d8m 300MHz Res 3B8kHz Peak Hold Start Res BW 3BHkHz Off Frea RF Gen On Stor Fres SPECTRUM ANALYZER iii iid per Ref Level Level Ref Level 9 AdEm Uer 18dB div Scale Vid Filter On kr Peak Hold ahkr Off Ret SPECTRUM ANALYZER i Level SE 3 m 4 Peak 18dBzdiu Find Mart i Scale Vid Filter On 1 i 1 j Centre 3 amp B8hHz Span amp GBhHz Res Eu jus Peak Hold Mkr amp 8dEm ZaBMHz Res 300 nu Marker Mar ker to Refl Sen On go qc e to Rer Sen On Track i 1 Track RF Ger i RF Gen Look n Look Lister Centre Sran 600MHz Start GHz INE 48 5d8m 300MH7 Res Bl Res Bll 3BBkHz Ref Level 0 GdEm 18dB diw i Wid Filter On i Feak Hold i ort RF Ger SPECTRUM ANALYZER RF Gen On
13. e a Lone co nl re PAU no i lau fa e og 3 38 Connections Rm 3 39 Setting Up e a 3 40 AF input level measurement A 3 44 Making measurements see 3 47 Dx test duplex te iii DEREN REUNIR oa DAR Ue vts 3 53 Overview 2 ep Re A ale Lalla eo o p Nee RP SER P petas 3 53 Spectrum analyzer oerte eee a 3 55 OVERVIEW P een aR 3 56 NIAE 3 56 AF test audio frequency testing 3 63 OVEIVIewW 3 63 Setting UP E 3 64 Input level measurement ire Nine e HEC Ce EE 3 64 Input filtering iai ner eme Ni ti 3 64 Distortion measurement 2 5 det cis 3 65 Incremental adjustment keys 3 67 Genaro Ret e aire tei Oe atr A d o bres assi 3 67 A ns E es in ana 3 68 Use within spectrum analyzer mode 3 68 LODOS e ee hmi attt FRU req e EUR e tats gs 3 69 Tones Sub mode as ln aa ia a ene EL La edo Dues des 3 69 Observing tones signals in other test MOdEes nenne ernennen 3 69 Signal routing e Tec REOR ER EO E te ele dt 3 70 RF input atenuada e Re edere 3 70 Sequential tones sian ct its od M pti Rr RS 3 71 ura 3 71 Testing sequential tone receivers ener ener enne 3 71 Testing sequential tone transmitters enne nennen enne enne 3 74 CT GSS c
14. SW1 a 1 1 M 1 RELAY 8288288 o SW1 b 9 1 I M 1 FROM LOGIC CIRCUITS ACCESSORY Fa PORT LINE 2 LINE 3 5V i o 1 C2157 Fig 3 27 Simplified diagram of rear accessory port switching Pin Connections Fig 3 28 Rear accessory port socket connections as seen facing panel 3 94 LOCAL OPERATION Table 3 2 Rear accessory port connections 5 V Logic line 3 or logic contact 3 a Logic line 2 or logic contact 2 a Logic line 1 or logic contact 1 a Logic line O or logic contact O a logic contact 3 b Logic contact 2 b Logic contact 1 b Logic contact O b Setting up Logic line state The state of the logic lines outputs can be set from the logic lines setup menu accessible by the key sequence HELP SETUP Setup Logic Lines The top four soft keys on the right of the display control the normal state of the logic lines Pressing these keys will set the options alternately If the appropriate section of S1 is closed the output can be set to either logic high or logic low If the appropriate section of S1 is open the contacts between pin pairs can be set to opened or closed Switch S1 is mounted within the option assembly on the printed circuit board The option assembly must be removed from the service monitor to have access to 51 Remove the power connection from the service monitor and any connections from the option assembly before removing it from the se
15. Parallel printer port option Parallel output The parallel printer port option provides an output suitable for direct connection to a parallel drive printer Fig 3 26 Parallel printer port socket contacts shows the pin numbering of the socket and Table 3 1 Parallel printer port connections shows the function of the socket connections Pin connections 25 14 Fig 3 26 Parallel printer port socket contacts as seen facing panel Table 3 1 Parallel printer port connections Strobe ACK Data 0 BUSY Data 1 PE Data 2 SLCT Data 3 to 5 V via R Data 4 ERROR Data 5 to 5 V via R Data 6 to O V via R Data 7 18 to 25 Ground 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3 93 LOCAL OPERATION Accessory port rear optional As well as the parallel printer output this option also provides an accessory port that allows the control of external devices by logic control from the instrument Fig 3 28 Rear accessory port socket connections shows the pin numbering of the socket and Table 3 2 Rear accessory port connections shows the function of the socket connections Fig 3 27 Simplified diagram of rear accessory port switching shows the switching associated with the port Switches 1 a to 1 d are parts of a multi pole rocker switch mounted on the printed circuit board within the option assembly By setting these switches the user has the option of logic level output on the appropriate pins or of closing contacts between pairs of pins
16. RF output connection from the transmitter should be made using good quality RF cable with correctly fitted connectors Worn connectors and damaged or kinked cable can give rise to high levels of reflected power This can cause misleading results and possible damage to the transmitter e Consider the power output of the transmitter and connect to the appropriate input connector on the monitor The maximum power to the BNC Antenna socket is 1 W and to the N Type connector 150 W If the transmitter output power exceeds this level then a suitable power attenuator should be connected between the transmitter and the monitor or a calibrated sniffer used to take a sample of the output using a dummy load if necessary e power source for the transmitter should be reliable and stable The battery of a vehicle may discharge if supplying a transmitter during prolonged testing or the earth common return connection may become open circuit if the transmitter is removed from its normal location The procedure for making each of the tests listed above follows Some of the tests may require separate operations and others will only require a reading to be made Hot surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is exceeded for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive Setting up When all the required connections have bee
17. Si el equipo fuese utilizado de forma diferente a la especificada por Aeroflex la protecci n ofrecida por el equipo pudiera quedar reducida Aeroflex no tiene control sobre el uso de este equipo y no puede por tanto exigirsele responsabilidades derivadas de una utilizaci n distinta de aquellas para las que ha sido dise ado xxiii Chapter 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Contents Purpose and features nenas cote e ed t eda 1 2 Transmitter teni ce e RR RD E HEU D E Ge e nae EO der det 1 3 Receivet testing 4 aee See 1 4 Duplex testi i e t dt Ran una 1 5 Spectrum Ml Zi eee e I bee et 1 6 LON 1 6 P FfOrMANCE Q ACAD DEG 1 7 Receiver measurements esses 1 7 Audio analyzer terse E Ue e a e 1 9 Transmitter measurements cete A A ut ta 1 11 RE spectr m analyzer e Ret te Re WV Site kei 1 13 Audio getierators airline 1 14 Frequency stand rd scie eee aa tees 1 14 Generali ESN LT EIS Ne UR MI M E Ter 1 15 Options and accessories esc od epit ane nein ibn las 1 16 List of figures Fig 1 1 Transmitter test Setup cete a Lan 1 3 Fig 1 2 Receiver test setup sanete e dre P ER RR aaa 1 4 Fig 1 3 One port duplex test setup ss 1 5 Fig 1 4 Two port duplex test setup ss 1 5 Fig 1 5 AE test setup RN 1 6 1 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Purpose and features 2944B is a portable Communications Service Monitor for carrying out production routi
18. As well as setting up the major sections of the Service Monitor the following parameters are selected from the TRANSMITTER TEST screen The TRANSMITTER TEST screen allows setting of the following IF filter bandwidth AF filter pass band De emphasis filtering Distortion measurement methods 3 23 LOCAL OPERATION Connections TONES GEN SERVICE MONITOR AF GEN OUT RF gt POWER METER 20dB ATTENUATOR MODULATION METER lt gt gt RF COUNTER RF IN VAN ANTENNA owe 1 ALTERNATIVE CONNECTIONS gt Tx UNDER TEST AF FILTERS AF VOLTMETER gt DISTORTION METER AF COUNTER AUDIO gt AMPLIFIER C3373 Fig 3 6 Transmitter test connections The transmitter and the Service Monitor are connected as shown in Fig 3 6 Transmitter test connections The block diagram of the Service Monitor shows the signal routing within it 3 24 LOCAL OPERATION The Audio frequency input connection to the transmitter must be to the audio input in place of the usual microphone input This connection will vary for differing types of equipment Points to note are e microphone must be disconnected as any input from it would affect the performance of the test e microphone and its cable may complete the keying circuit of the transmitter using a press to talk switch in which case an alternative arrangement must be provided e
19. C1614 Fig 3 10 Spurious response Image Frequency location With the receiver and Service Monitor set up as for sensitivity testing establish a reference RF input level Change the RF output frequency of the Service Monitor to the image frequency of receiver tuning point without altering the receiver tuning Increase the RF output level of the Service Monitor RF generator until the SINAD level reads 20 dB and note the RF level The difference in the level of the RF generator readings for the two frequencies expressed in dB is the image frequency rejection ratio 3 51 LOCAL OPERATION The procedure for measuring the IF rejection ratio is similar to that used to measure image frequency rejection and uses the same setup The RF reference level is found at the RF frequency to which the receiver is tuned then the RF generator is retuned to the IF frequency of the receiver under test The RF output level is increased until a 20 dB SINAD level is obtained The output level of the RF generator is noted The difference in level of the RF generator readings expressed in dB is the IF rejection ratio of the receiver AGC response Automatic Gain Control is used in AM receivers to stabilize the level of the audio output signal against changes in the level of RF input This is necessary as the output voltage from the detector circuit with a constant depth of modulation is proportional to the level of the RF signal applied to the
20. I DE INPUT E BI RE DE O E B OL E O B 6 o0 DO DOC 000 DUO um I RF OUTPUT 6052 Fig 5 17 frequency meter 1 Refer to Results table 5 41 on page 3 49 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 17 connecting the incoming signal to the antenna input socket of the UUT Lock the Service Monitor external standard input to the external standard output of the signal generator Q Set the UUT to Tx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT antenna BNC input socket Press HELP SETUP Setup and toggle RF counter resolution until 1 Hz is displayed in reverse field then press Return Return to get back to the TX test display 3 On the UUT press 7x Freq 10 MHz Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 10 MHz at an RF level 60 dBm Check this level by removing the RF test signal connection from the UUT and applying it to the RF power meter Adjust the level if necessary then reconnect the UUT 4 Check that the offset indicated on the UUT is 0 Hz 1 Hz 5 Repeat steps 3 amp 4 for frequencies of 500 MHz and 1 05 GHz 6 Refer to Results table 5 42 page 5 50 Press the Auto Tune key on the UUT 7 Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 1000 MHz at a level of 13 dBm check and set this level on the power meter Check that the UUT autotunes to the incoming frequency and the Frequency counter indicates the frequency 1 Hz Repeat at 500 MHz and 10 MHz 8 D
21. Selects signal to noise ratio as the measurement method The Signal to Noise bar chart ranges available are 0 to 30 dB and 0 to 100 dB Signal to noise ratio is displayed as a digital read out above the bar chart The TX TEST mode menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key SINAD Selects SINAD as the measurement method The soft key displays the measurement frequency The AF1 generator will be set to 1 kHz by this action regardless of any previous setting The distortion bar chart ranges available are 0 to 18 dB and 0 to 50 dB The SINAD level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The TX TEST mode menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key Dist n Selects distortion percentage as the measurement method The soft key displays the measurement frequency The AF1 generator will be set to 1 kHz by this action regardless of any previous setting The distortion bar chart ranges available are 0 to 10 0 to 30 and 0 to 100 The distortion percentage level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The TX TEST mode menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key With all the required parameters set power up the transmitter The power output of the transmitter is shown on the POWER LEVEL bar chart with the power level given in digital form above it The level of modulation is displayed on the modulation level bar chart with the FM DEVN or the AM DEPTH shown digitally When the SSB
22. As we are always seeking to improve our products the information in this document gives only a general indication of the product capacity performance and suitability none of which shall form part of any contract We reserve the right to make design changes without notice web www aeroflex com Email info test aeroflex com November 2005
23. The use of a NULL MODEM cable assembly is required for connecting to control equipment such as PCs The connections for 9 way to 9 way and 9 way to 25 way versions is shown in Fig 2 4 SERVICE MONITOR PC 9 WAY 9 WAY RXD RXD TXD TXD DTR DTR CONNECTED DCD DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS CONNECTED D 9 SERVICE MONITOR PC 9 WAY 25 WAY RXD RXD TXD 3 TXD DTR DTR CONNECTED 8 DCD DSR DSR RTS RTS CTS CTS CONNECTED D O Fig 2 4 Null modem connections 2 9 C3383 GPIB INSTALLATION When the optional GPIB interface unit has been fitted connections are made to it using a 24 way IEEE 488 male connector If a stackable connector is used in order to interconnect more than two pieces of equipment ensure that no physical damage to the Service Monitor connector will result The pin connections are listed below and the pin locations shown in Fig 2 5 IEEE488 parallel port connections as seen facing panel Data I O 1 Data I O 5 Data I O 2 Data I O 6 Data I O 3 Data I O 7 Data I O 4 Data I O 8 EOI REN DAV Pair with 6 NRFD Pair with 7 NDAC Pair with 8 IFC Pair with 9 SRQ Pair with 10 ATN Pair with 11 Ground shield Logic ground 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 1 C0683 24 13 Fig 2 5 IEEE486 parallel port connections as seen facing panel INSTALLATION Self tests and acceptance tests The service monitor incorporates a self test program which allows users to verify its condition at any time
24. BFO can be used for tuning of carrier for AM and FM radios Allows a CCITT filter to be inserted into either the demodulated audio path or the audio input path Allows a CMESS filter to be inserted into either the demodulated audio path or the audio input path Provides simultaneous spectrum display and demodulation of the center frequency for span widths of 100 kHz 200 kHz 500 kHz and 1 MHz Sensitivity 2 uV Provides a bail arm carrying handle and front panel cover and storage area The bail arm will also provide additional viewing angles when mounted on a bench 12 V Ni mH Typically 60 minutes instrument operation 1 8 kg 4 Ib 4 hrs 5 35 C 41 to 95 F charge 0 50 C 32 to 122 F discharge AC Supply lead T 43138 755 DC Supply lead 46882 744 Operating Manual 46882 683 Programming Manual T The AC supply lead provided with the Service Monitor will depend on the destination country See Power requirements Power cords in Chapter 2 of this manual Optional Accessories GENERAL INFORMATION 44991 145 54431 023 46884 728 54421 001 46662 779 46662 571 46662 616 46880 118 46884 648 46884 649 46884 650 Microphone with PTT 20 dB AF attenuator BNC Rack Mounting Kit Antenna BNC Soft carrying case suitable for all 294x except early units being used with external battery Soft carrying operational case Soft carrying operational case for use with Option 30 Service Manual consists of Op
25. Controls rear panel sss 3 8 Conventions for key labelling ii Cooling fane 3 9 D Data generator ie 4 8 DG supply accent oh oed 4 2 DC supply input 3 8 DC supply external 4 3 De emphasis filter n 4 12 Demodulated signal output 3 8 Demodulation options set up 3 27 Demodulation settings look and listen 3 61 Demodulator AM 4 11 Demodulator FM 4 11 Disconnecting device 2 4 Index Index 1 Display vei eode dee meras 4 3 Display hold dede tes 3 7 Display screen nece 3 4 Distortion measurement transmitter audio 3 29 Distortion SINAD filter 4 13 TOOL writ it men intei 3 22 Duplex testing eee 1 5 3 53 Dx TEST modes ann tee 4 15 E Electrical Hazards External attenuators eee 3 33 External attenuators RF power 3 41 F Facilities inician 1 2 Filter distortion SINAD eese 4 13 Filters fan lecce tees 2 2 Fire Hazards e OA Fitting Dalila 2 6 Frequency changer mixer first 4 10 Frequency changer mixer second 4 10 Frequency changer mixer third 4 11 Frequency setting automatic 0 0 3 26 Frequency st
26. EIHz HIZ 1 3366kHz 5 AHz HIS 1 4rr kHz AHz HI4 1 6336kHz 1 1 3399kHz 1 477 8kHz 1 2891kHz 1 3361kHz 1 47 70kHz 1 2888kHz 1 3399kHz 1 4771kHz 1 3361kHz Ca Co Co Co Co Ca Ca Go a B B a Ha ELE a a B B 1 2 a 4 5 6 a 9 B B3118 Fig 3 23 RF DTMF DECODER screen and menu The bottom of the screen contains two tables The tone frequencies table on the left lists the eight frequencies LOI to and HII to HIA used for signaling The table on the right shows the 16 digit character symbol keypad with the LO tones and HI tones matrix The panel at the top of the display area shows the contents of the DTMF decoder memory A maximum of 40 symbols can be stored any additional symbols will not be accepted The central area of the display which is blank when first accessed lists the measured frequencies of ten of the received tones The underscore in the decoded character panel of the display indicates which characters are listed The left hand column shows the measured frequencies of the LO tones with the percentage error the center column the corresponding HI tones with error while the right hand column shows the duration of each tone To display the next 10 decoded results press the Y key To display the previous 10 decoded results press the 2 key The display can be printed To clear the contents of the decoder memory press the Clear Sequ key Once clear
27. L I VOLTMETER gt INPUT TERMINALS C6040 Fig 5 14 Audio oscilloscope check Refer to Results table 5 27 on page 3 46 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 14 connecting to the AF input of the UUT Set the UUT to AF TEST Scope Bar Scope AC DC set to AC coupling Set the Scope timebase to 200 us div Set the LF generator to provide 1 kHz at each of the levels shown in Results table 5 27 at the same time selecting the relevant vertical scale on the UUT In each case adjust the LF generator level until the trace occupies the full six divisions Set the DVM to measure Volts AC Note the level on the DVM and check that it lies within the limits shown in the table Disconnect the LF generator Set the UUT oscilloscope to 5 V div and the AF input to DC coupled With no signal applied use the front panel SCOPE position control to set the trace onto the bottom graticule line Set the DVM to measure DC volts 5 23 7 8 9 10 11 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Connect the DC supply in place of the LF generator and adjust its level until the oscilloscope trace sits on the graticule line two divisions down from the top of the display Check that the DVM indicates a level within the limits shown in the above table Temporarily remove the DC PSU set the UUT oscilloscope to 10 V div and use the front panel SCOPE position control to set the trace onto the bottom grati
28. Requerimientos de la normativa para equipos el ctricos de medida control y uso en laboratorio para equipos clase I port tiles y para uso en un ambiente con un grado de contaminaci n 2 El equipo ha sido dise ado para funcionar sobre una instalaci n de alimentaci n de categor as I o II Debe protegerse el equipo de la entrada de l quidos y precipitaciones como nieve lluvia etc Cuando se traslada el equipo de entorno fr o a un entorno caliente es importante aguardar la estabilizaci n el equipo para evitar la condensaci n S lo debe utilizarse el aparato en las condiciones ambientales especificadas en el cap tulo 1 Especificaciones o Performance data en caso contrario la propia protecci n del equipo puede resultar da ada No retire las cubiertas del chasis del instrumento ya que pudiera resultar da ado personalmente No existen partes que puedan ser reparadas en su interior Deje todas las tareas relativas a reparaci n a un servicio t cnico cualificado Vea la lista de Centros de Servicios Internacionales en la parte trasera del manual N Nivel peligroso de electricidad tensi n de red Este equipo cumple las normas IEC Seguridad Clase 1 lo que significa que va provisto de un cable de protecci n de masa Para mantener esta protecci n el cable de alimentaci n de red debe de conectarse siempre a una clavija con terminal de masa Tenga en cuenta que el filtro de red contiene condensadores que pueden almace
29. Select the Tx TEST mode then make all the required settings and RF connections for conventional transmitter testing Refer to the Tx TEST section of this manual for the correct procedures Set the frequency of the Service Monitor input to that of the transmitter output Key the transmitter and check that the Service Monitor is obtaining a signal from the transmitter Select TONES mode The attenuators in the receive path of the Service Monitor will be held at their current setting Press the Sequential key The RF SEQUENTIAL TONES DECODER screen and menu is displayed See Fig 3 20 Sequential tones decoder screen 1f the encoder screen is displayed press the Decode key RF SEQUENTIAL TONES DECODER 123456789 abcd Seau 1261kHz 1 iims 1953kHz 1 185 Zr alk Hz Be Ta2mz 3563k Hz 1 185 4444k Hz 1 163ms S3506kHz 162ms 64G1kHz BR T 2ms Y4SSkHz 1 1 pr po BOB 3k Hz 1 1 HULL sms CCIR SBi kHz 4 1 3588kHz S 1 14f6kHz c 2 2476kHz SE 1246kHz 5 1 4466kHz 9 1 S606kHz d 991 6Hz i9rHkHz amp 1 5400kHz a 2 4666kHz 2 1166kHz ZrSakHz 7 1 6466kHz b 958 6Hz LL B3268 i 2 3 4 E 6 5 3 Fig 3 20 RF Sequential tones decoder screen Check that the tones standard shown above the tone number frequency list corresponds to the system used by the transmitter If this is not correct select the correct standard from the menu acces
30. The use of this feature is explained on page 3 90 The Print key is used to start the Screen Print function This causes a hard copy of the held screen to be printed onto a suitable printer The use of the Screen Print feature 1s explained under the heading Printer on page 3 93 AC DC AF input coupling option key Located above the AF input socket this key toggles the AF 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 input circuit between direct and capacitive coupling The option selected is displayed on the screen Volume This control varies the level of the AF signal fed to the loudspeaker RF receiver squelch level control When monitoring the demodulated output through the loudspeaker or headphones the RF level below which signals are isolated from the AF circuits can be controlled Clockwise rotation of the squelch control raises this level and anti clockwise rotation decreases it Scope trace vertical position This adjusts the vertical position of the trace within the graticule SUPPLY switch Pressing in this push button powers up the instrument from either the AC or DC source See Getting started on page3 9 Oscilloscope sweep mode keys The SINGLE and REP keys located above the scope vertical position control select the oscilloscope sweep mode Test mode select keys On the left of the front panel are five blue keys These are the Test Mode Select keys used to put the instrument into one of the basic
31. a convenient mid band frequency 1s selected Select RF Gen from the soft key options Turn the RF signal off by use of the orange ON OFF function key and note the indicated AF level Turn the RF signal ON and adjust the RF level until the indicated AF level is 20 dB less than the previously noted level The indicated RF level is the 20 dB quieting sensitivity level of the receiver For a GO NO GO test proceed as above until the AF level with no RF input is noted Then turn the RF signal on and adjust the RF level to the figure specified as the 20 dB quieting sensitivity level Now observe the AF level indication A reading greater than 20 dB will indicate GO A reading lower than 20 dB i e closer to zero will indicate NO GO 3 48 LOCAL OPERATION Basic sensitivity test To carry out a basic sensitivity test on an AM receiver Set the RF generator frequency to that required by the test program This setting can be entered using the data input keys or set using the Rx Tx facility discussed under Tx mode The RF generator can be switched off during the setup operation if required by pressing the orange ON OFF function key Select Mod Gen from the RECEIVER TEST screen Set the modulation frequency and level It is usual to use a single sinewave tone when carrying out sensitivity tests and essential for SINAD tests Select the pre emphasis facility if required by pressing the Pre emph key Return to the RECEIVER TEST
32. rer des signaux RF de faible puissance pour le test d appareils de radio communications La protection de l quipement peut tre alt r e s il n est pas utilis dans les conditions sp cifi es par Aeroflex Aeroflex n a aucun contr le sur l usage de l instrument et ne pourra tre tenu pour responsable en cas d v nement survenant suite une utilisation diff rente de celle pr vue xi Vorsichtsmassnahmen WARNING CAUTION Note Diese Hinweise haben eine bestimmte Bedeutung in diesem Handbuch WARNING dienen zur Vermeidung von Verletzungsrisiken CAUTION dienen dem Schutz der Ger te Note enthalten wichtige Informationen Gefahrensymbole Die Bedeutung der Gefahrensymbole auf den Ger ten und in der Dokumentation ist wie folgt Symbol Gefahrenart N Beziehen Sie sich auf die Bedienungsanleitung wenn das Messger t mit diesem Symbol markiert ist Machen Sie sich mit der Art der Gefahr und den Aktionen die getroffen werden m ssen bekannt AN Gef hrliche Spannung Warnung vor giftigen Substanzen A Hei e Oberfl che Allgemeine Hinweise zur Verwendung Dieses Produkt wurde entsprechend den Anforderungen von IEC EN61010 1 2001 2002 C2 2003 Sicherheitsanforderungen f r elektrische Ausr stung f r Me aufgaben Steuerung und Laborbedarf Klasse I transportabel zur Verwendung in einer Grad 2 verunreinigten Umgebung entwickelt und getestet Dieses Ger t ist f r Netzv
33. 1 As an individual has a Receiving Order made against him or is adjudicated bankrupt or compounds with creditors or as a corporate body compounds with creditors or has a winding up order made against it or 9 1 2 Parts with possession of the Designated Equipment 9 2 This Licence may be terminated by notice in writing to the Licensee if the Licensee shall be in breach of any of its obligations hereunder and continue in such breach for a period of 21 days after notice thereof has been served on the Licensee 9 3 On termination of this Agreement for any reason Aeroflex may require the Licensee to return to Aeroflex all copies of the Licensed Software in the custody of the Licensee and the Licensee shall at its own cost and expense comply with such requirement within 14 days and shall at the same time certify to Aeroflex in writing that all copies of the Licensed Software in whatever form have been obliterated from the Designated Equipment 10 THIRD PARTY LICENCES The software or part thereof may be the proprietary property of third party licensors In such an event such third party licensors as referenced on the package or the Order Acknowledgement and or Aeroflex may directly enforce the terms of this Agreement and may terminate the Agreement if the Licensee is in breach of the conditions contained herein 11 EXPORT REGULATIONS The Licensee undertakes that where necessary the Licensee will conform with all relevant export regulations imposed by t
34. 125 MHz Check that the difference between the highest and the lowest point noted is less than 1 1 divisions To functionally test the look listen facility first set the following on the UUT Select the Return soft key at the bottom right hand corner of the display and then Return Centre Freq 300 MHz Return Vert Scale toggle 10 2DB DIV until 10 dB per division is displayed Span 100 kHz Res BW Auto Res BW Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 300 MHz at a level of 10 dBm A signal should now appear at the center of the UUT display and be on or close to 1 division down from the top of the display On the UUT select look and listen mode by pressing the Return soft key at the bottom left hand corner of the display and then the Look n Listen soft key Check that the signal is still at the center of the display and on or close to 1 division down from the top of the display Set the RF signal generator to provide 10 kHz deviation at 1 kHz modulation rate on the 300 MHz signal Check that the UUT display now shows an FM modulated signal Turn the front panel volume control up and check that a 1 kHz tone can be heard This verifies the operation of the look listen mode of the Spectrum analyzer The tracking generator is in reality the instrument signal generator and is therefore tested when the signal generator is checked 5 33 ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF broad band power meter Specification F
35. 3 4kHz Return ON COUPLING RC CHARGE AUDIO TEST AUDIO Filter AUDIO FREG 8 GHz LEVEL Em Dist LEVEL 1 BBBBkHz a SH TE Ga 1 BGGGkHz 186 dll Sin LEVEL 188 i i EO BC do M AF2 FREG 1 BBBBkHz Audio AF2 FREG 1 0000kHz Sin LEVEL 188 B8mU Off Pk Hid Sin LEVEL i1 amp 88 GmU AUDIO TEST Increments Increments FRERE 1BBHz AFI FREG 100Hz AUDIO FREH 6 GHz AF1 LEVEL 18 AF1 LEVEL 18 Bm LEVEL Emi AFi FREH 1 GGGAGkH AF FILTER 388 to Z 4kHz HF FILTER 3BH to 3 4kHz i AK gt 4 mM i 2 Sin LEVEL 188 amu r COUPLING AC COUPLING AC AF2 FREQ 1 8886kH Sin LEVEL 106 Am Off Increments AUDIO TEST AFi FREH 106H AFi LEVEL 16 AUDIO FREG BHz LEVEL Bm GEL 1 BOBA Hz YA RF FILTER 300 to 3 4kHz Sin LEBE G ab ab cb sb io AF2 FREQ 1 BBBBkHz COUPLING RE Sin LEVEL 1BB BmU Off Increments AFI FREQ GHz AFL LEVEL 18 8mU AF FILTER 300 to 3 4kHz COUPLING AC Seauen Rudio tial RF CE CTCSS RF Input Level 4u 24 4 AUDIO TEST Bchart Select AUDIO FREQ uto AFL FREQ 1 BBBBkHz LEVELE range Sin LEVE 188 AF2 FREQ 1 8888kHz DA Sin LEVEL 10 Off Increments AFi FREH 106Hz AFi LEVEL 18 AF FILTER 0 3 to Z 4kHz Return COUPLING AC B6037 Test mode screen and menu 6 0 AF TEST with next levels 3 107 Contents Chapter 4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION List of figu
36. 4 Transmitter Frequency 1 GHz Test No 5 Broadband power 10 MHz Test No 6 Transmitter Frequency 10 MHz The above tests compare the generated power and frequency against the broadband power meter and the frequency meter at each of the frequencies specified Related set up Manual tune The functions verified by the above tests are Signal generator frequency and level accuracy Power meter accuracy Test No 7 to 14 Narrow band power meter Power level 10 dBm Test No 7 to 60 dBm Test No 14 These tests compare the generated power levels against the narrowband power meter readings Related set ups Frequency 10 MHz IF Bandwidth 30 kHz The functions verified by the above tests are Signal generator level accuracy Signal generator attenuators Spectrum analyzer level accuracy Receiver attenuators INSTALLATION Test No 15 FM deviation 50 kHz This test checks the signal generator FM deviation against the modulation meter reading Related set ups Frequency 10 MHz level 26 dBm IF bandwidth 300 kHz audio bandwidth 0 3 to 3 4 kHz FM demodulation The functions verified by the above tests are Signal generator FM accuracy modulation meter FM accuracy modulation generator audio generator level accuracy Test No 16 Modulation frequency 1 kHz This test checks the modulation generator output frequency against the audio counter reading Related set ups Related set ups Frequency 10 MHz level 26 dBm
37. 5 MHz Mod Gen Gen 2 LEVEL 10 kHz FREQ 1 kHz All other modulation generators and noise measurements should be switched OFF 3 Set the Modulation meter to monitor FM in a 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth Noise averaging on 4 Check the Modulation meter indicates a reading within 5 10 Hz of the deviation set Repeat with the UUT set to each of the remaining carrier frequencies shown in the Results table 5 15 5 Refer to Results table 5 16 on page 5 42 Set the UUT to RF Gen FREQ 600 MHz Mod Gen Gen 2 LEVEL 75 kHz 6 Check the modulation meter indicates a reading within 5 10 Hz of the deviation set Repeat with the UUT set to provide deviations of 50 kHz 25 kHz and 5 kHz 7 Refer to Results table 5 17 on page 5 42 With the deviation still set at 5 kHz connect the LF output of the Modulation meter to the AF input of the UUT Set the LF LEVEL control to the brown marker on the Modulation meter 8 Select the 0 3 to 3 4 kHz AF Filter on the UUT and select distortion measurement 9 Check that the distortion indicated on the UUT is less than 1 10 Switch distortion measurement off 5 15 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 11 Refer to Results table 5 18 on page 5 42 Set the UUT Mod Gen 2 to provide 10 kHz deviation level at a frequency of 50 Hz 12 Select the 30 Hz to 50 kHz filter on the Modulation meter 13 Check that the Modulation meter reads 10 kHz deviation 10 10 Hz Repeat for UUT modula
38. AF generator 2 frequency AF generator 1 level AF generator 2 level RF center frequency RF frequency span RF level t f Tx test mode Tx test mode Tx test mode Tx test mode Tx test mode Rx test mode Rx test mode Rx test mode Rx test mode Rx test mode Rx test mode AF test mode AF test mode AF test mode AF test mode Spec ana Spec ana Spec ana T The RF generator can be made to step up or down through each channel of a mobile radio system type by setting the A frequency to the channel spacing frequency The SPEC ANA mode SPAN adjustment using the FREQ and U keys sets the span to predetermined values These are not adjustable by the user See Setting up SPAN on page 3 56 The SPEC ANA mode RF LEVEL adjustment using the LEVEL and 2 keys changes the RF reference level in steps of 1 display division This can be either 2 dB div or 10 dB div dependent on the value of dB div set in the SPEC ANA mode 3 67 LOCAL OPERATION Assigning The assignment of the incremental keys is shown in the display along with the step value To assign a parameter to a pair of keys first select the parameter as if to change the value using the data input keys but rather than entering a new value press the orange ALT A key Now enter the value of the step to be incremented at each key press followed by the correct terminator key For example to assign the FREQ and 5 keys to AF generator 1 in the Tx T
39. Berylium Kupfer gefertigt Dies ist eine Verbindung welche aus einem Berylliumanteil von ca 5 besteht Bei normaler Verwendung besteht kein Gesundheitsrisiko Das Metall darf nicht bearbeitet geschwei t oder sonstiger W rmebehandlung ausgesetzt werden Es muf als Sonderm ll entsorgt werden Es darf nicht durch Verbrennung entsorgt werden A A Nickel Metalhydride In diesem Ger t wird ein Nickel Metalhybrid Ni MH Akkusatz verwendet Versuchen Sie nicht diesen zu ffnen auszubauen oder zu zerst ren Der Akkusatz beinhaltet keine vom Anwender auszutauschenden Teile und kann auch nicht repariert werden Unter abnormalen Bedingungen kann der Akkusatz falls ausgebaut oder ge ffnet explodieren auslaufen oder bei hohen Temperaturen auch Feuer fangen SchlieBen sie die Akkuanschl sse niemals kurz Der Akkusatz enth lt neben einem tzenden Kalium Hydroxid Elektrolyten welcher Ver tzungen des Auges und der Haut hervorrufen kann auch Nickel Hydroxid welches sich bei Einatmung zur Sch digungen f hrt oder Ber hrung mit der Haut eine Reizung des betroffenen Bereiches bewirkt In allen F llen ist die betroffene Stelle mit ausreichend Wasser zu berieseln und rztliche Hilfe in Anspruch zu nehmen Verwenden Sie bei der Handhabung von besch digen Akkus Schutzhandschuhe Sollte der Akkusatz auslaufen oder eine mechanische Besch digung aufweisen so ist er umgehend zu entfernen Ersetzen Sie diesen nur durch einen identischen Akkusatz des g
40. CI Dada que el litio es una substancia t xica las bater as de este material no deben ser aplastadas quemadas o arrojadas junto a basuras ordinarias No trate de recargar este tipo de bater as No las cortocircuite o fuerce su descarga ya que puede dar lugar a que la esta emita gases se recaliente o explote xxi Berilio cobre Algunos componentes mec nicos contenidos en este instrumento incorporan berilio cobre en su proceso de fabricaci n Se trata de una aleaci n con un contenido aproximado de berilio del 5 lo que no representa ning n riesgo durante su uso normal El material no debe ser manipulado soldado ni sometido a ning n proceso que implique la aplicaci n de calor Para su eliminaci n debe tratarse como un residuo especial El material NO DEBE eliminarse mediante incineraci n JA N quel Hidruro Met lico Ni MH Este equipo utiliza un paquete de bater as hibrido N quel Hidruro Met lico Ni MH No intente abrir desmantelar o mutilar el paquete de bater as El paquete de bater as no contiene ning n componente reemplazable por el usuario y no puede ser reparado Bajo circunstancias anormales el paquete de bater as puede explotar tener fugas o arder si es expuesto a altas temperaturas o fuego o si es abierto o desmontado No cortocircuite los terminales del paquete de bater as Este paquete de bater as contiene un electrolito de hidr xido pot sico absorvido corrosivo que puede causar quemaduras e
41. DIST S N DIST N to switch the UUT distortion meter on 4 Check that the distortion meter reads between 1 4 and 2 6 distortion 1 e 2 distortion 5 of reading 0 5 distortion 5 Set AF Gen 2 level to 250 mV 6 Select AF Gen 1 level and adjust until the UUT voltmeter reads 1 00 V 7 Check that the distortion meter reads between 23 2 and 26 8 distortion 1 e 25 distortion 5 of reading 0 5 distortion 8 Press Return DIST S N Sinad to switch the UUT SINAD meter on 9 Check that the SINAD meter reads 12 dB 1 dB 5 24 ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF input tests Modulation analyzer FM Specification Frequency range Modulation frequency range Deviation range Resolution Accuracy see Note 1 Demodulation distortion Demodulation scope accuracy Demodulation output socket Demodulation filters Residual FM Note 1 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz 10 Hz to 15 kHz 0 to 75 kHz 10 Hz below 2 kHz deviation 196 above 2 kHz deviation 5 resolution at 1 kHz modulation frequency 7 5 resolution for modulation frequencies from 50 Hz to 10 kHz Less than 296 at 1 kHz and 5 kHz FM 10 200 mV peak to peak 10 per 1 kHz deviation 300 Hz LP 300 Hz HP 3 kHz LP 0 3 to 3 4 kHz BP 15 kHz LP 50 kHz LP 750 Us de emphasis Less than 30 Hz 300 Hz to 3 4 kHz At low modulation levels the residual AM FM may become significant Test equipment 5 5 MHz to 1 GHz Deviation O to
42. Hz 20 kHz MIXER gt SSB DEMOD TO DEMOD AF ON B1 2 A B1 2 SYSTEMS BOARD B3 1 AGC AGC gt FILTER FILTER TO OSCILLOSCOPE INPUT TO RMS A D CONVERTER ON B1 2 B1 2 B1 2 B1 2 B1 2 MICROPROCESSOR BOARD gt DISTORTION BANDWIDTH gt o lt o AF SINAD MULTIPLEXER FILTERS FILTERS 10 Miz FILTER REFERENCE TO PEAK DETECTOR ON ICRA MICROPROCESSOR BOARD FROM B1 2 BROAD BAND POWER METER PULSE DEMOD OUTPUT SHAPER INPUT C3320 4 5 Fig 4 2 Simplified block diagram TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Tx test mode When operating in the Tx TEST mode the Service Monitor has to provide a source of modulation for the transmitter being tested and also analyze the RF output signal from the transmitter Modulation sources The modulating signal is provided by one or both of the audio generators or the data generator and is taken from the AF output connector on the front panel A F OUTPUT DRIVER X NL TO AF O P ON FRONT AF GEN 1 AF GEN 1 PANEL AFGEN1 WAVEFORM OUTPUT FREQ SHAPE LEVEL MODULATION DATA DATA DATA DRIVER LOOK UP TABLES Fy EPROM AF GEN 2 N WAVEFORM SHAPE MOD CONTROL AFGEN2 FREQ LOOK AND LISTEN DATA SWEEP DRIVER DATA TO 90 MHz VOLTAGE CON TROLLED osc C1412 Fig 4 3 AF generator detailed block diagram Audio generators Included in the monitor are two audio generators shown as AF generators on the simplified block diagram They are used as modulatio
43. IF bandwidth 300 kHz audio bandwidth 0 3 to 3 4 kHz FM demodulation The functions verified by the above tests are modulation generator audio generator frequency accuracy Test No 17 AM Depth 50 This test checks the signal generator AM against the modulation meter reading Related set ups Frequency 10 MHz level 26 dBm IF bandwidth 0 3 to 3 4 kHz AM demodulation The functions verified by the above tests are Signal generator AM accuracy modulation meter AM accuracy audio generator frequency accuracy audio generator level accuracy audio filters audio counter Using the Service Monitor The monitor can be used as a bench instrument either flat standing or inclined using the elevating front feet The monitor can also be used as a field service instrument while left in the operational case It can be operated in any position convenient to the operator See the Caution under Ventilation earlier in this chapter Note if the Service Monitor is supplied with the non operational soft carrying case that has no verntilation apertures then the Service Monitor must be removed from the case before operating 2 12 INSTALLATION Routine maintenance Ventilation fan and filter The ventilator fan on the rear of Service Monitor is fitted with a filter to prevent the ingress of foreign matter into it This should be inspected and cleaned at regular intervals The procedure for this 15 as follows Disconnect the Service Mon
44. Il ne pr sente aucun danger en utilisation normale Toutefois cet alliage ne doit pas tre travaill soud ou soumis un processus qui implique l utilisation d une source de chaleur En cas de destruction il sera entrepos dans un container sp cial IL ne devra pas tre d truit par incin ration Nickel Hydrure Un pack batterie au Nickel Hydrure Ni MH est utilis dans cet quipement Ne pas craser transpercer ouvrir d monter ou intervenir m caniquement de quelque facon que ce soit Le pack batterie ne contient pas de composants r parables Sous des conditions anormales le pack batterie peut exploser fuir ou prendre feu si on l expose aux temp ratures lev es ou au feu ou si on l ouvre ou le d monte Ne pas court circuiter les bornes Ce pack batterie contient un lectrolyte hydroxyde de potassium qui est corrosif pouvant causer des br lures chimiques aux yeux et sur la peau ainsi que de l hydroxyde de nickel qui est nocif lorsqu il est inhal ou en contact avec la peau En cas de contact avec la peau laver imm diatement la surface touch e avec beaucoup d eau et s adresser un service m dical Utiliser des gants de protection lorsque l on touche une batterie endommag e Si la batterie a eu une fuite ou une ventilation il faut la remplacer imm diatement Utilisez seulement une batterie identique du m me fabricant ou avec un mod le recommand par Aeroflex D brancher le c ble d alimentation
45. LEVEL 50 3 Set the Modulation meter to monitor AM in a 0 3 to 3 4 kHz bandwidth 4 Check the Modulation meter for a reading within 7 of setting 1 digit 5 Repeat step 4 but with the UUT RF generator set to each of the remaining carrier frequencies shown in the Results table 5 10 on page 5 40 6 Refer to Results table 5 11 on page 5 40 Set the UUT to RF Gen FREQ 100 MHz LEVEL 5 dBm A INC 1 dB Mod Gen Gen 2 LEVEL 70 and check the Modulation meter for a reading within 7 of setting 1 digit Using the level decrement arrow key decrement the RF level by 1 dB and repeat check Repeat in 1 dB decrements down to 15 dBm 7 Refer to Results table 5 12 on page 5 41 Setthe UUT to RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm Mod Gen Gen 2 LEVEL 5 5 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Check that the Modulation meter reads within 7 of setting 1 digit Repeat for UUT AM depths of 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 and 85 Refer to Results table 5 13 on page 5 41 On the UUT press FREQ 65 Hz to set Mod Gen 2 to 65 Hz Set the Modulation meter to monitor AM in a 30 Hz to 50 kHz flat bandwidth Check the Modulation meter for a reading within 10 of setting 1 digit Repeat step 11 with the UUT set to each of the following mod rates 140 Hz 500 Hz 2 kHz and 5 kHz Set the UUT mod rate to 15 kHz and check the Modulation meter for a reading within 15 o
46. POSITION rotary control The horizontal sweep trigger can be set for repetitive or single sweep set by the scope mode keys Item 15 on Fig 3 1 Front panel With repetitive mode selected the trace will free run re triggering on the positive going edge of the signal at the end of each sweep In the absence of a signal the trace will auto trigger With single sweep selected the first positive going signal will trigger a sweep The SINGLE key must be pressed to re arm the trigger circuit before another sweep can be triggered 3 88 LOCAL OPERATION Expanded display With the expanded display selected the area of the display available for digital readings is limited The following table shows the data that can be displayed in each test mode Tx FREQ OFFSET POWER MOD FREQ AUDIO FREQ AUDIO FREQ FM AM LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL SINAD S N SINAD S N SINAD S N DISTORTION DISTORTION DISTORTION Persistence The persistence of the scope trace can be selected to suit the user s requirements The expanded display has a Persistence key which steps through the available persistence settings The persistence setting 1s effective on both the expanded and standard oscilloscope displays but can only be set from the expanded display The following table shows the available settings and the approximate decay times Off 0 Low 1 Med 3 High 8 Inf Infinite 3 89 LOCAL OPERATION Stores settings results Overview A secti
47. RE amplifier nieto de teres eg ad ss Deponie 4 14 Audio getieratots x rte sii Nee WU 4 14 Modulation control e GU dede 4 14 Pre emphasis hilter u nia TUR CUR NAUES RS OI e o acs 4 14 AF measuring circuits nennen nennen nennen e nnne nene nee nein nennen nnns 4 14 Oscilloscope function ue oet ee auth al sack RR ORIS 4 15 Dx test mode ed e oye e Si A dte beris 4 15 Spectrum analyzermode ue 4 15 Look and listen function optional ss 4 15 AE dest modern rn a n eet bao ed 4 15 Fig 4 1 Block diagram of power supply module sese 4 2 Fig 4 2 Simplified block diagram eere ener nnne 4 5 Fig 4 3 AF generator detailed block diagram seen 4 7 Fig 4 4 Input switching and broad band power meter block diagram 4 9 4 1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Overview This simple description is provided to give the user an insight into the working of the Service Monitor at the block diagram level See Fig 4 2 Simplified block diagram The power supply and display unit are described first The functional circuit blocks of each test mode are then described in sequence The Service Monitor is of modular construction comprising a number of printed circuit boards at least 15 depending on options included These are housed in two sub assemblies along with input and output attenuators power supply
48. RF generator However each generator can only serve one function at the same time There is only one AF measurement path which is switched by the software between receiver test and transmitter test functions SPEC ANA With SPEC ANA selected the SPECTRUM ANALYZER screen is displayed and access to the spectrum analyzer features is available See fold out diagram 5 0 at the end of this chapter The RF signal generator is active producing an RF signal at the frequency and level set in the Rx TEST mode if the tracking generator feature is not selected The spectrum analyzer tracking generator signal is provided by the RF generator The modulation generators will modulate the RF signal generator with the same provisos as in Rx TEST mode If the LOOK AND LISTEN screen is displayed AF Gen 2 is used to provide the sweep signal therefore it is not available to provide modulation AF TEST With AF TEST selected the AUDIO TEST screen is displayed and access to the AF TEST features is available See fold out diagram 6 0 at the end of this chapter The RF generator is disabled 3 21 LOCAL OPERATION Press To Talk facility A mode switching capability is provided by the Microphone with PTT switch optional accessory See Performance data optional accessories in Chapter 1 With microphone selected as the external modulation source and the instrument operating in the Tx TEST mode pressing the PTT switch causes the instrument to
49. RF test signal generated on the RF generator oscillator board A13 1 The operation of the generators is as described for the Tx TEST mode but rather than the output level being called up as an output voltage this is specified as a modulation level The necessary calculations are performed by the instrument software The DATA GENERATOR facility is available in the Rx TEST mode Modulation control The output from each generator is taken through selector switches to a summing amplifier at the input to the modulation control circuits The signal from an external modulation source or from the modulation options circuits is also summed in at this point An external modulation source can be connected to the EXTERNAL MOD IN connector on the rear panel and is passed through a level control circuit of the same type as that in the AF generator circuit incorporating a digital to analogue converter with the signal input to the voltage reference point and the level set by the value on the digital input The summed modulation signal is taken through a modulation correction level control circuit before being routed to either the FM attenuator digital to analogue converter or to the RF level digital to analogue converter This device provides fine level control of the RF signal by applying a DC level to the AM modulator as described earlier Pre emphasis filter A 750 us pre emphasis filter is included on the audio processor board and is switched into the FM
50. This program is described below When it is necessary to prove that the performance of the Service Monitor meets the published performance data the Acceptance tests described in Chapter 5 should be carried out Self tests The built in Self Test program measures the output parameters of the RF generator using the transmitter test functions The RF generator output is coupled internally and no external connections are required The self test program is accessed through the help set up menu and comprises 17 tests which are listed on the display when the Self Test key is pressed Before running the program the Service Monitor should be reset to the factory preset state This is done by pressing the MEM key to display the STORE RECALL screen and menu The message Recall Store No is shown key in and enter the digits 01 The Service Monitor will now be ready to run the self test program To run the program the GO key is pressed and the tests are carried out consecutively The legend ACTIVE is displayed against each test as it is carried out which changes to PASS or FAIL as each test is completed If a particular test fails the reason is given alongside the FAIL legend together with the measurement The tests carried out the related set ups and the functions verified are listed below Test No 1 Broadband power 500 MHz Test No 2 Transmitter Frequency 500 MHz Test No 3 Broadband power 1 GHz Test No
51. With the SPEC ANA mode selected the screen and menu shown in fold out diagram 5 0 is displayed In the SPEC ANA mode the sweep generator causes the acceptance frequency of the analyzer input circuits to repeatedly sweep over the selected frequency range The level of RF signal present at the active RF input connector is measured at regular points along the sweep and plotted progressively across the display thus building up a graph of RF level against frequency The uses to which this facility can be put are varied Within the radio communication field these can include examining the output of a transmitter for spurious radiations for sideband response or noise levels The activity of nearby transmitters can be monitored as an aid to locating interference Using the tracking generator facility the frequency response of filters can be checked and their pass bands plotted Setting up Sweep range The sweep range can be defined in two ways either as a center frequency and a frequency span or as a start frequency and a stop frequency The sweep range will depend on the signal or signals being examined and the harmonics and other spurious frequencies that are to be located The datum points are defined using the data input keys in the same manner as other frequency entries such as RF generator frequency or Tx frequency The datum point being defined is selected by pressing the relevant soft key which will cause the datum to be
52. adequate supply isolators are accessible supply wiring 1s adequate and properly routed The condition of the mains supply lead and supply connector s Check that the mains supply switch isolates the Service Monitor from the supply The correct rating and type of supply fuses Security and condition of covers and handles Check the supply indicator functions if fitted Check the presence and condition of all warning labels and markings and supplied safety information Check the wiring in re wireable plugs and appliance connectors If any defect is noted this should be rectified before proceeding with the following electrical tests 2 Earth bonding tests Earth bonding tests should be carried out using a 25 A 12 V maximum open circuit voltage DC source Tests should be limited to a maximum duration of 5 seconds and have a pass limit of 0 1 after allowing for the resistance of the supply lead Exceeding the test duration can cause damage to the equipment The tests should be carried out between the supply earth and exposed case metalwork no attempt should be made to perform the tests on functional earths e g signal carrying connector shells or screen connections as this will result in damage to the equipment 2 14 INSTALLATION 3 Insulation tests A 500 V DC test should be applied between the protective earth connection and combined live and neutral supply connections with the equipment supply switch in the on positi
53. at Aeroflex s discretion replacement of the 54 software or a fix for the problem or an effective and efficient work around Aeroflex does not warrant that the operation of any software will be uninterrupted or error free AEROFLEX INTERNATIONAL LTD SOFTWARE LICENCE AND WARRANTY The above Warranty does not apply to 6 1 Defects resulting from software not supplied by Aeroflex from unauthorised modification or misuse or from operation outside of the specification 6 2 Third party produced Proprietary Software which Aeroflex may deliver with its products in such case the third party Software Licence Agreement including its warranty terms shall apply 7 The remedies offered above are sole and exclusive remedies and to the extent permitted by applicable law are in lieu of any implied conditions guarantees or warranties whatsoever and whether statutory or otherwise as to the software all of which are hereby expressly excluded 8 INDEMNITY 8 1 Aeroflex shall defend at its expense any action brought against the Licensee alleging that the Licensed Software infringes any patent registered design trademark or copyright and shall pay all Licensor s costs and damages finally awarded up to an aggregate equivalent to the Licence fee provided the Licensee shall not have done or permitted to be done anything which may have been or become any such infringement and shall have exercised reasonable care in protecting the same failing which the License
54. can be either sine or square wave This is controlled by first selecting the audio generator as for ON OFF control above then pressing the Shape key to toggle between the options Note that the audio generators are also used as modulation generators for the receiver test signal generator If both generators are set up as a modulation source in the Tx test mode switching to Rx TEST mode will show both modulation generators in the OFF condition Either or both generators can be set up and turned on within the Rx TEST mode The frequency level and shape settings of their last use in the Rx TEST mode will be retained within the Rx TEST mode setup These settings will be effective when the generators are switched to the ON condition in receiver test mode Their use as audio generators in the Tx TEST mode will then be disabled Pressing the Lock key locks the output level of the two audio generators to the same level The unselected generator locks to the level of the selected generator When the audio generators are set to the required settings press the Return key to restore the Tx TEST menu 3 31 LOCAL OPERATION Making measurements This section describes the actions needed to make measurements of each parameter associated with transmitter testing All tests are described individually as one off tests but in practice once set up all active parameters will be measured simultaneously with continuous updating and the
55. captured from the current absolute measurement by pressing the Inst dBr soft key Abs Meas Pressing the Abs Meas soft key cancels the current dBr reverence level and restores the digital modulation reading to absolute levels 3 46 LOCAL OPERATION Making measurements Examples of receiver tests The procedure for making each of the tests listed in the receiver testing overview above follows Some of the tests may require separate operations and others will only require a reading to be made Sensitivity Receiver sensitivity is defined as the minimum RF level required at the antenna to produce an intelligible output of the modulated information The problem with the above definition is that of defining intelligible output As this is a subjective decision sensitivity specifications require certain parameters to be set down The nature of FM and phase transmissions makes sensitivity measurements less straightforward than with AM transmissions A sensitivity test on an AM receiver can be stated as X watts audio output from Y uV RF input at Z modulation As there is no direct linear relationship between RF signal level and audio output with FM receivers most manufacturers normally quote receiver sensitivity in one of the following four Ways 12 dB SINAD sensitivity 20 dB weighted SINAD sensitivity 20 dB signal to noise sensitivity 20 dB quieting sensitivity When defined as part of a specification the sensit
56. control AF generator 2 when pulsed tones are required as modulation such as for Digitally Coded Squelch applications The Q1 output of the data generator IC is used as the A13 address line on the lookup table EPROM The data generator will thereby directly switch this line which is arranged to cause full output or no output The result is that data applied to the flip flop D2 input will appear as tone pulses at the output of AF generator 2 When not required to produce data the data generator is configured as a transparent flip flop with the A13 address line functioning normally 4 8 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Receiver circuits Input switching TO OVERLOAD WARNING CIRCUIT BNC lt OVERLOAD RF OUT DETECTOR FROM TO FIRST RF GENERATOR Y FREQUENCY VIA ATTENUATOR CHANGER VIA ATTENUATOR 0 10dB ATTEN 25kHz POWER LEVEL gt 9mV FOR 7dBm TYPE INPUT TO OVERLOAD WARNING CIRCUIT N TYPE AGC 25kHz RF IN OUT AMPLIFIER 1V RMS 0 10dB 25kHz ATTEN DETECTOR BNC OVERLOAD RF ANTENNA DETECTOR LIMITER DETECTOR RF IN TO OVERLOAD WARNING CIRCUIT 1411 Fig 4 4 Input switching and broad band power meter block diagram The RF signal from the transmitter enters the monitor at either the BNC antenna input or the N Type connector on the input output switching board A detailed block diagram of the input switching board is shown in Fig 4 4 Input switc
57. detector To plot the AGC response of a receiver set up the instrument and receiver as described for receiver audio frequency response tests The test can be made at one RF frequency only or at various points throughout the receiver tuning range This will depend on the reason for making the test and the specification of the receiver Set the RF generator frequency of the Service Monitor to the selected tuning point of the receiver with the modulation level set to 30 at 1 kHz Increase the RF output level until an AF output is registered on the Service Monitor display either bar chart or oscilloscope Reduce the RF output level until the AF output level of the receiver reaches the noise level Record the RF signal level and the AF output level Increase the RF generator level by suitable increments and record the level of AF output at each point Continue until the RF input to the receiver reaches the maximum allowed by the receiver specification or until the AF output level no longer increases whichever occurs at the lowest RF level FM receivers incorporate limiting circuits which reduce the level of the RF signal by clipping the extremities of the signal rather than by compression which is necessary with AGC circuits for AM receivers 3 52 LOCAL OPERATION Dx test duplex testing Overview DIST ORTION METER SERVICE A MONITOR AF VOLT METER AF BNC meam ANTENNA AF our man
58. explained Producing hard copy of results on an external printer is described Before using the instrument familiarize yourself with the power requirements and powering up procedure described in Chapter 2 Installation 3 3 LOCAL OPERATION Front panel layout 1 communications service monitor 2944B ANTENNA O O a mo 7 8 9 LY 5 OG LOCAL AC AF GEN ACCESSORY T G y SUPPLY e SQUELCH VOLUME OUT AF INPUT G y Pac esi OOO Fig 3 1 Front panel Display The dominant feature of the front panel is the display screen used to give information about the operation of the instrument Information relating to the state of the instrument the mode of operation and results of measurements and tests is all given visually on the display screen See Fig 3 2 Typical displays The screen is divided into four main areas They are The information display area which shows the parameters relating to the test together with settings and results including bar charts When the oscilloscope function is called up all bar charts are removed from the display and the standard or expanded oscilloscope screen displayed When the SPEC ANA test mode is selected the display changes to the SPECTRUM ANALYZER screen The test title area where the current test description is displayed LED indicators
59. fitted See the descriptions relating to those options for details LOCAL OPERATION AF Filters The AF Low pass and band pass filters available for the Rx TEST mode for the AF TEST mode and for the modulation meter within the Tx TEST mode can be customized from the setup page accessed from this key The AF Filters setup page is shown below Low Frea SaHz Band Pass 1 15 8kHz gt LPi LPS LP4 Pass 1 Low Frea island Band Pass 2 3 4kHz gt LP LPS LP4 Pass 2 Low Freas Hz BEER Fass 3 3 HkHz gt LFZ LFS LP4 Low Frea BERR Band Pass 4 38GHz gt LPL LPS 1 4 Pass 4 Low Pass Filter Bands 250Hz to 1 8kHz 20 kHz B5888 Fig 3 4 AF Filter HELP SETUP page Factory Default filter settings The Factory Preset soft key will reset all of the filters to their Factory Default settings The low pass filter settings are 15 0 kHz LP1 3 4 kHz LP2 3 0 kHz LP3 and 300 Hz LP4 The Factory Default band pass filter settings are as shown below Band pass 1 300 Hz high pass 3 4 kHz low pass LP2 Band pass 2 50 Hz high pass 15 0 kHz low pass LP1 Band pass 3 300 Hz high pass 15 0 kHz low pass LP1 Band pass 4 50 Hz high pass 3 4 kHz low pass LP2 Low pass filters The four low pass preset filters can each be set to any frequency within the range 250 Hz to 1 0 KHz and 3 0 KHz to 20 0 KHz The soft keys associ
60. frequency and 4 and LEVEL 9 and 2 These enable the frequency and level of the RF generator or a selected AF generator to be adjusted in pre defined steps The assignment and the value of the steps is shown on the display The FREQ ft and 4 keys can be assigned to the Tx frequency value or either of the audio generators when in the Tx TEST mode the RF generator or either of the modulation generators when in the Rx TEST mode or either of the AF generators when the AF TEST mode is active The LEVEL and keys have the same options The frequency keys and the level keys do not have to be assigned to the same generator The FREQ fT and keys can be assigned to the RF generator frequency or transmitter frequency as channel increments When operating in Dx TEST mode the increment keys are disabled The SPEC ANA mode uses the FREQ and X keys for span range and center frequency adjustment The LEVEL and 4 keys are used for reference level adjustment See page 3 68 The span is ranged up or down in a 1 2 5 sequence from 1 0 kHz to 1 0 GHz Adjustment to the span by these keys is linear about the center frequency and will not adjust below zero or above the top frequency limit The LEVEL and keys adjust the reference level range of the spectrum analyzer in either 2 dB or 10 dB steps depending on the setting of the reference level vertical range Variable control The large rotary contro
61. functionally checked using an RF signal generator and power meter by checking the signal generator level before applying it to the UUT It should be noted that no guarantees can be given of the mismatch uncertainties that may be introduced if this method is used 5 35 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Acceptance Test Results Tables 400 000 399 999 400 001 1050 00000 1049 999999 1050 000001 500 00000 499 999999 500 000001 188 88888 188 888879 188 888881 177 77 777 177 777769 177 777 771 166 66666 166 666659 166 666661 155 55555 155 555549 155 555551 144 44444 144 444439 144 444441 133 33333 133 333329 133 333331 122 22222 122 222219 122 222221 111 11111 111 111109 111 111111 Results table 5 2 Signal generator level 21 dBm versus frequency MHz Frequency Lower Upper Result Result limit dBm limit dBm N type out N type out Antenna in N type in 10 MHz 100 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz 400 MHz 500 MHz 600 MHz 700 MHz 800 MHz 900 MHz 1000 MHz 5 36 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 3 ALC linearity at 10 MHz Level Lower dBm limit N N a A 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 29 0 30 0 31 0 32 0 33 0 34 0 35 0 36 0 37 0 38 0 39 0 40 0 19 0 20 0 21 0 22 0 23 0 24 0 25 0 26 0 27 0 28 0 29 0 30 0 31 0 32 0 33 0 34 0 35 0 36 0 5 37 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 4 ALC linearity at 500 MHz 5 38 ACCEPTANCE TE
62. g n ral Symboles signalant un risque La signification des symboles de danger apparaissant sur l quipement et dans la documentation est la suivante Symbole Nature du risque Reportez vous au manuel d utilisation quand ce symbole appara t sur l instrument Familiarisez vous avec la nature du danger et la conduite tenir Tension dangereuse Danger produits toxiques Surfaces chaudes pP Conditions g n rales d utilisation Ce produit a t concu et test pour tre conforme aux exigences des normes CEI EN61010 1 2001 2002 C2 2003 exigences de s curit des quipements lectriques pour la mesure le contr le et l usage en laboratoire pour des quipements Classe I portables et pour une utilisation dans un environnement de pollution de niveau 2 Cet quipement est concu pour fonctionner partir d une alimentation de cat gorie I ou II Cet quipement doit tre prot g de l introduction de liquides ainsi que des pr cipitations d eau de neige etc Lorsqu on transporte cet quipement d un environnement chaud vers un environnement froid il est important de laisser l quipement se stabiliser en temp rature avant de le connecter une alimentation afin d viter toute formation de condensation L appareil doit tre utilis uniquement dans le cadre des conditions d environnement sp cifi es au chapitre 1 Performance data toute autre utilisation peut endommager les syst mes de protect
63. keys e Set the RF output level to a suitable value by pressing the RF Gen key followed by the orange LEVEL key to highlight the GEN and LEVEL legends on the display Use the data input keys to enter the RF level e Set the modulation level to match the specification of the system to which the pager is assigned Press the Tone Level key to highlight the ma legend on the display Enter the required modulation level using the data input keys e Setthe bit rate to match the specification of the system to which the pager is assigned Press the Bit Rate key to highlight the legend on the display Enter the value of the required bit rate as a frequency using the data input keys terminated by Hz e Ifthe system requires the transmitted data to have an inverted format press the Invert key to make the legend beside the Polarity legend on the display read Inverted The invert key toggles the legend between Inverted and Normal e Set the RIC Radio Identification Code to match that of the pager Press the RIC key to highlight the legend BIS on the display and enter the required number using the data entry keys followed by ENTER An attempt to enter a number that exceeds the range of the system maximum will not be accepted and the previously displayed 81 will be retained The Service Monitor is now configured to produce a signal compatible with the radio pager With the radio pager powered up and located as mentioned above press
64. modulation path when selected as part of the Rx TEST set up AF measuring circuits The AF output signal from the receiver under test is fed into the AF INPUT connector of the Service Monitor This signal is directly fed to the audio processor board and applied to a switched divide by 2 divide by 20 circuit It is then routed through two paths one to the AF filtering and measuring path the other to the oscilloscope input circuits 4 14 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Oscilloscope function When used in the Rx TEST mode the oscilloscope displays the AF input signal fed to the AF input connector The signal is passed through a sensitivity control circuit for scope calibration before following the same path as used in the Tx TEST mode Dx test mode The Dx TEST mode uses all the circuit elements described in the proceeding sections The technical description is valid for all three modes The display presentation allows parameters applicable to transmitter testing and receiver testing to be seen simultaneously Spectrum analyzer mode Data to be presented as the active trace on the spectrum analyzer display is obtained through the following circuits The input frequency of the Service Monitor is made to sweep through the frequency range selected on the display by sweeping the first local oscillator located on A7 1 Any signals which fall within the sweep range will pass through the IF circuits of the Service Monitor The output from the thir
65. o TE i gogog O UUT E B La To 0 O odi Omod O Sel FETT a m 000 E O L on LI LIT id RF INPUT Two turn loop 25 mm diameter C6044 Fig 5 6 RF carrier leakage check 7 Refer to Results table 5 8 on page 5 39 Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 6 with the 50 Q load connected to the BNC socket of the UUT 8 Setthe UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 40 dBm FREQ 501 9873 MHz 9 Tune the Spectrum analyzer to monitor 501 9873 MHz Set other Spectrum analyzer controls to allow the display of signals below 121 dBm if using the 2383 this can be set to meter mode 10 Hold the loop 25 mm away from the UUT case and check that the level picked up on the Spectrum analyzer is less than 0 5 UV PD 11 To confirm the low residual FM of the UUT the use of an extremely low noise FM demodulator is necessary this is achieved by using the IFR 2041 Low noise signal generator as the local oscillator for the 2305 Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 7 5 11 ACCEPTANCE TESTING DVM Signal generator TT E SEES ee E E BB VOLTMETER ado 000 oO A O q1 RF OUTPUT INPUT TER
66. of measurements This allows the user to balance the speed of testing against greater repeatability of measurement The number of measurements made can be set within the range 1 to 20 by entering the required figure using the data input keys Each measurement is made using a certain number of noise samples this variable can be changed as follows Noise Samples X10 This allows the number of noise samples used in each noise and distortion measurement to be changed Numbers of samples are displayed in tens up to a maximum of 200 samples More noise samples should be used when the signal measurement is stable but the residual is noisy fewer samples should be used when the signal is less stable Signal S One measurement _8_ _ _____ Average of noise samples N is a multiple of 10 Displayed result is the rolling average of a number of measurements Fig 3 5 Relationship of measurement and number of samples Return Returns to the Setup page 3 18 LOCAL OPERATION Bar charts The bar charts used to indicate signal levels can be set to autorange or to user selected ranges The current state of each bar chart is shown by either an A for Autoranging or H for Held range at the left of it The top level screen of Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST and AF TEST all have a Scope Bar key Pressing this key will change the soft keys to those shown below The function of each key 15 explained Barchart Select Thi
67. or in dBuV with the dB key Voltage levels and dBuV levels will be shown as PD or EMF depending on the selection made on the RF Setup page page 3 15 The output range from each connector is given in the Performance data section of Chapter 1 The signal generator output level from the BNC connector is calibrated up to 5 dBm The output level can be increased to approximately 7 dBm uncalibrated Note that any external attenuator values entered on the RF Setup page will reflect in the level of indicated output If an external attenuator value is currently set output levels which have been modified to take account of the additional attenuation will be indicated on the display by against them See RF Power Ext Atten dB on page 3 15 To enter an output value press the RF key followed by the orange LEVEL function key The and ESMEE legends will be highlighted Enter the required value using the data entry numeric keys and the relevant terminator key The level will be displayed in correct engineering convention Variable control With the and WEBI legends highlighted the GEN LEVEL parameter can be adjusted by using the variable control Level increment The LEVEL and keys can be assigned to RF generator level adjustment See Incremental adjustments which starts on page 3 67 Attenuator hold The Service Monitor has an attenuator hold facility that allows for a seamless range of RF output level T
68. provided for guidance purposes and involves the use of voltages and currents that can cause injury It is important that these tests are only performed by competent personnel Prior to carrying out any inspection and tests the Service Monitor must be disconnected from the mains supply and all external signal connections removed All tests should include the Service Monitor s own supply lead all covers must be fitted and the supply switch must be in the ON position The recommended inspection and tests fall into three categories and should be carried out in the following sequence 1 Visual inspection 2 Earth Bonding Test Class I equipment only 3 Insulation Resistance test inspection A visual inspection should be carried out on a periodic basis This interval is dependent on the operating environment maintenance and use and should be assessed in accordance with guidelines issued by the Health and Safety Executive HSE As a guide this Service Monitor when used indoors in a relatively clean environment would be classified as low risk equipment and hence should be subject to safety inspections on an annual basis If the use of the equipment Is contrary to the conditions specified you should review the safety re test interval As a guide the visual inspection should include the following where appropriate Check that the equipment has been installed in accordance with the instructions provided e g that ventilation is
69. screen and select the AF filter menu Audio Meter key Select the required AF filtering Return to the RECEIVER TEST screen and adjust the RF output level to that required by the test specification Switch the RF generator output ON by pressing the orange ON OFF function key The audio output from the receiver is measured and the level and frequency displayed For measuring sensitivity levels rather than checking against settings the various parameters on the monitor can be adjusted in steps using the LEVEL and 0 keys or by precision adjustment using the variable control AF bandwidth The audio bandwidth of a receiver should be complementary to that of the transmitter or transmitters associated with it The test for audio bandwidth is made by establishing a reference frequency usually 1 kHz and reference level then varying the modulating frequency until the measured audio output level reduces by 3 dB The 3 dB points above and below the reference frequency will be the limits of the AF bandwidth When carrying out audio bandwidth tests the monitor audio filtering should be set to the widest possible i e 50 kHz Note that most FM transceivers apply pre emphasis filtering to the transmitter modulation and de emphasis filtering to the demodulated signal AF distortion The two methods used for quoting distortion within radio receivers are Distortion Factor and SINAD SINAD tests are usually made in conjunction
70. switch to the Rx TEST mode With the instrument set to the Rx TEST mode or Dx TEST mode pressing the PTT switch allows voice modulation of the RF signal from the Service Monitor but mode switching does not happen Tones A soft key designated Tones is included in the top level menus of the Tx TEST mode Rx TEST mode Dx TEST mode and AF TEST mode Pressing this key will display the menu shown in fold out diagram 2 5 3 5 4 5 or 6 5 and give access to the TONES test facility This facility is used to provide modulation generators and demodulation decoders to simulate the various coded calling signals used on mobile radio systems for automatic selective calling of mobile transceivers General The instructions for transmitter testing assume that the Tx TEST mode has been selected and for receiver testing assumes that the Rx TEST mode has been selected However these instructions apply equally to the Dx TEST mode References are made to Dx TEST mode to clarify this or to identify a difference in presentation These references are headed DUPLEX The Dx TEST mode the Oscilloscope function and the TONES facility each have a section of this chapter dedicated to their operation 3 22 LOCAL OPERATION Tx test transmitter testing Overview The Communications Service Monitor has been designed to test the performance of mobile communication equipment This section explains the use of the Tx TEST mode Typical uses ar
71. than that shown for the current setting 3 70 LOCAL OPERATION Sequential tones Overview Sequential tones signaling systems use sequences of audio tones to control various functions of a radio system There are many systems in operation world wide all using up to 15 tones labeled with the hexadecimal digits 0 to E with No Tone as F Some systems make use of extended tones for certain functions Each version has its own tone allocation tables for the 15 tones and its own timing for tone duration The versions for which tone allocation tables and tone duration values are included in the Service Monitor are CCIR ZVEI DZVEI USER 1 USER 2 The USER 1 and USER 2 tables allow tone frequencies and tone durations to be programmed by the user This Service Monitor has encoding facilities with variable parameters which allow signals to be produced for testing systems using precise values and adverse values The decoding facility will measure the frequency and duration of the received tones match the results against the appropriate look up table and list the results with the identification of each tone Observe notes relating to signal routing and RF input attenuators at beginning of this section See page 3 70 Continuous sequential tones can be produced at the same time as CTCSS or DCS tones Using the decoder The sequential tones decoder will function when the instrument is in the Rx TEST mode Press the Decoder key and th
72. that applied to the RF signal Setting external modulation level Press the Ext Mod key which as well as displaying the menu mentioned above will highlight the legend Use the data input keys to set the required level followed by the appropriate Hz KHz or 26 key Hint The modulation source level can be measured using the AF INPUT connector on the front panel and AF LEVEL bar chart or by monitoring the modulation level of the RF generator using the Dx TEST mode Microphone input A microphone suitable for connecting to the accessory socket is available as an optional accessory See Options and accessories in the Performance data section of Chapter 1 The microphone input circuit contains a limiter to prevent over modulation and the external modulation level setting remains effective when the microphone option is selected This gives versatility of test options to suit the user s requirements The microphone input must be selected to make use of the PTT switching facility available in the Tx TEST mode The level of the modulation from the external source will add to the level of any internal modulation and will therefore be included in the total sum of modulation sources The state of the external modulation source can be changed by pressing the orange ON OFF function key when the legend is highlighted Off is displayed next to the external modulation parameters when the external modulation is disabled Note that only
73. the Licensee and Aeroflex International Limited the Licensor By opening this Software package or commencing to use the software you accept the terms of this Agreement If you do not agree to the terms of this Agreement please return the Software package unopened to Aeroflex International Limited or do not use the software 1 DEFINITIONS The following expressions will have the meanings set out below for the purposes of this Agreement Add In Application Software Licensed Software that may be loaded separately from time to time into the Equipment to improve or modify its functionality Computer Application Software Licensed Software supplied to run on a standard PC or workstation Designated Equipment the single piece of Equipment upon which the licensed software is installed Downloaded Software any software downloaded from an Aeroflex web site Embedded Software Licensed Software that forms part of the Equipment supplied by Aeroflex and without which the Equipment cannot function Licence Fee the consideration ruling at the date of this Agreement for the use of one copy of the Licensed Software on the Designated Equipment Licensed Software All and any programs listings flow charts and instructions in whole or in part including Add in Computer Application Downloaded and Embedded Software supplied to work with Designated Equipment 2 LICENCE FEE The Licensee shall pay the Licence Fee to Aeroflex in accordance with the terms of the contract
74. the Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST or AF TEST mode selected the tones will continue to be generated If the tones out routing has been set to give RF tones this is provided by modulation generator 1 The legend Tones will be displayed against MOD1 FREQ on the RECEIVER TEST or DUPLEX screens If ela is selected the sequential tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If mE is selected the tones are still controlled by the orange ON OFF function key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the tones will cease They can then be re started only when the RF SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen or the AF SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen is displayed If the tones out routing has been set to give AF tones this is provided by audio generator 1 The legend Tones will be displayed against AF1 FREQ on the TRANSMITTER TEST DUPLEX or AF TEST screens If Aal is selected the tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If is selected the tones are still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the tones will cease It can then be re started only when the RF SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen or the AF SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen is displayed Testing sequential tone transmitters To test the operation of transmitters sending sequential tones calling signals proceed as follows
75. the input path to the Service Monitor The value of any such attenuators can be entered into the RF Setup page page 3 15 which will cause the power measurement software to calculate the power at the attenuator input The result of this calculation is shown on the RF power bar chart and as the digital power reading Power readings that include an attenuation factor have an inverse video A adjacent to them An inverse video indicates that the receiver input is in held mode The full scale ranges of the RF power bar chart are 10 mW to 100 kW in 15 steps of 1 3 10 sequence 100 mV to 3 kV in 16 steps of 1 3 10 sequence External attenuators Compensation for an external attenuator or test fixture included in the RF input path of the monitor can be programmed The value in dBs of the attenuator should be entered in the RF Power Ext Atten field of the RF Setup page page 3 15 The value of the attenuator will then be included in power calculations and the power indicated by the power meter will be that at the input to the external attenuator This feature makes use of the extended ranges of the power meter The value of the attenuator will also be included in RF level calculations and readouts when in the Rx TEST mode and in Dx TEST mode BY is shown against any signal level that has been calculated to include the external attenuator OSCILLOSCOPE With the oscilloscope facility selected the POWER bar chart is removed f
76. the settings of the Tones In and Tones Out keys on the TONES selection screen This allows the permutations shown in the following table Original tones out Revertive tones in RF RF RF AF AF RF AF AF The revertive tones operation 1s configured by pressing the Revertv Tones key To send a tone burst do one of the following e If TONE BURST has NOT already been selected as the send mode press the Send Mode key to access the send mode menu then press the Tone Burst key The tone sequence will be generated then after the last tone the Service Monitor will change to decode mode ready to decode the revertive tones e If TONE BURST has already been selected as the send mode press the orange ON OFF function key The tone sequence will be generated then after the last tone the Service Monitor will change to decode mode ready to decode the revertive tones The encoder screen can be displayed again by pressing the Encode key 3 75 LOCAL OPERATION CTCSS The CTCSS tones system uses a continuous tone at a precise frequency transmitted below the audio pass band to un squelch the receiver RF CTCSS ENCODER Tone Generate Mode Tone Off Tone Level 1 588kHz Freauency Shift TOS CDL C4 0 nt 187 2Hz B3269 Fig 3 21 RF CTCSS encoder screen and menu Pressing the CTCSS key on the TONES selection screen will display the screen shown in Fig 3 21 RF CTCSS encoder screen and menu T
77. the specification Before switching the Service Monitor on check that the air inlet on the rear panel is not restricted and that there is no loose material close by which could be sucked into the fan Refer to Routine Maintenance later in this chapter for details of cleaning and replacing the air filter The optional operational case has ventilation apertures which align with those of the Service Monitor Ensure that these are not obstructed INSTALLATION Operational case 46662 571 shoulder strap The shoulder strap supplied with the operational case should be attached to the front handles of the Service Monitor When fitting the strap always loop the tails of the strap through the buckles in the reverse direction This will prevent the strap from slipping through the buckle See Fig 2 1 Preventing strap buckle from slipping BUCKLE HANDLE C2509 Fig 2 1 Preventing strap buckle from slipping Bail arm option If the bail arm carrying handle is fitted the Service Monitor will not fit into the optional Operational Case 46662 571 Do not attempt to attach the shoulder strap supplied with this case to a Service Monitor fitted with a bail arm carrying handle Soft carrying operational case part number 46662 616 is designed for use with a Service Monitor fitted with a bail arm carrying handle Power requirements Fuses The Service Monitor can be powered from a wide range of power sources both AC and DC AC suppl
78. these keys is linear about the center frequency and will not adjust below zero or above the top frequency limit When the emma legend is highlighted the FREQ ff and FREQ U keys will increment the center frequency by the value last set up in the Tx TEST mode The LEVEL and keys adjust the reference level of the spectrum analyzer in either 2 dB or 10 dB steps depending on the setting of the reference level vertical range 3 68 LOCAL OPERATION Tones Tones sub mode Audio tones and digital code signals are used for many purposes within radio communication systems The Service Monitor has a TONES mode accessed from the Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST and AF TEST modes This gives facilities for testing tone calling and control systems of the following types e Sequential Tones A selective calling system using audio tones e CTCSS Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System e DCS Digitally Coded Squelch e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency e POCSAG Post Office Code Standardization Advisory Group A paging system using digital signaling The tone mode is entered from the top level screen of any main mode other than SPEC ANA Pressing the Tones key will display the screen shown in Fig 3 17 Tones selection screen and Tones mode receiver input level setting Tones Radio Tones Audi Out 1 udio RF Input Level 5H HdEm B3261 Fig 3 17 Tones selection screen and Tones mode receiver input level setting Observ
79. to 3 4kHz Return CoupLIna ac Rudio Audio DCS DTMF POCSAG RF Input Level 188ml 20 GdEm Bchart RECEIVER TEST Select GEN FREQ 300 00020mHz LEVEL 89 BdEm AUDIO FRED B Hz Auto ranae MODI FREQ 1 aa kHz LEVEL 57 9dBm Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz lt y MOD2 FREQ 1 B80BBkHz Nd Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz ort Mod Levels Locked 4 EXT LEVEL 1 588kHz Off DISTORTION 0 0 SOURCE Ext Mod ive HC Increments Score FRE 1 000kHz BF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz COUPLING AC B6034 Test mode screen and menu 3 0 Rx TEST with next levels 3 101 LOCAL OPERATION RECEIVER M DUPLEX TRANSMITTER RECEIVER ES DUPLEX TRANSMITTER RECEIVER DUPLEX TRANSMITTER GEN FREG 390 GGAGAMH ir GEN FREG 309 00000MHz TX FREQ 300 COOGAMHz EEN A soo GGGGGNH Tx FRED ES 1 LEVEL 188 8dBm Auto tune LEVEL 188 AdEm Auto tune LEVELS 188 BE OFFSET 95 188 i 7 POWER NO SIGNAL MODI FREG 1 B8BBBkHz pp PONER HB MONAL BE MOD2 FREQ 1 B8BBkHz pp PAPER NO SIGNAL BE Mod Gen 001 FREQ 1 0608kHz po ee I Sin LEVEL 1 58BkHz Off 2 1 4 3 4 Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz de a Sin LEVEL 1 500kHz Off 3 i d m
80. to any frequency cut off point from 250 Hz to 20 000 Hz excluding the band 1001 to 2999 Hz 50 kHz Lowpass no filters applied 750 us de emphasis 50 Hz Highpass 300 Hz Highpass Any combination of LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 and the Highpass filters GENERAL INFORMATION Transmitter measurements RF Frequency Meter Frequency Range Resolution Indication Accuracy Acquisition Time Sensitivity VSWR RF Power Meter Broadband Frequency Range Dynamic Range Indication Units Indication Resolution Accuracy N Type Maximum Continuous Rating Intermittent Rating Modulation Meter Sensitivity Audio and Modulation Filters Lowpass Filters Highpass Filters Bandpass Filters Amplitude Modulation Frequency Range Modulation Frequency Range AM Depth Range 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz manual tune 10 MHz to 1 GHz auto tune 1 Hz or 10 Hz up to 1050 MHz selectable 0 1 Hz 1 Hz 10 Hz up to 999 MHz selectable Up to 10 digits As frequency standard resolution Less than 1 second manual Typically 3 seconds autotune Autotuned 5 mW N Type 0 05 mW BNC antenna port Manual Tuned 34 dBm N Type 60 dBm BNC antenna port Auto or manual control of input attenuator N Type lt 1 2 1 to 500 MHz lt 1 25 1 to 1 05 GHz BNC antenna port 3 1 to 1 05 GHz 200 kHz to 1 05 GHz 5 mW to 150 W N Type 0 05 mW to 250 mW BNC antenna port W dBm or dBW 3 digits or barchart 0 1 dB max typic
81. to zero To use this Service Monitor to make a 20 dB S N sensitivity test 1t 1s set up to make signal to noise measurements through the distortion meter menu of Rx TEST mode The modulation frequency and level are set according to the receivers test specification requirements The RF level is adjusted until the S N level indicated on the Service Monitor reads 20 dB The RF level will then equal the 20 dB S N sensitivity level For a GO NO GO test the monitor is set up in the same manner as above The RF level is set to the specified sensitivity setting and the S N level observed A reading higher than 20 dB would indicate GO while a reading of less than 20 dB i e closer to zero would indicate NO GO 20 dB quieting sensitivity This test determines the level of unmodulated RF signal that will produce an AF output from the receiver that is 20 dB lower than the noise level from the receiver when no carrier is being received The reduction in AF output when a carrier is being received is due to the action of the automatic gain control circuits in the RF amplifiers of the receiver The gain of the receiver will reduce as the level of the RF signal increases Therefore the noise level will decrease with an increase in RF signal level To use this Service Monitor to make a 20 dB quieting sensitivity test the unmodulated RF signal is applied to the receiver at the frequency called for in the test specification If no frequency is specified
82. with sensitivity testing see above while distortion test results are often quoted within the power output parameter For example 3 Watts output with better than 10 THD total harmonic distortion The signal to noise level is also quoted but is a measure of receiver quality not a true measure of distortion The AF distortion measuring facility performs continuous reading and display metering using the selected function SINAD or distortion factor Therefore a distortion test can be carried out by ensuring that the RF generator is tuned to the correct frequency select the distortion measuring function required and set the levels of the RF and AF generators The distortion factor or SINAD level is then read from the screen To obtain sets of readings relating to differing levels of RF or AF the levels are reset and the new reading made 3 49 LOCAL OPERATION Selectivity 2041 Signal Generator E B apoco ADJACENT CHANNEL SIGNAL di FOIS p00 000 E Coupler Service Monitor Y w Ber O 3 gt ON CHANNEL SIGNAL BH 6 Rx Under DE MODULATED AF TEST SIGNAL Test C3375 Fig 3 9 Selectivity test setup Selectivity tests are measurements of the capability of a receiver to differentiate between a wanted signal and an unwanted signal usually that transmitted on an adjacent channel This test is carried using the Servi
83. 0 1 0 15000 4000 1 0 Results table 5 22 Audio generator 2 distortion AF generator 2 Level Distortion frequency Hz mV upper limit Results table 5 23 Audio generator 1 frequency functional AF generator 1 Lower setting limit 9 9 10 1 499 9 500 1 999 9 1000 1 1 1110 1 1112 2 2221 2 2223 3 3328 3 3332 4 4438 4 4442 5 5548 5 5552 6 6658 6 6662 7 7768 7 7772 8 8878 8 8882 9 9988 10 0010 14 999 15 0010 19 9989 20 0011 5 44 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 24 Audio generator 2 frequency functional AF generator 2 Lower setting limit 10 Hz 9 9 Hz 10 1 Hz 500 Hz 499 9 Hz 500 1 Hz 1 0000 kHz 999 9 Hz 1000 1 Hz 1 1111 kHz 1 1110 kHz 1 1112 kHz 2 2222 kHz 2 2221 kHz 2 2223 kHz 3 333 kHz 3 3328 kHz 3 3332 kHz 4 444 kHz 4 4438 kHz 4 4442 kHz 5 555 kHz 5 5548 kHz 5 5552 kHz 6 666 kHz 6 6658 kHz 6 6662 kHz 7 777 kHz 7 7768 kHz 7 7772 kHz 8 888 kHz 8 8878 kHz 8 8882 kHz 9 999 kHz 9 9988 kHz 10 0010 kHz 15 000 kHz 14 999 KHz 15 0010 kHz 20 000 kHz 19 9989 kHz 20 0011 kHz Results table 5 25 Audio frequency meter LF generator Level Lower frequency mV limit 19 8 Hz 20 2 Hz 999 8 Hz 1000 2 Hz 19 9989 kHz 20 0011 kHz 5 45 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 26 Audio voltmeter accuracy Frequency DVM UUT UUT reading coupling lower limit upper limit mV mV T The upper and lower limits in the above table are calculated on the assumption that it was possible to set th
84. 1 FREQ and MOD2 FREQ on the RECEIVER TEST or DUPLEX screens If MEJ or MeBZ is selected the DTMF tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If Men or Mesa is selected the DTMF tones are still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the DTMF tones will cease They can then be re started only when the RF DTMF ENCODER screen or the AF DTMF ENCODER screen is displayed If the tones out routing has been set to give AF tones this is provided by audio generators 1 and 2 The legend Tones will be displayed against both AF1 FREQ and AF2 FREQ on the TRANSMITTER TEST DUPLEX or AF TEST screens If Aal or is selected the DTMF tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If or is selected the DTMF tones are still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the DTMF tones will cease They can then be re started only when the RF DTMF ENCODER screen or the AF DTMF ENCODER screen is displayed 3 84 LOCAL OPERATION POCSAG Overview The POCSAG system is an international standard for radio pager operation The system operates by broadcasting digital messages on a common frequency only alerting the addressed radio pager when the transmitted address matches that of the pager The signal transmitted consists of two main elemen
85. 1 kHz distortion notch filter is switched alternatively in and out of circuit with the signal level being measured by the AF voltmeter in each state See Fig 3 7 a b amp c Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 The monitor software calculates the SINAD level according to the formula Y SINAD 20log dB V S N D N D dB 20log The distortion bar chart ranges available are 0 to 18 dB and 0 to 50 dB The SINAD level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The AF test menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key 3 65 LOCAL OPERATION Dist n Selects distortion percentage as the measurement method The AF generator is set to 1 kHz and the 1 kHz distortion notch filter is switched alternatively in and out of circuit with the signal level being measured by the AF voltmeter in each state See Fig 3 7 a b amp c Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 The monitor software calculates the distortion level according to the formula V Distortion 1002 V N D S N D The distortion bar chart ranges available are 0 to 10 and 0 to 30 The distortion percentage level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The AF test menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key Oscilloscope The oscilloscope facility can be used from within the AF test mode to examine the signal present at the A
86. 19 20 21 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Reduce the RF signal generator RF level until the trace sits on the graticule line 2 divisions down from the top line Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 20 dB down from reading 1 3 dB functional test only Reduce the RF signal generator RF level until the trace sits on the graticule line 3 divisions down from the top line Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 30 dB down from reading 1 3 dB functional test only Reduce the RF signal generator RF level until the trace sits on the graticule line 4 divisions down from the top line Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 40 dB down from reading 1 3 dB functional test only Reduce the RF signal generator RF level until the trace sits on the graticule line 5 divisions down from the top line Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 50 dB down from reading 1 3 dB functional test only On the UUT press Return Return Centre Freq 100 MHz Span 52 MHz Res BW Manual Res BW 3 MHz Vert Scale toggle 10 2 dB DIV until 2 dB per division is displayed Set the RF signal generator to 100 MHz and 6 0 dBm Check and set this level on the power meter and then connect to the UUT Make a note of how many divisions down from the top of screen that the peak of the signal appears Repeat steps 12 and 13 for RF signal generator frequencies of 75 MHz 88 MHz 112 MHz and
87. 75 kHz Modulation rate 10 Hz to 15 kHz RF I P 5 5 MHz to 1 GHz FM Measurement RF signal generator Modulation meter IFR 2041 IFR 2305 accuracy 0 5 of reading 1 least significant changing digit at 1 KHz mod rate for deviation 25 kHz 6 dB 50 Q 5 5 MHz to 1 GHz Power splitter DVM 1 96 accuracy 1 kHz 1870A 5 25 WEINSCHEL Solatron 7150 1 Q 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Signal generator o Te 6888 o E HSE lo aa Q y UUT Modulation meter Es m e m BE HET 000 Si III ANTENNA RF INPUT INPUT A TE Splitter C6051 Fig 5 15 Modulation meter FM Refer to Results table 5 30 on page 3 47 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 15 connecting the incoming signal to the antenna input socket of the UUT Set the Modulation meter to monitor FM in a 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth noise averaging on Set the UUT to Tx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT antenna BNC input socket From the power up default the instrument should already be set to demodulate FM with an IF filter of 30 kHz and AF filter of 0 3 to 3 4 kHz selected Check that this is the case and select 1f necessary On the UUT set 7x Freq 5 5 MHz Set the R
88. 9 1 MHz 30 kHz 9 10 MHz 300 kHz 9 100 MHz 300 kHz 5 1000 MHz 3 MHz 5 Level and frequency or delta marker from center line of scan Single marker for frequency and level display Marker to center frequency A marker 2uV 0 to 999 MHz 400 kHz to 1000 MHz GENERAL INFORMATION Audio generators Frequency Frequency Range Setting Indication Resolution Accuracy Level Level Range Setting Indication Resolution Accuracy Output impedance Distortion Signaling Encoder Decoder Sequential Tones Functions User Defined Tones DTMF DCS POCSAG Audio Monitor Frequency standard Internal Frequency Standard TCXO Frequency Temperature stability Ageing Rate Warm up External Frequency Standard Input Frequency Input Level Input Impedance 5 Hz to 33 kHz Keyboard entry delta increment decrement function and rotary control 5 digits 0 1 Hz below 3 25 kHz 1 Hz above 3 25 kHz 0 01 Hz below 180 Hz 0 1 Hz above 180 Hz 0 1 mV to 4 V RMS Keyboard entry delta increment decrement function and rotary control 4 Digits 0 1 mV below 409 mV 1 mV above 409 mV 15 resolution 50 Hz to 15 kHz Nominally 5 O minimum load impedance 25 2 Less than 0 5 at 1 kHz Less than 1 96 from 50 Hz to 15 kHz including revert Encodes and decodes up to 40 tones CCIR ZVEI DZVEI EEA EIA or user defined Any of the tones may be extended Continuous burst and single step modes available Up t
89. 99 and 400 001 kHz 6 Repeat for the remaining frequencies shown in Table 5 1 checking that the counter displays the selected frequency 1 Hz It will be necessary to disconnect the 50 Q load and reconnect the UUT RF output to the A B or C input of the counter where indicated 5 5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Table 5 1 Carrier frequencies UUT area checked 2440 range 400 000 kHz Oscillator bottom 1050 00000 MHz Oscillator top 500 00000 MHz Oscillator middle 188 88888 MHz 177 77777 MHz 166 66666 MHz 155 55555 MHz 144 44444 MHz Fractional N 133 33333 MHz 122 22222 MHz 111 11111 MHz m ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF output level Specification Level range 127 dBm to 21 dBm N type socket Accuracy 2 dB up to 1 GHz Test equipment RF power meter 0 1 dB from 10 MHz to 1 GHz IFR 6960 A B 6920 sensor 1 2 3 4 5 6 Measuring 21 dBm to 127 dBm 2 5 MHz to 1 GHz HP 8902A receiver 11772A sensor Spectrum Noise floor lt 127 dBm IFR 2383 analyzer RF power meter e ag L Jo De 0000 25 NTYPE o O O 8B8B88 Sun J OUTPUT O SENSOR 6920 A INPUT C6040 Fig 5 2 RF level set up Refer to Results table 5 2 on page 5 36 Connect the sensor to the UUT N type output socket as shown in Fig 5 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT N type output antenna input mode RF Gen LE
90. CCITT Sin LEVEL 196 Gimli 20 GOLE 4 AUDIO FREG LEUEL RECEIVER DUPLEX TRANSMITTER T RECEIUER DUPLEX TRANSMITTER FM Dev d GEH FREQ 300 GGGGAMHz d 309 Pk rms EE tre LEVEL 188 BdEm 87 466 PPM MODI FREG 1 GGGAkHz SIONAL TE Mod Gen MODI FREQ 1 0000kHz a NO SIGNAL ES IF FILTER 3OkHz Sin LEVEL 1 586kHz 1 3 j Filter Sin LEVEL 1 58BkHz OFF HF FILTER 398 3 4kHz ar Audio Filter Meter RF FILTER 308 3 4kHz AF1 FREG 1 BBBBkHz itc 58 AUDI COUPLING AC CCITT Sin LEVEL 188 8mU RI HI ab z 9 20 40 100 IF FILTER SBkHz IF FILTER RF FILTER 388 3 4kHz RF FILTER IF Rudia Rudio COUPLING RI Sin LEVEL 100 Em COUPLING AC Sim LEVEL 198 AF FILTER 399 3 4kHz AF1 FREQ 1 BAGGkHz AF FILTER 300 Z 4kHz AFL FREG 1 BBBABkHz c DES DTMF POCSAG RF Input Level 166mbl 24 6dEm RECEIVER W DUPLEX TRANSMITTER Echart RECEIUER DUPLEX TRANSMITTER M Select GEN FREQ SBB nmBBBnaMHz
91. Carrier Offset Offset frequency lower limit Hz upper limit Hz MHz 5 49 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 42 RF frequency meter at 13 dBm 0 05 mW antenna input autotuned Carrier Lower Upper frequency MHz limit MHz limit MHz 1000 999 999999 1000 000001 500 499 999999 500 000001 10 9 999999 10 000001 Results table 5 43 Internal frequency standard Carrier Lower frequency limit MHz limit MHz MHz Standard TCXO 1000 999 999500 100 000500 Option 3 OCXO 1000 999 999750 100 000250 Results table 5 44 Spectrum analyzer armer Tr Dynamic range Level flatness 5 50 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 45 RF broad band power meter N type input Frequency MHz Input Lower Upper level dBm limit ABm limit dBm N input 11 20 19 4 20 5 100 20 19 4 20 5 200 20 19 4 20 5 300 20 19 4 20 5 400 20 19 4 20 5 500 20 19 4 20 5 600 20 19 4 20 5 700 20 19 4 20 5 800 20 19 4 20 5 900 20 19 4 20 5 1000 20 19 4 20 5 N in N out 100 20 19 4 20 5 100 7 6 4 7 5 N input 100 7 6 4 7 5 The upper and lower limits in the table above are calculated on the assumption that it was possible to set the exact input level required If it is not possible to achieve this the limits will need to be calculated in proportion to the power applied 5 51 A AC power supply input 3 8 AG supply iet ee 4 2 Acceptance test results tables 5 36 Acceptan
92. Checks ri Eon dolo dla 5 12 Internal AM accuracy checkSs nennen enne 5 13 Internal EM accuracy checks ie tert iii 5 15 Audio generator level accuracy checks nennen 5 17 Audio generator signal purity CheckS nennen 5 18 Audio frequency meter check 5 20 Audio voltmeter level accuracy CheckS nennen 5 22 Audio oscilloscope check Recette eee hates 5 23 Modulation meter FM a 5 26 Modulation analyzer AM sise 5 28 RE frequency meter i i e see dak ete a 5 30 RF spectrum analyzer checks 5 32 RF broad band power meter checks ene 5 34 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Introduction Test procedures described in this chapter may be simplified and of restricted range compared with those that relate to the generally more comprehensive factory test facilities which are necessary to demonstrate complete compliance with the specifications Performance limits quoted are for guidance and should not be taken as guaranteed performance specifications unless they are also quoted in the section Performance data in Chapter 1 Note When making tests to verify that the instrument meets the stated performance limits always allow for the uncertainty of the test equipment Results tables A set of Results tables each with a blank results column is provided at the end of this ch
93. Connecting to a DC supply and fitting batteries If the Service Monitor is to be used from a DC voltage source it should be connected using the supplied DC connecting lead part no 43138 755 The polarity of the connections must be correct RED to POSITIVE BLACK to NEGATIVE and the DC input voltage selector set to the appropriate range for the supply The negative connection of the DC supply is directly connected to the chassis of the Service Monitor and therefore to all screen connections of input and output connectors Note however that the AF ports are isolated under some operating conditions The Service Monitor will function from any supply with a voltage within the range given under Power requirements above but must be capable of delivering a current in the order of 9 amps at the lowest voltage Ensure that the supply lead connections are sound and cannot short together If the Test Set has been supplied with a battery pack this will have been fitted before shipping The battery pack should not require any attention over its expected life If you do suspect a problem with the battery pack contact the nearest Aeroflex regional office A fully charged battery pack will power the Service Monitor for approximately 60 minutes between charges The Service Monitor will recharge the battery in approximately 4 hours 1f connected to a mains supply and the mains power switch put to the CHARGE position Use only the battery pack specified b
94. EQ key Enter the required frequency by using the digit keys and the decimal point key if relevant The resolution of the RF FREQ entry is 1 Hz but it is not necessary to enter every digit down to the least significant place if a multiplier terminator key is used The entry is completed by pressing a terminator key Using the MHz kHz or Hz key causes the entered frequency to be displayed according to normal convention The following examples explain further Pressing 1 2 5 MHz will display 125 000000 MHz 1 2 5 KHz To 125 000 kHz 1 2 5 0 kHz 4 1 250000 MHz 1 112 5 MHz i 1 250000 MHz 1 2 5 0 0 0 1 Hz 1 250001 MHz Variable control With the IR legend highlighted the Tx FREQ parameter can be adjusted by using the variable control Frequency increment The FREQ 1 and 4 keys can be assigned to transmitter frequency adjustment Refer to the section on incremental adjustments that starts on page 3 67 Automatic frequency setting Pressing the Auto Tune key causes the Service Monitor to sweep over the RF input range and lock onto the strongest signal present on the selected RF input socket The mean frequency of the signal is displayed against the Tx FREQ legend with Auto tune replacing OFFSET Note SSB if fitted The autotune function may not operate when attempting to tune to an SSB transmitter unless a steady tone is being used as a modulation
95. ESS filter is fitted The high pass filter options are 50 Hz or 300 Hz There are five low pass filter soft keys The 50 kHz LP filter can be considered to be the unfiltered selection as this represents the normal full bandwidth of the audio circuits The other four low pass preset filters can each be set to any cut off frequency within the range 250 Hz to 1 0 kHz and 3 0 kHz to 20 0 kHz The band pass preset filters can be customized by selecting either of the high pass options in combination with any of the four preset low pass filters The preset filters are set from the HELP SETUP facility The AF Filter setup explanation starts on page 3 11 OSCILLOSCOPE The input to the oscilloscope is taken directly from the AF input connector on the front panel not through any of the AF filters Therefore measurements obtained on the AF voltmeter will show the effects of filtering whereas those made using the oscilloscope will not Audio distortion The Service Monitor is able to measure signal noise and distortion against the following parameters Signal to SINAD Percentage noise ratio level distortion Distortion levels introduced into the audio signal path can be measured using the distortion measuring module Pressing the Audio Meter key to change the soft keys as shown in fold out diagram 3 3 then pressing the Dist S N soft key accesses the distortion measurement menu shown in fold out diagram 3 3 2 The functi
96. EST mode and to step up or down by 500 Hz steps follow this procedure From the Tx TEST display press the Audio Gen key Use the Gen 1 Gen 2 key to select Press the orange LEVEL key The legend following will be highlighted Press the orange A INC key followed by 5 0 0 and the Hz terminator key The display will show the legend Increments AF1 FREQ 500 Hz Now each press of a FREQ or 1 key will increase or decrease the output frequency of AF generator 1 by 500 Hz Points to note are Each press of a FREQ or 0 key will be effective from the current point Thus if the frequency of the generator in the above example has been incremented to 1 500 Hz and then adjusted by use of the variable control or the data entry keys to 1 495 Hz the next incremental step down will produce a frequency of 995 Hz The assignment and value of a incremental setting will be retained with the mode setup when a different mode is selected or the instrument is powered down This is of particular note when assigned to the AF generators as they are also the modulation generators within the Rx TEST mode and the AF generators within the AF TEST mode The incremental keys cannot be used when in the Dx TEST mode Use within spectrum analyzer mode The SPEC ANA mode makes use of the FREQ ft and keys for span adjustment The span is ranged up or down in a 1 2 5 sequence from 1 0 kHz to 1 0 GHz Adjustment to the span by
97. F input socket The sensitivity of the Y axis is adjustable from 10 mV division to 20 V division in a 1 2 5 sequence The input to the oscilloscope is taken directly from the AF input and not through any of the AF filters Therefore measurements obtained on the AF voltmeter will show the effects of filtering whereas those made using the oscilloscope will not A section on the use of the oscilloscope facility starts on page 3 88 3 66 LOCAL OPERATION Incremental adjustment keys General This section provides information on the use of the incremental adjustment keys Other sections of this chapter have specific references to these keys this section gives general information The incremental adjustment keys are located under the variable control with one pair designated FREQ and 4 the other pair designated LEVEL tt and 4 Each pair can be assigned to a selected parameter within a test mode which then allows that parameter to be adjusted in steps Note that the FREQ f and U keys and the LEVEL and 4 keys do not have to be assigned to the same generator The parameters that can be selected are Tx frequency AF generator 1 frequency AF generator 2 frequency AF generator 1 level AF generator 2 level RF generator frequency T RF generator level Modulation generator 1 frequency Modulation generator 2 frequency Modulation generator 1 level Modulation generator 2 level AF generator 1 frequency
98. F signal generator to provide a signal of 5 5 MHz with 20 kHz deviation at 1 kHz modulation rate Set the RF level to 6 dBm Ifa 2041 is being used then it should be set to normal noise mode Check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 5 resolution of the deviation indicated on the external Modulation meter Repeat steps 4 and 5 for RF carrier frequencies of 500 MHz and 1000 MHz Manually tune the UUT to 300 MHz and set the RF signal generator to provide 300 MHz with 20 kHz deviation Select the 50 kHz low pass filter by pressing return Mod Meter AF Filter 50kHz LP and check the UUT still indicates 20 kHz deviation Functional check only Select the 300 Hz high pass filter by pressing more 300Hz HP and check that the UUT still indicates 20 kHz deviation Functional check only Select the 3 kHz low pass filter and check that the UUT still indicates 20 kHz deviation Functional check only Refer to Results table 5 31 on page 5 47 Select the 300 Hz low pass filter by pressing more 300Hz LP Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 300 MHz with 20 kHz deviation at 50 Hz modulation rate On the external Modulation meter select the 10 Hz to 300 kHz filter Check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 7 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the modulation meter Set the RF signal generator modulation rate to 5 kHz and the UUT AF Filter to 15 kHz LP C
99. Hz AM Measurement IFR 2305 accuracy 1 of reading 1 least significant changing digit at 1 kHz mod rate for depths up to 95 Power splitter 6 dB 50 Q 500 kHz to 1 GHz WEINSCHEL 1870A Signal generator E B A 5 Seo DoD ODE B O RF OUTPUT Modulation meter o Q gI PF INPUT Splitter C6051 Fig 5 16 Modulation analyzer AM 5 28 1 Q G 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Refer to Results table 5 36 on page 5 48 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 16 connecting the incoming signal to the antenna input socket of the UUT Set the Modulation meter to monitor AM in a 50 Hz to 15 kHz bandwidth Noise averaging on Press HELP SETUP Setup AF Filters Factory Preset Return Return Return Set the UUT to Tx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT antenna input socket Mod Meter Press the AM FM soft key to set the UUT to demodulate AM From the power up default the instrument should already have an IF filter of 30 kHz and AF filter of 0 3 to 3 4 kHz selected Check that this is the case and select if necessary Tune the UUT to 500 kHz by pressing Return Tx Freq 500 kHz Set the RF signal genera
100. IH 15 660 Hz Off SOURCE Ext Mod ize AC AF FILTER 300 to 3 4kHz COUPLING RC Increments MODI FREU iBaHz MODI LEVEL 18 BBBkHz RF FILTER to 3 4kHz RECEIVER TEST COUPLING Return FREQ 306 06006MHz LEVEL 188 BdBm AUDIO FREQ GHz LEUEL Mod Geni MODI FREQ 1 GOGGkHz Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz off ey zs ads Audio MOD2 FREQ 1 B8990kHz Meter Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz EXT LEVEL 13 88BEHz Off RECEIUER TEST SOURCE Ext Mod ivr AC RECEIVER TEST GEM FREQ 3B8 B8BBBMHz GEN FREQ 390 BAABAMHzZ LEVEL 188 B8dBm AUDIO FREQ 8 GHz Increments LEVEL 89 BdEm AUDIO FREQ B Hz LEVEL 27 2dBr hop LEER MODI FREQ 1 8888kHz LEVEL 54 208m MODI FREQ 1 BB8GkHz i 4 i z Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz Sin LEVEL 1 S ekHz Off zq ada m A i i MOD2 FREQ 1 88B8BkHz Laia a HODE FRERE 1 HEBR Ha REF AF FILTER 388 to 3 4kHz Sin LEVEL 1 500kHz Sin LEVELE T Guiera COUPLING AC Mod Levels Locked 1 EXT LEVEL 15 868kHz Off PU GORGE Ext Mod ip RE SOURCE Ext Mod Le AG Increments MODI FREG 1 Increments MODI FREG 160Hz MODI LEVEL 16 BBBkHz BF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz COUPLIHG AC AF FILTER 360
101. ING Results table 5 15 FM versus carrier frequency at 10 kHz deviation 1 kHz rate Carrier Lower Upper frequency MHz limit kHz limit kHz Results table 5 16 FM linearity checks at 600 MHz carrier frequency 1 kHz rate Deviation Lower Upper frequency kHz limit kHz limit kHz 75 71 24 78 76 50 47 49 52 51 25 23 74 26 26 5 4 74 5 26 Results table 5 17 FM distortion Modulation Distortion frequency kHz upper limit Loon Results table 5 18 FM versus modulation frequency at 600 MHz carrier frequency 10 kHz deviation Modulation Lower Upper frequency limit kHz limit kHz 5 42 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 19 Audio generator 1 output level AF generator 1 Level Lower Upper frequency Hz mV limit mV limit mV 1000 50 150 500 2000 5000 10000 15000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 4000 20 0 400 0 1000 2000 3000 3799 3799 3799 3799 3799 3799 3799 3799 18 9 379 9 949 1899 2849 4201 4201 4201 4201 4201 4201 4201 4201 21 1 420 1 1051 2101 3151 Results table 5 20 Audio generator 2 output level AF generator 2 Level Lower Upper frequency Hz mV limit mV limit mV 5 43 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 21 Audio generator 1 distortion AF generator 1 Level Distortion frequency Hz mV upper limit 1000 4000 0 5 1000 100 0 0 5 2000 4000 1 0 5000 400
102. MINALS Y EXT LO UUT Modulation meter y INPUT Jef Egg O o j 53 BNC G as FEE q OUTPUT A T LF 0000 asta If OUTPUT PF INPUT C6045 Fig 5 7 Residual FM checks 12 Refer to Results table 5 9 on page 5 39 Setthe UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT 13 14 15 16 17 BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 1000 MHz Mod Gen Gen1 Gen2 to select modulation generator 2 and then LEVEL 1 kHz After this key sequence modulation generator 2 should be providing 1 kHz deviation at 1 kHz modulation rate Modulation generator 1 should be OFF Set the signal generator into low noise mode 1 and to provide a signal of 55 63889 MHz at 0 dBm Set the Modulation meter to measure FM in a 300 Hz to 3 4 kHz bandwidth with noise averaging on Select external LO by pressing FREQ TUNE 0 ENTER External LO should now appear in the top left of the modulation window display and the frequency window should display the IF frequency of 1 5 MHz 150 kHz Note the DEVIATION LEVEL Hz displayed on the modulation meter Set the LF LEVEL control on the front panel of the modulation meter to the horizontal mark and press HOLD ON OFF Set the DVM to measure AC volts and make a note of the voltage displayed MOD VOLTAGE V On the UUT press ON OFF to switch modulation generator 2 OFF then note the RESIDUAL VOLTAGE V displayed on the DVM The residual FM in HZ RMS can now be calculat
103. NC antenna connector or to the BNC RF output connector The overload detect lines are activated and trigger the overload warning message from the microprocessor A temperature sensor in physical contact with the 20 dB pad on the N type connector triggers the overload circuit in the event of excessive power being applied to that connector for a period long enough to cause an excessive temperature rise Switched attenuator A switched attenuator with one 40 dB pad one 20 dB pad or 0 dB attenuation selectable in any combination and controlled by the instrument software is situated between the input switching board A11 1 and the first frequency changer mixer board A2 IF circuits First frequency changer mixer The RF signal from the switched attenuator enters the first frequency changer mixer board A2 and passes through an overload prevention circuit which limits any input signal to approximately 0 7V peak The signal then passes either directly or through a 20 dB amplifier to the 1st mixer First local oscillator The mixer is also supplied with a signal from the first local oscillator board A8 1 This oscillator is a fractional N controlled oscillator which can be made to run at any frequency between 1 36 and 2 36 GHz in increments of 1 Hz The actual frequency is determined by the control system of the monitor If the transmitter test frequency is known and has been entered into the monitor as a Tx FREQ using the data inpu
104. ODER screen and menu RF DCS ENCODER Tone Generate Mode Tone On Tone Level 1 588kHz Polarity Normal Bit Rate 134 4Hz DCS Code a Return B3263 Fig 3 22 RF DCS ENCODER screen and menu Check that the bit rate is correct for the unit to be tested If a different bit rate is required to that which is shown on the display enter the required value as follows Press the Bit Rate key to highlight the Ii REAA legend on the display Use the data entry keys to enter the correct value and press the Hz terminator key Note The most common bit rate for DCS systems is 134 bits s Check that the tone modulation level is correct for the system specification If a different level is required to that which is shown on the display enter the required value as follows Press the Tone Level key to highlight the IONE legend on the display Use the data entry keys to enter the correct value and press the kHz or Hz terminator key as appropriate Note The level of modulation for DCS signal modulation is usually within the range 10 to 20 of the system maximum level Check the modulation polarity of the transceiver For positive modulation the polarity should be set to Normal and for negative modulation set to Inverted The Polarity key toggles between these two options To enter or change the DCS code for the transceiver to be tested first press the Code key to highlight the legend mes 99 Key in the code using the d
105. Option 23 Option 24 Option 27 Option 30 Option 32 600 Q Matching Unit Option 1 Features Input circuit Impedance Return loss Frequency response Accuracy of 1 1 input output ratio Maximum input Output circuit Impedance Return loss Frequency response Level accuracy Output level 600 Q Matching Unit High Stability OCXO Parallel Interface GPIB Interface SSB Demodulator CCITT Filter CMESS Filter Look and Listen addition to Spectrum Analyzer Bail arm and front panel stowage cover Internal Battery Switchable 600 balanced AF input and output Switchable 20 dB attenuator on AF generator output T 600 Q 221 dB at 1 kHz 30 5 dB at 200 Hz to 5 kHz 2 dB at 100 Hz to 20 kHz 11 at 1 kHz accuracy of 2944B 5 V RMS maximum at 200 Hz to 5 kHz 3 V RMS maximum at 100 Hz to 20 kHz 600 Q 221 dB at 1 kHz 30 5 dB at 200 Hz to 5 kHz 2 dB at 100 Hz to 20 kHz 12 at 1 kHz accuracy of 2944B 1 mV to 2 5 V RMS across 600 T The 20 dB attenuator facility reduces the AF output resolution to 0 01 mV up to 40 mV output level The accuracy of the output level degrades by 2 High Stability Internal Frequency OCXO Standard Option 3 Frequency Temperature Stability Ageing Rate Warm up Time Parallel Interface Option 4 Printer port Connector Printers supported Accessory port Connector Outputs 10 MHz Better than 5 part in 10 5 to 55 41 to 131 F Better
106. PLEX nm SPECTRUM ANALYZER GEN FREQ 466 35000MHz TX FREQ 550 GGGGGGMHz Level Ref pavel LEVEL 88 G8dEm OFFSET 24 98k Hz 10dB diw I Mod Ger MODI FREG 1 B880kHz ap MERE MO a TONAL a e ita Fa I Sin LEVEL 1 5B8kHz off 4 I 1 1 3 3b Scale sai Audio Mkr4 Peak Hold i Meter MOD FREG B BHz Pk kr oft AUDIO FREG B GHz m LEVEL Bnl FM LEVEL BHz E n Hz Marker pF Ben On mi E E 2 4 6 9 ho Refl IF FILTER 3BkHz Tr ack AF FILTER 15 kHz LP IRF Gen Look ri FILTER 300 3 dkHz AFL FREQ 1 0000kHz COUPLING AC Sin LEVEL 100 900 Off FACE TOUR sde B6012 Fig 3 2 Typical displays The various keys on the front panel are grouped according to their use or located adjacent to associated items 2 Soft keys To each side of the display screen are six unmarked keys These are the Soft keys referred to in the display description above The specific function of each of these keys is defined by the instrument software and is indicated by the legend on the label immediately adjacent to 1t on the display screen 3 Data Input keys The right hand area of the front panel contains the Data Input keys These keys are used to key in data fo
107. RF OUTPUT Y Hoan 000500 DODO 000 000 100 OOOO O ago 000000 DU C6053 Fig 5 18 RF spectrum analyzer checks Refer to Results table 5 44 on page 5 50 Set the UUT to SPEC ANA Vid Filter ON 10 dB div Res BW 300 Hz and Peak Hold OFF Centre Freq 101 MHz Span 1 kHz BNC antenna input socket Ref Level 30 0 dBm With nothing connected to the UUT check that the noise floor is within the bottom 10 dB graticule division of the display Between 70 and 80 dBm dynamic range Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 18 connecting the incoming signal to the N type input socket of the UUT Set the UUT to N type input On the UUT select Res BW Manual Res BW 30 kHz Ref Level to 0 dBm Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal at 101 MHz at a level of 0 dBm with no modulation Adjust the RF signal generator level until the trace sits at the top of the screen Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 0 dBm 4 dB Functional test only Note this reading reading 1 Reduce the RF signal generator RF level until the trace sits on the graticule line 1 division down from the top line Check that the level set on the RF signal generator is 10 dB down from reading 1 3 dB functional test only 5 32 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
108. RF output amplifier board and AM modulator board A6 1 4 13 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Modulators The Rx TEST signal can be either AM or FM modulated The selected modulation signal from either or both of the AF generators from the data generator or from an external source is conditioned and level corrected within the modulation control circuits on the audio processor board B1 2 Frequency modulation is applied by injection into the fractional N control loop thereby influencing the generated frequency When the signal is FM modulated the AM modulator is held in a 0 modulation state AM modulation is applied to the signal using a pin diode modulator located within the output amplifier circuits on A6 The output level of the Rx TEST signal is also controlled using the pin diode modulator The signal controlling the attenuation level of the pin diode modulator is a composite signal containing the amplitude modulation component obtained from the modulation source and a DC component representing the required output level They are combined into one modulation signal using a digital to analogue converter on the audio processor board B1 2 RF amplifier The signal level from the AM modulator is increased by 50 dB by a three stage RF amplifier before passing through the output control attenuator to the RF switching unit and the RF output sockets Audio generators The audio generators on the B1 2 are used to provide AF Modulation to the
109. STING Results table 5 6 Carrier harmonic test points at 0 dBm Frequency Second Third MHz harmonic harmonic MHz MHz Results table 5 7 Spurious signals carrier at 0 dBm Carrier Spurious Upper frequency measured limit dBc MHz Results table 5 8 RF carrier leakage carrier at 501 9873 MHz Leakage detected Carrier frequency MHz Results table 5 9 Residual FM test points UUT Local oscillator Limits RF generator frequency Hz frequency MHz MHz 55 63889 50 18750 50 75000 5 39 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 10 AM versus carrier frequency 50 depth at 1 kHz rate Carrier Lower Upper Result frequency MHz limit limit 1 5 45 5 54 5 50 45 5 54 5 100 45 5 54 5 150 45 5 54 5 200 45 5 54 5 250 45 5 54 5 300 45 5 54 5 350 45 5 54 5 400 45 5 54 5 Results table 5 11 AM versus carrier level 100 MHz 70 depth at 1 kHz rate Carrier Lower Upper Result level dBm limit limit 5 40 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 12 AM linearity 100 MHz 0 dBm at 1 kHz rate Am depth Lower Upper Result set limit limit 5 3 65 6 35 10 8 3 11 7 20 17 6 22 4 30 26 9 33 1 40 36 2 43 8 50 45 5 54 5 60 54 8 65 2 70 64 1 75 9 85 79 1 91 95 Lower Upper Result limit limit Results table 5 14 AM demodulation distortion 100 MHz 30 depth Distortion Result upper limit AA 5 41 ACCEPTANCE TEST
110. Selects distortion percentage as the measurement method The modulation generator is set to 1 kHz By filtering the demodulated signal with a 1 kHz notch filter and comparing the result with the unfiltered signal the distortion percentage level is established by the formula Distortion 1002 V N D S N D 0 See Fig 3 7 a b amp c Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 The distortion bar chart is graduated in and the distortion percentage level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The RX TEST menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key 3 45 LOCAL OPERATION Audio peak hold Press the Audio Meter key followed by the Audio Pk Hld key The highest transmitted audio level is held on the display An inverse video red P in displayed near to power readings that are peak held in receiver duplex and audio screens Instrument dBr level dBr ref Press the Audio Meter key followed by the More key Inst dBr Pressing the Inst dBr soft key establishes the current modulation level reading as the dBr reference level dBr Ref Pressing the dBr Ref soft key allows a modulation reference level to be set so that the digital modulation reading is shown as dBr levels relative to the reference The bargraph readout and the positive and negative readings continue to display the absolute values The reference level can be set using the Data input keys or
111. TING Audio generator distortion Specification Distortion Less than 0 5 at 1 kHz Less than 1 from 50 Hz to 15 kHz Test equipment Minimum specification Example Capable of measuring distortion from 1 kHz to IFR 2965 or 15 kHz down to 0 1 HP8903B _Distortion FRE gogg Soo ERE 550053 OOODODO O 000 o0000000 T 00000000 29 o o 000 0 O U U AF OUTPUT INPUT C6048 Fig 5 11 Audio generator signal purity checks 1 Refer to Results table 5 21 on page 5 44 Connect the UUT AF GEN output to the AF input of the distortion meter as shown in Fig 5 11 2 Set the UUT to AF TEST Audio Gen FREQ 1 kHz LEVEL 4 V Audio Gen 1 should be set to sinewave and Audio Gen 2 should be OFF 3 Set the Distortion meter to measure distortion at 1 kHz in a 0 3 to 3 4 kHz bandwidth 4 Check that the distortion indicated is less than 0 5 5 Repeat step 4 with AF Gen 1 level set to 100 mV 6 Setthe Distortion meter to measure distortion in a 20 kHz Low pass bandwidth 7 Set AF Gen 1 to provide 4 V at a frequency of 2 kHz Check that the distortion indicated on the Distortion meter is less than 196 If a 2965 is being used see the Operating Manual for instructions on setting distortion measurement to different frequencies Repeat at 5 kHz Set the low pass bandwidth on the
112. TX FREQ 306 00868MHz 300 00208MHz Ts 368 GOGGGaMHz Z88 8dEm FFSET 2 26kHz LEVEL 188 8dBm Auto tune POWER HO SIGNAL BE Mod Gen 1 9B88kHz POWER NO SIGNAL ug Auto MOD FREGI 1 B BBkHz Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz AR mu L r3nse Sin LEVEL 1 500kHz te 11 i w RF Ben MOD FREG B BHz b4 AUDIO FREQ B BH 257 den FM LEVEL GHz Dist A 4 3 IF FILTER BF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz E FILTER Es S 4kHz RF Filter AUDIO FREG LEUEL Tones RFi FREQ 1 0006kHz RF FILTER 360 3 4kHz AFL FREH 1 HBBBkHz COUPLING AC Sin LEVEL 168 Off COUPLING B sin LEVEL 166 004 B6035 Test mode screen and menu 4 0 Dx TEST with next levels 3 103 LOCAL OPERATION Ret SPECTRUM ANALYZER i Level Ref Level B dBm 10dB diw Vid Filter n SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 6 dem 10dB diw Uert Scale Wid Filter i LOCAL T 0 T i 1 i Hkr Peak Hold kr Dff Peak Hold Off Marker RF Gen On to RF On Tr ack RF Ger Lock Listen Cent
113. The AF voltmeter makes measurements to the signals from the Service Monitor demodulator and displays the results The RF signal generator is active producing an RF signal at the frequency and level set in the Rx TEST mode This signal will be modulated at the level and frequency set if the modulation generator selection does not conflict with the requirements of the Rx TEST mode Rx TEST With Rx TEST mode selected the RECEIVER TEST screen is displayed and access to all Rx TEST mode features 1s available See fold out diagram 3 0 at the end of this chapter The AF voltmeter makes measurements to the signal obtained from the demodulated output of the mobile transceiver and fed into the AF input socket on the front panel of the Service Monitor The AF generators are active at the frequencies and levels set in the Tx TEST mode and their output routed to the AF GEN OUT socket if the AF generator selection does not conflict with the requirements of the Tx TEST mode Dx TEST With Dx TEST selected the DUPLEX TEST screen is displayed and access to transmitter and receiver test features is available See fold out diagram 4 0 at the end of this chapter These features are not as comprehensive as those available from the TRANSMITTER TEST or RECEIVER TEST screens but do allow measurements to be made to the major parameters The Service Monitor has two AF generators either or both of which can be used to modulate the transmitter being tested or the
114. Type 0 dBm to 30 dBm at Antenna Hot surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is applied for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive 3 27 LOCAL OPERATION IF bandwidth The IF bandwidth of the Service Monitor receiver circuits can be selected from the following options 300 Hz 3 0 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz Press the IF Filter key The right hand soft keys change to allow selection of IF bandwidth filters as shown above The selected filter is shown on the display Press the Return key after selecting the required filter Audio frequency filtering The demodulated signal can be filtered using high pass low pass or band pass audio filters and with weighting filters as required Press the AF Filter key The right hand soft keys change to allow selection of AF filters as shown below Press the Return key after selecting the required filter CCITT or Only if option 23 CCITT filter is fitted i Only if option 24 C MESS filter is fitted The high pass filter options are 50 Hz or 300 Hz There are five low pass filter soft keys The 50 kHz LP filter can be considered to be the unfiltered selection as this represents the normal full bandwidth of the audio circuits The other four low pass preset filters can each be set to any cut off frequency within the range 250 Hz to 1 0 kHz
115. V 0 8 V 2 V 4 5 V 5 This step is a functional check only and confirms that the audio filters switch in correctly with minimal insertion loss Press HELP SETUP Setup AF Filters Factory Preset Return Return Return e Set the UUT AF filter to 15 kHz LP and check that UUT voltmeter indicates within 6 3 mV resolution of the level measured with the 50 kHz LP e Repeat with the 300 to 3 4 kHz BP filter e Repeat with the 50 to 15 0 kHz BP filter e Set the LF generator to 100 Hz and set the UUT filter back to 50 kHz LP Note the reading and then set the UUT filter to 300 Hz LP Check that the UUT voltmeter indicates within 6 3 mV resolution of the level measured with the 50 kHz LP 5 21 ACCEPTANCE TESTING UUT LF generator oo aoo 6000 22g loo DI DHe ua 30 jajajajajajajaja Fans 000 000 DD oo 000 poo 000000008 00 po o oa NA DODoDo 0000 OO S n Y 00000000 0a t U AF INPUT A AF GEN y OUTPUT J y DVM VOLTMETER INPUT TERMINALS C6040 Fig 5 13 Audio voltmeter level accuracy checks 6 Setthe UUT AF filter to 50 kHz LP 7 Setthe LF generator to frequency 50 Hz level 1 V RMS adjust until DVM indi
116. VEL 21 dBm FREQ 10 MHz All modulation and noise measurements should be switched OFF Check that the power meter indicates 21 dBm 2 dB Select N type output N type input mode and check that the level measured is 21 dBm 2 dB Press RF IN OUT SELECT until the mode returns to N type output antenna input Repeat steps 3 to 5 for 100 MHz and then in 100 MHz steps up to and including 1000 MHz 5 7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING ALC linearity 1 Refer to Results table 5 3 on page 5 37 Connect the sensor to the N type output socket as shown in Fig 5 2 2 Set the UUT to RF Gen LEVEL 21 dBm A INC 1 dB FREQ 10 MHz 3 Increment the RF output of the UUT in 1 dB steps down to 38 dBm ensuring that the indication on the power meter is within 2 dB of each level set 4 Return the UUT RF level to 221 dBm 5 Setthe UUT carrier frequency to 500 MHz and repeat step 3 Refer to Results table 5 4 on page 5 36 6 Set the UUT carrier frequency to 1 GHz return the level to 221 dBm and repeat step 3 Refer to Results table 5 5 on page 5 38 BNC output mode No claim is made on the output level accuracy of the BNC socket The following is a functional check to ensure correct internal operation 1 Q G 4 Connect the 6920 sensor to the BNC output as shown in Fig 5 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 21 dBm FREQ 10 MHz All modulation and noise measurements should b
117. a va sostituita immediatamente La sostituzione deve essere fatta solo con analoga batteria dello stesso costruttore o con un tipo raccomandato dalla Aeroflex Prima di rimuovere la batteria occorre scollegare il cavo di alimentazione elettrica esterna dell apparato Il pacco batterie contiene un sistema intelligente di ricarica per cui esso va ricaricato solo tramite questo apparato o tramite un carica batterie approvato La legislazione europea direttiva CE n 9 889 EEC classifica le batterie Ni MH tra i rifiuti pericolosi a causa del suo contenuto di nickel Le batterie esaurite vanno pertanto raccolte negli appositi contenitori di rifiuti e non vanno mescolate ad altri rifiuti Contattare il locale fornitore di batterie per le necessarie informazioni sulle procedure vigenti nel Vostro paese sulla raccolta di rifiuti e sull immagazzinamento di questo tipo di batterie N Superfici ad alta temperatura Fare attenzione nel toccare il connettore d ingresso di tipo N dopo aver applicato una potenza elevata e continua Una potenza superiore a 50 W per tempi prolungati pu portare il connettore ad una temperatura molto elevata N Rischio a RF Durante la misura di ROS di valori elevati la presenza di onde stazionarie pu causare tensioni pericolose In queste condizioni quindi rischioso usare lo strumento coi coperchi rimossi xviii N Posizionamento inclinato Quando lo strumento in posizione inclinata raccomandato per mo
118. above 2 kHz deviation 3 digits and barchart 5 resolution at 1 kHz modulation frequency t 7 5 resolution for modulation frequencies 50 Hz to 10 kHz Less than 2 at 1 kHz and 5 kHz FM CCITT Weighted Less than 30 Hz 300 Hz to 3 4 kHz 200 mV peak to peak 10 per 1 kHz deviation T At low modulation levels the residual AM FM may become significant GENERAL INFORMATION RF spectrum analyzer Frequency Range Spans Resolution Bandwidth Reference Level top of screen Displayed dynamic range Noise floor On Screen Linearity Vertical resolution Level Flatness Intermodulation Distortion Sweep speeds Marker Indication Sensitivity Tracking generator offset frequency range 100 kHz to 1 0 GHz Continuously variable 1 kHz division to 100 MHz division 1 2 5 10 increments Start Stop facility allows selection of infinitely variable span width 300 Hz 3 30 300 kHz 3 MHz 50 dBm to 52 dBm 0 7 mV to 71V 80 dB Typically 75 dB below top of screen Typically 2 dB resolution 10 dB div gt 10 dB above the noise floor 0 1 dB on 2 dB division 0 5 dB on 10 dB division 1 dB resolution over 50 MHz span Better than 70 dB for two signals at 30 dBm into first mixer 10 ms div to 200 ms div in a 1 2 5 sequence optimum sweep speed and bandwidth selected according to span or user selectable Span Resolution B W Update Sweeps sec 10 kHz 300 Hz 5 100 kHz 3 kHz
119. adjacent to each RF connector show the assignment of the connectors This information is also shown in the test title area of the display when in Dx TEST mode Soft key menus left and right These areas each have menus of soft key labels designated to the adjacent soft keys Some modes of operation only require one menu area of six selections For example the Tx TEST mode and the AF TEST mode both display and use only the right hand soft keys the Rx TEST mode only the left hand soft keys The Dx TEST mode uses the right hand soft keys for transmitter test functions and the left hand soft keys for receiver functions 3 4 LOCAL OPERATION TRANSMITTER TEST mu RECEIVER TEST mu TA FREQ 550 660008MHz S cs GEH FREG 4 amp 6 25888MHz OFFSET 23 888kHz LEVELS 8B dBm AUDIO FREQ 6 6Hz POWER MO SIGNAL EB LEVEL AF1 FRED 1 GGGGkHz ER m MODI FREQ 1 8088kHz Sin LEVEL 1BH mU Off Sin LEVEL 1 588kHz Off CS ab 46 eb sb 100 MOD2 FREG 1 888BkHz Sin LEVEL Pai Off Sin LEVEL 1 50 kHz Off MOD FREQ B BHz Pk FM LEVEL GHz EXT LEVEL 15 888kHz Off SOURCE Ext Mod ivr AC Incrementz GOLE ad 46 AFi FREQ 188Hz AFi LEVEL 19 Increments MODI FREQ 198Hz MODI LEVEL 16 666kHz IF FILTER 3 kHz AF FILTER i5 8kHz LP RF FILTER 388 to 3 4kHz COUPLING RC RECEIVER DU
120. aften Verletzungen f hren kann Es gibt keine vom Anwender austauschbare Teile in diesem Ger t Lassen Sie alle Reparaturen durch qualifiziertes Personal durchf hren Eine Liste der Servicestellen finden Sie auf der R ckseite des Handbuches Sicherungen Die interne Sicherung in der Spannungszuf hrung ist in Reihe mit der spannungsf hrenden Zuleitung geschaltet Bei Verbindung mit einer zweiadrigen nicht gepolten Steckdose kann die Sicherung in der Masseleitung liegen so daB auch bei geschmolzener Sicherung Ger teteile immer noch auf Spannungspotential sind N Feuergefahr Es d rfen nur Ersatzsicherungen vom gleichen Typ mit den korrekten Spezifikationen entsprechend der Stromaufnahme des Ger tes verwendet werden Siehe hierzu die Leistungsdaten Performance Data in Kapitel 1 Warnung vor giftigen Substanzen In einigen Bauelementen dieses Ger ts k nnen Epoxyharze oder andere Materialien enthalten sein die im Brandfall giftige Gase erzeugen Bei der Entsorgung m ssen deshalb entsprechende Vorsichtsma nahmen getroffen werden Lithium Eine Lithium Batterie oder eine Lithium Batterie innerhalb eines IC ist in diesem Ger t eingebaut Da Lithium ein giftiges Material ist sollte es als Sonderm ll entsorgt werden Diese Batterie darf auf keinen Fall geladen werden Nicht kurzschlie en da sie dabei berhitzt werden und explodieren kann xiii Beryllium Kupfer In diesem Ger t sind einige mechanische Komponenten aus
121. ain at supply potential even after the fuse has ruptured N Fire hazard Make sure that only fuses of the correct rating and type are used for replacement If an integrally fused plug is used on the supply lead ensure that the fuse rating is commensurate with the current requirements of this equipment See under Performance Data in Chapter 1 for power requirements Toxic hazards Some of the components used in this equipment may include resins and other materials which give off toxic fumes if incinerated Take appropriate precautions therefore in the disposal of these items Lithium A Lithium battery or a Lithium battery contained within an IC is used in this equipment As Lithium is a toxic substance the battery should in no circumstances be crushed incinerated or disposed of in normal waste Do not attempt to recharge this type of battery Do not short circuit or force discharge since this might cause the battery to vent overheat or explode Beryllium copper Some mechanical components within this instrument are manufactured from beryllium copper This is an alloy with a beryllium content of approximately 5 It represents no risk in normal use The material should not be machined welded or subjected to any process where heat is involved It must be disposed of as special waste It must NOT be disposed of by incineration Nickel metal hydride A Nickel Metal Hydride Ni MH battery pack is used in this equ
122. ally 196 10 96 resolution up to 1 GHz FM amp CW N Type 50 W at 20 68 F Antenna port 1 W N Type 150 W for limited periods typically 1 minute at 20 68 F Overload indicated by audible and visual warning Autotuned 5 mW N Type 0 05 mW BNC antenna port Manual Tuned 34 dBm N Type 60 dBm BNC antenna port Auto or manual control of input attenuator Four independently configurable Lowpass filters LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 that can be set to any frequency cut off point from 250 Hz to 20 000 Hz excluding the band 1001 to 2999 Hz 50 kHz Lowpass No filters applied 750 us de emphasis 50 Hz Highpass 300 Hz Highpass Any combination of LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 and the Highpass filters 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz 10 Hz to 15 kHz 0 to 9996 manually tuned 0 to 90 below 100 MHz 0 to 80 from 100 to 400 MHz Peak hold facility GENERAL INFORMATION Resolution Indication Accuracy 1 Demodulation Distortion T Residual AM Frequency Modulation Frequency Range Modulation Frequency Range Deviation Range Resolution Indication Accuracy 1 Demodulation Distortion Residual FM Demodulation Output Socket 196 AM 2 digits and barchart t 596 1 digit at 1 kHz 8 5 1 digit from 50 Hz to 10 kHz Less than 2 96 at 1 kHz amp 3096 AM CCITT Weighted Less than 1 300 Hz to 3 4 kHz 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz 10 Hz to 15 kHz 0 to 75 kHz Peak hold facility 10 Hz below 2 kHz deviation 196
123. alyzer The SPEC ANA mode allows off and directly coupled RF signals to be studied and monitored Sideband spread harmonic levels and RF interference can be examined The frequency range of the spectrum analyzer is from 100 kHz to 1 0 GHz with the start and stop frequencies of the sweep infinitely variable from within this range The tracking generator permits frequency response tests to be made to frequency dependent circuits and the frequency offset facility extends this capability into the area of frequency shifting circuits such as mixers The Look and Listen function gives the ability to demodulate a signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer and monitor the signal obtained on the built in loudspeaker on headphones or other data output equipment AF testing Service Monitor AUDIO Amplifier Under Test AUDIO gt C6029 Fig 1 5 AF test setup The AF testing mode allows the dual AF generators and the tones generator to be used as a signal source The AF voltmeter distortion meter bar chart displays and the AF counter can all be used to provide data relating to signals applied to the AF input connector The digital oscilloscope is also available for studying AF waveforms 1 6 GENERAL INFORMATION Performance data Receiver measurements RF signal generator Frequency Range Resolution Indication Setting Accuracy Output Level Range Resolution Indicatio
124. and 3 0 kHz to 20 0 kHz The band pass preset filters can be customized by selecting either of the high pass options in combination with any of the four preset low pass filters The preset filters are set from the HELP SETUP facility The AF Filter setup explanation starts on page 3 11 De emph De emphasis filtering ON OFF is toggled by alternate presses of the Deemph key The de emphasis filtering uses a 750 us time constant to give a 6 dB octave roll off De emph ON appears on the main display when appropriate No indication is given to show that de emphasis is not on Press More to return to the previous menu or Return to display the main Tx TEST menu OSCILLOSCOPE The input to the oscilloscope is taken from the demodulators through any selected AF filters Therefore modulation measurements made using the oscilloscope will include the characteristics of the selected AF filter 3 28 LOCAL OPERATION Audio distortion measurement The Service Monitor is able to measure signal noise and distortion against the following parameters Signal to noise SINAD Percentage ratio level distortion Press the Dist S N key The right hand soft keys change to allow selection of S N SINAD and distortion measurements Off Disables any active distortion measuring function Hint By disabling this function the time taken to measure the remainder of the measurement functions is shortened thereby reducing the update time S N
125. andard external 3 8 Front panel layout esee 3 4 USES ete eee eee ed 2 3 G General information serene 1 1 Getting started sea e etate 3 9 GPIB addfess r aio urs 3 13 GPIB connections 2 10 GPIB remote control 1 2 H Hard copy 3 93 Hold display setae e ent ed edet 3 7 IE citciits io ai 4 10 Incremental adjustments 3 67 Incremental adjustments spectrum analyzer 3 68 Incremental keys duplex test mode 3 6 Incremental keys spectrum analyzer mode 3 6 Input power maximum 3 25 Input switching iii 4 9 Input output switching board 4 9 Installations He ee 2 1 K Key AF input coupling 3 7 Key HELP SETUP u 3 7 Key SELECT RF input eee 3 6 Keys blue ere Mn nn st 3 7 3 10 Keys data INput noo 3 5 A reus 3 5 Keys increment adjustment 3 6 keys orange x aser dee eds 3 5 Keys teret tet a eee tis 3 5 Keys oscilloscope sweep mode 3 7 KOS OM TRA TUS 3 5 keys terminator sese 3 5 Keys test Mode 3 10 Keys test mode select 3 7 L Lithium batteries Local operation returning to
126. apter It is suggested that these tables are copied and the test results entered on the copies The Results table that is appropriate to each particular test or part of a test is referred to at the relevant point in the test procedure Before starting In line with best practice in electronic measurement it is recommended that the Unit Under Test UUT is allowed to stabilize for thirty minutes after switch on to obtain optimum performance The key presses necessary to set UUT parameters may differ slightly from those stated in the text depending on the version of software fitted To minimize the number of key presses that the user needs to make to obtain the correct instrument settings each section assumes that the instrument is being configured from the instrument factory default power on state To ensure that this occurs initially press the following keys HELP SETUP Setup Setup page 2 toggle Power Up From until Preset Store 1 1s shown highlighted in inverse video Each time the instrument is now powered up it will enter its default power on state The instructions relating to test equipment operation assume that the test equipment used for each test is that suggested in the Example column of the following table where there is more than one the first item 5 3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Test equipment Frequency counter 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz IFR 2440 or 1 Hz resolution external standard In Out EIP 25B RF pow
127. ata entry keys The Service Monitor will accept any octal sequence in the range 0 to 777 Complete the entry by pressing the Enter key Leading zeros will be suppressed Return to the Rx TEST mode and check that the RF generator is active then return to the TONES DCS mode The DCS coded signal will be produced when the legend Tone On is displayed against Tone Generate Mode See Tone ON OFF control below 3 79 LOCAL OPERATION Tone ON OFF control When the RF DCS ENCODER screen or the AF DCS ENCODER screen is displayed the tone is turned on or off by the orange ON OFF function key If the DCS tone is ON and the Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST or AF TEST mode selected the CTCSS tone will continue to be generated If the tones out routing has been set to give RF tones this is provided by modulation generator 2 The legend DCS will be displayed against MOD2 FREQ on the RECEIVER TEST or DUPLEX screens If MOBA is selected the DCS tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If MODA is selected the DCS tone is still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control 15 adjusted the DCS tone will cease It can then be re started only when the RF DCS ENCODER screen or the AF DCS ENCODER screen is displayed If the tones out routing has been set to give AF tones this is provided by audio generator 2 The legend DCS will be displayed again
128. ated with the low pass filters are on the left of the setup page To set the required frequency first press the soft key relevant to the low pass filter to be set The Freq legend will become highlighted in reverse video Use the Data Input keys to enter the required frequency and then press the appropriate termination key Hz or kHz This frequency will now be assigned to that low pass filter 3 12 LOCAL OPERATION Band pass filters The four band pass filters can each be customized to your requirements by selecting low pass and high pass elements from the as required The High pass element can be either 50 Hz or 300 Hz the low pass element can be any of the four preset low pass filters To select the required high pass element first press the LP HP soft key once or twice to move the gt indicator to the high pass elements on all four soft key settings boxes Next press the soft key relevant to the band pass filter to be set The 50Hz or 300Hz settings will toggle Repeat this to select the required filter element To select the required low pass element first press the LP HP soft key once or twice to move the gt indicator to the low pass elements on all four soft key settings boxes Next press the soft key relevant to the band pass filter to be set Each press will select one of the LP1 LP2 LP3 and LP4 settings in sequence Repeat until the required low pass filter element is selected This setup will now be assign
129. avant de remplacer le pack batterie Le pack batterie contient un syst me de r gulation intelligent donc il faut seulement utiliser le syst me de rechargement interne ou un chargeur agr Les batteries du type Ni MH suivant les Normes Europ ennes EC Directive 91 689 EEC sont consid r es comme des d chets dangereux parce qu elles contiennent du nickel Garder les batteries qui ne sont plus utilisables s par ment ne les jetez pas avec les d chets industriels ou domestiques Contacter votre fournisseur local de batteries pour tout renseignement sur les proc dures de rassemblement enl vement ou recyclage dans votre pays A Surfaces chaudes Faire attention lors de la manipulation d un connecteur N apr s l injection de haute puissance en continu sur l entr e RF de ce connecteur Si une puissance sup rieure 50 W est envoy e pendant une longue dur e la temp rature du connecteur peut tre tr s lev e N Danger RF Lors de la mesure de T O S de valeur importante des tensions dangereuses dues aux ondes stationnaires peuvent apparaitre sur l alimentation Dans ces conditions il est dangereux de faire fonctionner l appareil sans ses capots de protection N Position inclin e Lorsque l appareil est dans une position inclin e il est recommand pour des raisons de stabilit de ne pas y empiler d autres appareils CAUTION Utilisation Cet quipement a t concu et fabriqu par Aeroflex pour g n
130. be demodulated when the SSB option is implemented The AF counter to measure the frequency of the demodulated signal The distortion meter to obtain the signal to noise level the modulation distortion percentage or the modulation SINAD level of the transmitter The oscilloscope to view the demodulated signal and to measure the modulation levels The tones generator to modulate transmitters of systems using tone calling The tones decoder to demodulate tones generated by the transmitter The AF amplifier and loudspeaker to monitor the demodulated signal The spectrum analyzer facility which 1s a separate operating mode SPEC ANA can be used to study the sidebands and any harmonics produced by the transmitter either by direct connection or by off air monitoring GENERAL INFORMATION Receiver testing Service Monitor Gr MODULATED RF TEST SIGNAL gt ae on Rx Under DEMODULATED AF SIGNAL Test C6026 Fig 1 2 Receiver test setup The receiver test procedure uses The RF generator and the AF generators to produce a transmission with defined parameters The AF voltmeter to measure the level of the demodulated signal from the receiver The distortion meter to obtain signal to noise ratio SINAD levels and distortion percentage figures The tone generator and tone detector to produce and decode specialized calling tones to test tone recognition circuits Th
131. between the Licensee and Aeroflex 3 TERM This Agreement shall be effective from the date hereof and shall continue in force until terminated under the provisions of Clause 9 4 LICENCE 4 1 4 2 43 44 4 5 Unless and until terminated this Licence confers upon the Licensee the non transferable and non exclusive right to use the Licensed Software on the Designated Equipment The Licensee may not use the Licensed Software on other than the Designated Equipment unless written permission is first obtained from Aeroflex and until the appropriate additional Licence Fee has been paid to Aeroflex The Licensee may not amend or alter the Licensed Software and shall have no right or licence other than that stipulated herein The Licensee may make not more than two copies of the Licensed Software but not the Authoring and Language Manuals in machine readable form for operational security and shall ensure that all such copies include Aeroflex s copyright notice together with any features which disclose the name of the Licensed Software and the Licensee Furthermore the Licensee shall not permit the Licensed Software or any part to be disclosed in any form to any third party and shall maintain the Licensed Software in secure premises to prevent any unauthorised disclosure The Licensee shall notify Aeroflex immediately if the Licensee has knowledge that any unlicensed party possesses the Licensed Software The Licensee s obligation to maintain c
132. by a dash To enter a Null Tone in a tone sequence press the Tone key once A maximum of 40 characters can be included in a sequence any further entries will over write the existing sequence Editing a tone sequence An existing tone sequence can be edited as required Using the rotary control move the cursor over the character to be changed To delete the unwanted character and insert a new character in its place press the data key corresponding to the new character To delete an unwanted character and close up the sequence press the DELETE key 3 82 LOCAL OPERATION Tones modulation level The modulation level produced by each tone of the tone pair can be set independently Pressing the Lo Tone Level key will highlight the legend Ea ma ME The modulation level can then be set using the data entry keys The modulation level produced by the tones is set using the Lo Tone Level or Hi tone Level key followed by use of the data input keys The modulation level limits are 25 Hz to 75 kHz FM or 1 to 99 AM Attempted entries outside of the values will be ignored The default level is 1 5 kHz The modulation level produced by each tone of the tone pair can be set independently Levels of the two tones can be locked using the Lock Levels key This key toggles between the locked and unlocked condition When going from unlocked to locked the latest level set will be taken by both tones The tone duration and the
133. cates as close to 1 V as possible Check that the level indicated on the UUT voltmeter is within 3 3 mV resolution of the level indicated on the DVM 8 Repeat step 7 with LF generator frequencies of 100 Hz 500 Hz 10 kHz 30 kHz and 50 kHz 9 Set the UUT AF input to DC coupled and substitute the LF generator with the DC power supply Set the external DVM to monitor DC volts 10 Set the DC supply to 25 V adjust until DVM indicates as close to 25 V as possible Check that the level indicated on the UUT voltmeter is within 3 3 mV resolution of the level indicated on the DVM Repeat this step with the DC supply set to 50 V 5 22 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Audio oscilloscope Specification Voltage accuracy Ranges Graticule 5 of full scale DC to 50 kHz 3 Hz to 50 kHz AC coupled 10 mV div to 20 V div in a 1 2 5 sequence 10 horizontal by 6 vertical Test equipment 1 Q 6 4 5 6 LF generator DVM DC PSU IFR 2965 Solatron 7150 10 Hz to 20 kHz 10 mV to 12 V peak to peak DC measurement and AC measurement 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 to 30V LF generator DO ol 7000 000 Tt Li 00 a O0000000 00000000 o 80000000 2 00000 OB DODO R 0000 5000 0000 0000 X acaaocaaao 0000000 A T UJ AF INPUT A AF GEN y OUTPUT Y DVM
134. cation OSCILLOSCOPE With the oscilloscope facility selected the distortion level bar chart is removed from the display but the digital read out 1s retained DUPLEX When in the Dx TEST mode modulation distortion tests are not displayed 3 37 LOCAL OPERATION Rx test receiver testing Overview The Communications Service Monitor has been designed to test the performance of mobile communication equipment This section explains the use of the Rx TEST mode Typical uses are e Performance checking following manufacture e Routine quality assurance testing e Workshop or field fault diagnosis etc The tests that need to be carried out will depend on the specification of the receiver and the reason for testing however a generalized list would be Sensitivity AF Bandwidth AF Distortion Selectivity Blocking or desensitization Spurious response response With the Rx TEST mode selected the screen and menu shown in fold out diagram 3 0 is displayed From this screen and menu the setting up of the inbuilt devices for receiver testing and the read out of results is carried out The sections of the monitor available for receiver testing are RF signal generator Audio modulation generators Used to provide modulation of the RF generator Audio tone generator Provides tones for CTCSS Sequential DTMF systems Audio distortion meter Digital oscilloscope As well as setting up the major sections of the Serv
135. ce Monitor as for previous tests but with a second RF signal generator simulating the adjacent channel transmitter See Fig 3 9 Selectivity test setup on page 3 50 A specification for receiver selectivity requires parameters to be set down to measure against Within the specification of a typical mobile radio a typical adjacent channel selectivity figure might read 12 dB adjacent channel selectivity better than 80 dB and the 20 dB weighted SINAD sensitivity is quoted as better than 1 To confirm this selectivity figure proceed as follows The equipment is connected as in Fig 3 9 Selectivity test setup The level of modulation for the wanted signal is set to 60 of the maximum deviation for FM receivers or 30 modulation for AM receivers The modulation frequency is 1 kHz unless specified differently The generator being used to provide the adjacent channel signal is set to the frequency of the adjacent channel with a modulation frequency of 400 Hz unless specified differently The modulation level is set to 60 of the maximum deviation for FM receivers or 30 modulation for AM receivers The carrier is switched off at the commencement of the test The level of the Service Monitor providing the wanted signal is adjusted until a SINAD reading of 20 dB is obtained as for sensitivity testing The RF output level of the generator should be noted This should be the same level as that established in the 20 dB sensitivi
136. ce testing 5 1 Acceptance tests e eet e era teet 5 3 Accessory connector front panel 3 6 Accessory port rear optional 3 94 Accessory socket connections 2 7 Accessory socket logic 2 8 AF GEN OUT connector 3 6 AF input coupling option 3 7 AF measuring circuits 4 14 AF TEST mode 3 63 oie MORI RR 1 6 Alo 2 2 Antenna put i sse oto e 4 9 Attenuator switched 4 10 Attenuators external 3 33 Audio distortion measurement Rx test 3 65 Audio generator set up sse 3 30 Audio generators sss 4 7 4 14 Audio level nee 3 17 ALONE ido 3 25 3 26 B Bandwidth filters nen 4 11 Battery pack endurance 2 6 Battery pack 2 6 Block diagramme ii nette 4 2 Bridge rectifier isses needs 4 3 Broadband power meter 4 9 C Connections DC supply 2 6 Connections remote control 2 9 Connections RF and AF sas 2 6 Connections RS232 eniin eere 2 9 Connectors rear panel 3 8 Connectors RF input and output 3 5
137. ch will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds under certain conditions These are listed below ERROR Store Empty recalled store location is empty ERROR Store Protected The store addressed is protected and therefore cannot be overwritten or deleted ERROR Cannot Print Store The contents of the store cannot be printed The addressed store location is an internal store 3 92 Printer LOCAL OPERATION An RS232 printer can be driven by the Service Monitor when connected to the SERIAL PORT on the rear panel Complete screen images and hard copy of stored test results can be printed The serial port must be set to the printer option through the HELP SETUP Setup key sequence followed by the Remote Control key The port must be configured to match the requirements of the printer using the port configuration menu also accessible through the HELP SETUP Setup key sequence followed by the Serial Setup key To print screen images make the required test and when the display shows the data to be printed proceed as follows Press the DISPLAY HOLD key The current soft key menu will be replaced to show two keys Print and Store Press the Print key The display will be reproduced by the printer Test results held in the Service Monitor memory stores can also be printed The procedures for these operations are described earlier in this chapter See Stores settings results on page 3 90
138. ctable by the user The spectrum analyzer detector circuits will give an output corresponding to the mean level of signal within the acceptance passband Therefore the choice of pass band or resolution bandwidth will depend upon the characteristics of the signal being examined The sweep speed is dependent on the resolution bandwidth A high resolution analysis will take longer to process than a low resolution analysis The resolution bandwidth can be selected manually or set automatically To set the resolution bandwidth first press the Res BW key The menu shown in fold out diagram 5 12 will be displayed The options then available are e Press the Auto Res BW key to set the resolution bandwidth to the optimum setting as determined by the Service Monitor software The setting is then shown on the display Use the return key as appropriate to resume setting up or testing e Press the Manual Res BW key to set the required resolution bandwidth by manual selection The passbands available for selection are The setting is then shown on the display Use the return key as appropriate to resume setting up or testing e Press the Return key to exit the resolution bandwidth selection menu Reference level The top of the graticule represents the reference level that can be set between 50 dBm and 52 dBm Pressing the REF LEVEL key will highlight the RAI EA legend and allow a level within the above range to be entered using t
139. cule line Reconnect the DC PSU and adjust 1ts level until the oscilloscope trace sits on the graticule line two divisions up from the bottom of the display Check that the DVM indicates a level within the limits shown in the above table Repeat for the final range shown in the above table but this time adjusting the DC PSU level until the trace sits on the graticule line 1 division up from the bottom of the display Remove the DC PSU and reconnect the LF generator Set the DVM to measure Volts AC Refer to Results table 5 28 on page 5 47 Set the UUT to 1 V div 50 ms div Set the LF generator to the first frequency shown in Results table 5 28 at the same time selecting the relevant timebase on the UUT Adjust the LF generator level until the trace occupies the full six divisions Note the level on the DVM and check that it lies within the limits shown in the table AF distortion amp SINAD meter Specification Frequency range 1 kHz Distortion meter accuracy 5 of reading 0 5 distortion SINAD meter accuracy 1 dB 1 Refer to Results table 5 29 on page 5 47 Connect UUT AF INPUT to UUT AF GEN OUT 2 Setthe UUT to AF TEST Audio Gen FREQ 1 kHz LEVEL 1 V Press Gen 1 Gen2 to select AF Gen 2 then FREQ 400 Hz LEVEL 20 mV ON This should cause AF Gen 1 to be set to 1 kHz 1 V and AF Gen 2 to 400 Hz 20 mV If these values are not set make the required adjustments to achieve them 3 Press Return Audio Meter
140. d DUPLEX The same frequency measurement procedures are applicable when in the Dx TEST mode RF distortion and Spurious outputs Distortion of the transmission RF output may be deliberate modulation is a form of deliberate distortion it may be due to a fault or because of design limitations Whatever the reason the distortion produces harmonics or other spurious outputs These can be located using the SPEC ANA mode of operation By viewing the output signals from the transmitter on a voltage vs frequency plot any transmissions outside the transmitter s specified bandwidth can be identified The use of the SPEC ANA mode is explained fully under that heading 3 34 LOCAL OPERATION Modulation characteristics Modulation frequency response and Companding limiting The requirements of individual users will vary but the principle of the tests will be the same A signal having a known level and frequency is applied to the AF input of the transmitter and the level of modulation produced is measured To test the modulation characteristics of a transmitter with any degree of accuracy requires that the signal used to provide the modulation is accurately defined The Service Monitor has two AF generators for this purpose The setting up instructions for frequency level and shape options of these is given under Setting Up AF Generators above The output from the AF generators is available at the AF output connector on the fron
141. d mixer is amplified and filtered on A4 1 then fed to a logarithmic amplifier The 10 7 MHz signal is detected to produce a DC signal the level of which is relative to the level of the RF signal input The DC voltage is digitized by an analogue to digital converter on the Microprocessor board B2 1 The digital value obtained is stored in RAM at a memory location which is related to the sweep position and to the value Each time the display is refreshed the contents of each display location address will provide the latest data thus updating the display The refresh rate is approx 11 per second Look and listen function optional When the look and listen function of spectrum analyzer mode is selected the operation 1s modified In order to demodulate the center frequency of the span the signal fed to the demodulator must be obtained from a fixed frequency point As the frequency span in the look and listen function is limited to 2 MHz the frequency sweep can be applied at the third mixer stage A ramp voltage is generated within AF generator 2 on the AF board B1 2 and applied to the 90 MHz voltage controlled oscillator on A10 The 10 7 MHz IF signal will thus have swept over the selected range to produce a Frequency vs Signal Level display The signal fed to the modulator meter is obtained from the Look and Listen third mixer located on the second and third local oscillator board A9 1 The demodulated AM or FM signal is amplified to provide a
142. d other settings relevant to the intended work are set as required Then proceed as follows Press the orange MEM key and the STORE RECALL screen will be displayed Ignore the flashing inverse video message Press the Store Setting key which will cause the flashing inverse video message to change to Store Settings To Store No Key in the two digit address of the required empty or unprotected location Any data already contained in the location will be overwritten The location address list will show the contents of the location as Settings A unique title can be attached to the store location See Titling store locations later DISPLAY HOLD STORE Storing results Results obtained using the Tx Rx Dx and AF test modes can be stored For this the memory is accessed using the DISPLAY HOLD key To store test results make the required test and when the display shows the results to be stored proceed as follows Press the DISPLAY HOLD key The current soft key menu will be replaced to show two keys Print and Store Press the Store key which will cause the DISPLAY HOLD STORE screen to be displayed with a flashing inverse video message Store Results To Store No Key in the two digit address of the required empty or unprotected location Any data already contained in the location will be overwritten The location address list will show the contents of the location as Results A unique title can be a
143. d the Open Logic Low state when the instrument is not squelched 3 95 LOCAL OPERATION HELP SETUP HELP RF Counter Resolution Atten Hold z rtions Fitted SPIE re RF Level Measured i Atten Hold Levels Internal Battery Watts Volts 25 BdEm RF Power Ext Atten B 06 Rx Tx Offset Frea BHz SELF TEST Broadband rower S BhMHz Transmitter Frea SBBHMHz Broadband Power 1GHz Transmitter Fres 1GHz Broadband Power 16 5MHz Transmitter Frea 18 5MHz Narrowband Power 16dEm Harrowband Power adEm Harrowband Power 16dEm Narrowband Power 26dEm Harrowband Power 3BdEm Harrowband Power 46dEm Narrowband Power 5 Harrowband Power amp BdEm FM Deviation SBkHz Mod Freauencs ikHz ON RF Input Level Auto RF Level in AM Derth 50 CHARGE o Use Rotary 12 BPIB Address GPIB 6 Addr Serial No 294586 837 Software Vers 44533 500 05 03 21 03 06 EXE Remote RS232 Remote Control Serial Setur Printer Setur RF Preset User Power Filters Store 1 Store 2 Ur From Losic Lines wel Measured int dem dEU Watts Input Impedance Matc
144. d to two independent mixers The secondary feed supplies the 90 MHz swept local oscillator board A10 This operates as a swept oscillator when the spectrum analyzer Look and Listen function is active as described later It provides a locked 90 MHz signal for the third mixer at other times The primary path 1s through a band pass filter with 5 MHz bandwidth to the main 90 MHz 3rd mixer This mixer is on the second and third mixer board A3 Third frequency changer mixer A third frequency change is made to the signal to achieve a final IF of 10 7 MHz The local oscillator signal for the third mixer is provided by the voltage controlled oscillator on A10 This oscillator runs at 90 MHz and for normal transmitter testing is locked to the output of a 90 MHz reference oscillator on the second and third oscillator board A9 1 Bandwidth filters The 10 7 MHz output from the third mixer in the Tx TEST path passes from the second and third mixer board A3 to the 10 7 MHz IF and Log amplifier board A4 1 Filters on this board provides the bandwidth filtering for the signal path in the Tx TEST mode and also for the SPEC ANA mode The bandwidths provided are 3 MHz 300 kHz 30 kHz 3 kHz and 300 Hz using crystal filters controlled by signals from the micro processor A direct un filtered path is also provided After filtering the signal is passed to the demodulators on the audio processor board B1 2 Demodulators AM demodulator The demodula
145. deband demodulator circuits are all contained on the SSB demodulator board 15 When the SSB demodulation function is selected the first local oscillator of the Service Monitor is set to a frequency which will produce a final IF of 10 625 MHz from an input frequency equal to the carrier frequency rather than the 10 7 MHz IF produced for all other modes The IF signal for the SSB board is obtained from the third mixer on A3 through a 10 7 MHz low pass filter on A4 1 It is applied to a variable gain circuit which is used to control the input level for the SSB demodulator circuits After leaving the gain control circuit the signal is then mixed in a double balanced mixer with a 10 MHz signal from the instrument reference oscillator The output from the mixer will contain a 625 kHz component This is passed through a 625 kHz low pass filter to one input of another double balanced mixer The second input is fed with a reference signal of 625 kHz derived from the 10 MHz reference through a divide by 16 circuit The output from the double balanced mixer will be zero when no modulation is present on the input signal When modulation is applied the output signal will equal the difference in frequency between the original carrier frequency and the original sideband frequency Either an upper sideband signal or lower sideband signal will produce an output This will equal the frequency of the applied modulation The demodulated signal is fed to the i
146. demodulated AF signals are made after filtering to the selected AF filter pass band The AF filters are located on the audio processor board and offer the choice of 300 Hz 3 4 kHz band pass 15 kHz low pass 300 Hz low pass and the full bandwidth of 50 kHz The selected filters are switched into the AF circuit before the ranging amplifiers 4 12 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Distortion SINAD filter The 1 0 kHz active notch filter used to make distortion percentage and SINAD measurements is also on the audio processor board B1 2 This filter is switched into circuit to make comparison measurements against the unfiltered path The additional distortion frequencies enabled by Option 29 are provided by an additional board that plugs into the audio processor board B1 2 It provides two additional notch filters and the necessary circuits to switch between them Each filter is very similar to the standard 1 kHz filter but with different component values required for the different notch frequencies Oscilloscope function The oscilloscope function when used within the Tx TEST mode displays the waveform of the demodulated signal The signal for this is taken from the AF filter output and after passing through level converting amplifier circuits is fed to an analogue to digital converter located on the microprocessor board B2 1 The digital levels relating to the waveform are written into a digital signal processor which generates the oscilloscope displa
147. demodulation function has been selected no modulation bar chart is displayed The legend SSB Trans and the selected sensitivity are shown The FREQ OFFSET will indicate the difference between the mean measured frequency of the transmission and that entered as transmitter frequency 3 29 LOCAL OPERATION More FM deviation pk rms Inst dBr dBr Ref Abs Meas Press the More key The right hand soft keys change to allow selection of the FM deviation and AM modulation measurement modes FM Dev Pk rms Toggles between measuring FM modulation with RMS or with peak detectors The measurement mode Pk or rms appears to the left of the FM deviation bar chart Inst dBr Pressing the Inst dBr soft key captures the current modulation level reading and enters it as the dBr reference level dBr Ref Pressing the dBr Ref soft key allows a modulation reference level to be set so that the digital modulation reading is shown as dBr levels relative to the reference The bargraph readout and the positive and negative readings continue to display the absolute values The reference level can be set using the Data input keys or captured from the current absolute measurement by pressing the Inst dBr soft key Abs Meas Pressing the Abs Meas soft key cancels the current dBr reverence level and restores the digital modulation reading to absolute levels More Mod Pk Hid Press the More key The right hand soft keys chan
148. distortion meter to NONE and repeat with AF Gen 1 set to provide 15 kHz 8 Refer to Results table 5 22 on page 5 44 Repeat the above procedure except this time with AF Gen 1 switched OFF and AF Gen 2 ON 5 18 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Audio generator frequency This is a functional check only The Audio generator frequency is derived digitally and provided that the hardware is operational its accuracy will be maintained The instrument s internal reference frequency is checked elsewhere This check is listed at this point as it is one of the AF generator tests but it should be carried out after the UUT audio frequency meter has been checked see AF input tests AF frequency meter Specification Frequency accuracy 0 01 Hz frequency standard 180 Hz 0 1 Hz frequency standard gt 180 Hz 1 Refer to Results table 5 23 on page 5 44 Connect the UUT AF GEN OUT socket to the UUT AF INPUT socket 2 Setthe UUT to AF TEST AF Filter 50 kHz LP to set the Audio Input filter to 50 kHz Low pass 3 Set Audio Gen LEVEL 1 V FREQ 10 Hz Audio generator 2 should be switched OFF Check that the frequency indicated on the UUT audio counter is within the limits shown in Results table 5 23 Repeat with the remaining frequencies shown in the table 4 Refer to Results table 5 24 on page 5 45 Repeat checks with AF GEN 2 5 19 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AF input tests Audio frequency meter This test confirms the accuracy of
149. du c ble d alimentation Si la prise d alimentation comporte deux bornes non polaris es il est possible de connecter le fusible au neutre Dans ce cas certaines parties de l appareil peuvent rester un certain potentiel m me apr s coupure du fusible N Risque li au feu Lors du remplacement des fusibles v rifiez l exactitude de leur type et de leur valeur Si le c ble d alimentation comporte une prise avec fusible int gr assurez vous que sa valeur est compatible avec les besoins en courant de l appareil Pour la consommation reportez vous au Chapitre 1 Sp cifications Danger produits toxiques Certains composants utilis s dans cet appareil peuvent contenir des r sines et d autres mati res qui d gagent des fum es toxiques lors de leur incin ration Les pr cautions d usages doivent donc tre prises lorsqu on se d barrasse de ce type de composant 1 Lithium Une pile au Lithium ou un CI contenant une pile au Lithium est utilis dans cet quipement Le Lithium est une substance toxique en cons quence on ne doit l craser l incin rer ou la jeter dans la poubelle Ne pas essayer de la recharger ne pas la court circuiter une forte d charge rapide risque de provoquer une surchauffe voire l explosion de celle ci Bronze au b ryllium Dans cet quipement certaines pi ces m caniques sont base de bronze au b ryllium Il s agit d un alliage dans lequel le pourcentage de b ryllium ne d passe pas 5
150. e e Performance checking following manufacture e Routine quality assurance testing e Workshop or field fault diagnosis etc The tests that need to be carried out will depend on the specification of the transmitter and the reason for testing however a generalized list would be Transmitter power Transmitter frequency RF distortion Spurious outputs Modulation characteristics Modulation frequency response Companding limiting Modulation distortion This Service Monitor will perform all of the above tests With the Tx TEST mode selected the screen and menu shown in fold out diagram 2 0 is displayed Using this screen and menu the Service Monitor is set up for transmitter testing and the test results displayed The sections of the monitor available for transmitter testing are The AF generators used to provide a modulating signal for the transmitter The audio tones generator Used to provide sequential tones for POCSAG and DCS systems The RF power meter The RF counter The modulation meter to measure the depth of amplitude modulation or the deviation of frequency modulation and to recover the modulating signal for other tests The demodulated output is fed to the audio amplifier and can therefore be monitored on the loudspeaker or on a headset connected to the accessory socket The SSB option allows Single Side Band modulation to be demodulated The oscilloscope to examine the wave form of the demodulated signal
151. e exact level If it is not possible to achieve this the limits will need to be calculated for the DVM reading obtained Results table 5 27 Oscilloscope accuracy LF generator UUT DVM DVM level mV RMS Volts div lower limit upper limit 21 2 10 mV div 424 20 mV div 106 50 mV div 212 100 mV div 424 200 mV div 1061 500 mV div 2121 1 V div 4242 2 Vidiv DC supply 20V 5 Vidiv 20V 10 V div 20V 20 V div 5 46 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 28 Oscilloscope LF generator UUT DVM DVM frequency timebase lower limit upper limit 50 ms div 50 us div 50 us div Results table 5 29 Distortion amp SINAD meter Distortion SINAD Lower set limit Results table 5 30 FM measurement versus carrier frequency 1 kHz rate Carrier Deviation AF filter Lower Upper frequency kHz limit kHz 1 limit kHz 1 MHz 0 3 to 3 4 0 3 to 3 4 0 3 to 3 4 Results table 5 31 FM measurement versus modulation rate Modulation AF filter Deviation Lower Upper rate kHz limit kHz limit kHz 300 Hz LP 15 kHz LP 50 kHz LP Results table 5 32 FM measurement versus deviation level 1 kHz rate Deviation IF bandwidth Lower Upper level limit kHz limit kHz 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz 300 kHz The upper and lower limits in Results table 5 30 Results table 5 31 and Results table 5 32 are calculated on the assumption that it was possible to set the exact level on the external Modulation meter If it is n
152. e switched OFF Check that the power meter indicates 21 dBm 4 dB Repeat step 3 for 100 MHz and then in 100 MHz steps up to and including 1000 MHz Attenuator accuracy The following test will confirm that the attenuator performs to the published performance specification In the event of the receiver not being available an alternative method to functionally test the attenuator is also suggested 1 Q G 4 5 UUT Measuring _ receiver 08 OUTPUT C6041 Fig 5 3 Attenuator accuracy test set up Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 3 Set the UUT to RF Gen LEVEL 21 dBm FREQ 2 5 MHz Tune the receiver to the frequency set on the UUT RF Generator and measure the RF level Decrement the output of the UUT in 10 dB steps down to an RF level of 121 dBm measuring the RF level at each step Repeat steps 2 to 4 for frequencies of 500 and 1000 MHz 5 8 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Alternative attenuator functional check Spectrum analyzer o Jo o o Lu UUT Bc see 0 0 cB 200008 y O O O En on E O QQ N on 22 N TYPE E OUTPUT C6042 Fig 5 4 Attenuator functional check 1 Connect the test
153. e AF SEQUENTIAL DECODER screen will be displayed A tone sequence fed into the AF input will be decoded and the results will be displayed Testing sequential tone receivers Using the encoder To test the operation of receivers using sequential tone signaling proceed as follows Rx TEST settings Select the receiver test mode by pressing the Rx TEST key Set the RF output frequency of the Service Monitor to that set on the receiver Ensure that the RF generator within the Service Monitor is in the OFF condition This should remain OFF until the Service Monitor and the receiver under test are set up and properly interconnected Make a suitable RF connection between one of the Service Monitor RF output connectors and the RF input connector of the receiver Set the RF output level from the Service Monitor to an appropriate setting Select the RF SEQUENTIAL TONES function by using the key sequence Tones Sequential The screen and menu shown in Fig 3 18 RF Sequential tones encoder display main menu will be displayed 3 71 LOCAL OPERATION RF SEQUENTIAL TONES ENCODER ene Po E Tone Tone Generate Mode Cont 5 Storred Extend Level Tone Tone Level 1 588kHz Decode Send Mode Freauencs Shift 6 Standard Tone Duration Extended Tone Duration Rever tu Tones CCIR SBi kHz 4 1 lzd kHz 5 1 amp 1 Y 1 3350k Hz c 2 2476kHz i9rHkHz Zr5akHz 6466k Hz Fig 3 18 RF Sequent
154. e RF signal generator set to provide depths of 20 50 80 and 95 Refer to Results table 5 39 on page 5 49 Select the Oscilloscope on the UUT Seta timebase of 500 us div and a vertical scale of 10 div Set the RF signal generator to provide 60 AM adjusting this level until the demodulated signal on the display occupies the full six divisions Check that the modulation indicated on the external Modulation meter is 60 10 Remove the splitter and Modulation meter and connect the RF signal generator directly to the UUT BNC input Refer to Results table 5 40 on page 5 49 Set RF signal generator to provide a signal of 100 MHz at 6 dBm with 30 depth at 1 kHz modulation rate On the UUT switch the oscilloscope off by selecting bar chart then select distortion measurement ON Check that the distortion reading on the UUT indicates less than 2 5 29 ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF frequency meter Specification Frequency range 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz Resolution 0 1 Hz 1 Hz or 10 Hz selectable Accuracy As frequency standard resolution Sensitivity autotuned 5 mW N type 0 05 mW antenna port Sensitivity manual tuned 34 dBm N type 60 dBm antenna port Test equipment RF signal 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz IFR 2965 or generator IFR 2041 RF power meter 0 1 dB from 10 MHz to 1 GHz IFR 6960 A B 6920 sensor UUT Signal generator
155. e connected switching on the instrument causes the cooling fan to operate and one of the test mode menus to be displayed Which screen is displayed depends on which store is selected as the Power Up From store HELP SETUP Setup Power Up From key sequence The low battery warning is activated when the voltage at the DC terminals falls to approximately 11 V If you are unfamiliar with the instrument a few minutes spent exploring the setup menus and test modes is helpful The following explanation of keys and menus will assist in this 3 9 LOCAL OPERATION Test mode screens and menus The five test modes are selected by pressing the appropriate MODE key These are light blue with dark blue lettering Item 16 in Fig 3 1 Front panel Select each in turn and observe the display presented Each area of six soft key labels forms a menu Various menus are called up as a result of selecting a change of test mode or by pressing a soft key within a test mode There are fold out diagrams at the end of this chapter that show the screens displayed when each of the mode keys is pressed These also show branching to the second or third level screens and menus A diagram of the screens accessed from the HELP SETUP key is also included These fold out diagrams are numbered to correlate with the associated key position as follows 1 0 HELP SETUP 2 0 Tx TEST 3 0 Rx TEST 4 0 Dx TEST 5 0 SPEC ANA 6 0 AF TEST References in t
156. e control It is also used for the serial output to a printer Connection details are given in Chapter 2 under Remote control connections RS232 3 8 LOCAL OPERATION Getting started Applying power and selecting test modes In normal operation the rear panel ON CHARGE switch is set to the ON position When the front panel SUPPLY switch is pushed in the instrument powers up from either an AC supply or a DC supply provided by the optional internal battery If both AC and DC supplies are connected the AC supply takes precedence A small trickle charge is also supplied to the DC supply Moving the rear panel ON CHARGE switch to the CHARGE position charges the internal battery If fitted Battery charging is indicated by the on charge LED flashing When the battery is fully charged the LED is illuminated continuously A discharged battery will be fully charged after 4 hours approximately No charging takes place when the instrument is on NOTE When new the Ni mH battery pack may exhibit reduced capacity and incomplete charging The pack should be given several charge discharge cycles to realize full capacity With the instrument on and running from AC or DC supplies 1f the supply disappears the battery will not take over This is to prevent accidental discharge of the battery pack To enable the battery the power switch must be returned to off left for 10 seconds and then turned on The center position is OFF With a power sourc
157. e oscilloscope to view and measure the demodulated signal or other waveforms The RF signal from the Service Monitor is coupled to the receiver and the demodulated signal from the receiver taken to the AF input of the Service Monitor By measuring the levels of the AF signal from the receiver the sensitivity of the receiver can be checked The distortion levels introduced by the receiver can be measured During all of the above procedures the RF levels the distortion levels and modulation levels can be displayed on bar charts as well as being provided as a digital read out The AF waveforms can also be studied using the digital oscilloscope facility 1 4 GENERAL INFORMATION Duplex testing Service Monitor MODULATED RF SIGNAL RF TEST FROM RADIO SIGNAL UNDER TEST gt lt DEMODULATED AF SIGNAL lt AF GENERATOR OUTPUT gt C6027 Fig 1 3 One port duplex test setup Service Monitor MODULATED RF TEST SIGNAL gt MODULATED RF SIGNAL Rx Tx Under DEMODULATED AF SIGNAL Test gt AF GENERATOR OUTPUT C6028 Fig 1 4 Two port duplex test setup Using the Duplex test facility parameters for transmitter testing and receiver testing can be set up and displayed on one screen This gives the capability to study the performance of duplex transceivers Both one port and two port units can be tested 1 5 GENERAL INFORMATION Spectrum an
158. e shall indemnify Aeroflex against all claims costs and damages incurred and that Aeroflex is given prompt written notice of such claim and given information reasonable assistance and sole authority to defend or settle such claim on behalf of the Licensee In the defence or settlement of any such claim Aeroflex may obtain for the Licensee the right to continue using the Licensed Software or replace it or modify it so that it becomes non infringing 8 2 Aeroflex shall not be liable if the alleged infringement 8 2 1 is based upon the use of the Licensed Software in combination with other software not furnished by Aeroflex or 8 2 2 is based upon the use of the Licensed Software alone or in combination with other software in equipment not functionally identical to the Designated Equipment or 8 2 3 arises as a result of Aeroflex having followed a properly authorised design or instruction of the Licensee or 8 2 4 arises out of the use of the Licensed Software in a country other than the one disclosed to Aeroflex as the intended country of use of the Licensed Software at the commencement of this Agreement 8 3 Aeroflex shall not be liable to the Licensee for any loss of use or for loss of profits or of contracts arising directly or indirectly out of any such infringement of patent registered design trademark or copyright 9 TERMINATION 9 Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary this Licence shall forthwith determine if the Licensee 9 1
159. e when the SEM legend is highlighted The FREQ ft and FREQ keys can be used to change the span setting when the EM legend is highlighted Each press of one of these keys will increase or decrease the span setting to the next point in the range 1 kHz 2 kHz 5 kHz 200 MHz 500 MHz 1 0 GHz The span setting is restricted by the Center Frequency setting as explained above 3 56 LOCAL OPERATION Start frequency Pressing the Start Freq key allows the required start point to be entered using the data entry keys The variable control is active when the legend is highlighted Note that when using the variable control the span of the display remains constant Therefore the stop frequency will follow any change to the start frequency This is not the case when entering a start frequency by using the data keys Stop frequency The Stop Freq key highlights the 8 legend under the graticule and allows a frequency value to be entered from the data keys The variable control is active when the 8 legend is highlighted Note that when using the variable control the span of the display remains constant Therefore the start frequency will follow any change to the stop frequency This is not the case when entering a stop frequency from the data keys Peak find Press the Peak Find key to set the marker to the highest level on the trace Resolution bandwidth The bandwidth of the spectrum analyzer acceptance circuits is sele
160. ected by this selection Audio Input Impedance Match The impedance selected by this key is used by the Service Monitor to calculate and display the measured voltage as a power in dBm Note that the impedance of the AF input remains high To obtain an accurate measurement the necessary terminating impedance must be added externally Audio Input Impedance This key is only active if the 600 Q interface option is fitted Pressing it will toggle between the 600 2 balanced input impedance or the standard high impedance The AF input connector on the front panel is used in either case Audio Output Impedance This key is also only active if the 600 interface option is fitted Pressing it will toggle between the 600 Q balanced output impedance or the standard low impedance The AF generator output connector on the front panel is used in either case 20 dB audio attenuator This key is also only active if the 600 Q interface option is fitted Repeated presses of it will insert or remove a 20 dB attenuator from the output circuit of the audio amplifiers With the attenuator in circuit the maximum output is limited to 400 mV The adjustment resolution is increased to 0 01 mV below 40 mV and to 0 1 mV from 40 mV to 400 mV 3 17 LOCAL OPERATION AF Distn SINAD S N Averages When distortion or SINAD tests are made to receivers using the Rx TEST mode or AF TEST mode the results displayed are obtained by averaging the results of a number
161. ed they cannot be retrieved 3 81 LOCAL OPERATION Rx test DTMF tones function In the Rx TEST mode with Tones Out set to iii the encoder output is fed to RF generator and the tones used to modulate the RF signal The DTMF decoder within the receiver under test can then be tested When setting up the Service Monitor to test the DTMF decoder of a receiver commence as for normal Rx tests When all settings are correct disable the modulation generators by using the key sequence Mod Gen Gen 1 Gen 2 OFF ON as appropriate then the RF generator by using the RF GEN LEVEL ON OFF key sequence Press the Tones key to display the screen shown in fold out diagram 3 5 The DTMF key will then give access to the RF DTMF ENCODER screen Formatting a tone sequence To create the required tone sequence first press the Enter Sequ key to display the cursor in the tone sequence panel Ifthe tone sequence panel is not empty use the DELETE key to clear the sequence Enter the required sequence by using any of the 16 available characters of the DTMF keypad Pressing the equivalent data key on the front panel will cause the character to be entered in the sequence panel The cursor then moves to the next position and a second character can be entered Any number of Null Tones can be included in a tone sequence A Null Tone is a silent period and has a duration of one tone period It is indicated in the tone sequence panel
162. ed as follows DEVIATION LEVEL RESIDUALVOLTAGE x RESIDUAL FM J2 MODVOLTAGE 18 Set the UUT RF Generator and the local oscillator to the frequencies shown in Results table 5 9 confirming that the residual FM indicated on the Modulation meter is within the limits shown in the right hand column 5 12 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Amplitude modulation Specification Carrier range 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz Resolution 1 Accuracy up to 85 AM 7 of setting 1 digit for modulation frequency 1 kHz Carrier frequency 1 5 to 10 of setting 1 digit for modulation frequencies of 50 Hz to 5 kHz 400 MHz 15 of setting 1 digit for modulation frequencies from 50 Hz to 15 kHz Distortion Less than 2 at 1 kHz for modulation depth 30 CCITT weighted Test equipment Modulation meter RF I P 500 kHz to 400 MHz AM Measurement IFR 2305 accuracy up to 85 depth 1 of reading at 1 kHz mod rate 2 5 of reading for mod rates from 50 Hz to 15 kHz Modulation meter E o o a BNC EE OUTPUT p cipum ga O RF INPUT C6046 Fig 5 8 Internal AM accuracy checks 1 Refer to Results table 5 10 on page 5 40 Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 8 BNC output socket on UUT 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 1 5 MHz Mod Gen Gen 2 FREQ 1 kHz
163. ed to that band pass filter irrespective of from what test mode it is accessed Logic Lines The optional Accessory Port on the rear panel allows the control of external devices by logic control from the instrument The use of this facility how to make connections to it and how to set up the switching is explained under Accessory port rear optional starting on page 3 94 The state of the logic lines are set from the Set up page accessed by pressing the Logic Lines soft key GPIB Address Pressing the GPIB Addr key allows a new GPIB address to be entered use the data input keys to enter the digits followed by the ENTER terminator key It may have a value between 1 and 30 Remote Control The Service Monitor can be operated by remote control using either the RS232 serial port or the optional GPIB IEEE 488 interface The Remote Control key toggles between the two options The active function is highlighted in inverse video Serial Setup The Serial Setup key gives access to the serial port setup menu The parameters that must be set for compatibility with other equipment connected to the port are Baud Rate Parity Bit Character Length Stop Bit and Handshaking Setting up of the serial port is described in the Chapter 4 of the Programming manual 46882 683 under Preparing the Service Monitor for remote operation Printer Setup A menu of printer type options and printer port selection is accessed through this key The op
164. eir base station by transmitting a code unique to the addressed transceiver for the duration of the transmission The principles and limitations of the system provide 104 uniquely identifiable codes for use on any one RF channel The coded signal consists of a repeating 23 bit word that has error correcting information and timing using 14 bits leaving nine bits available to carry address code The digital signal is formatted as a simple non return to zero NRZ signal which is used to directly modulate the transmitter On frequency shift modulating systems a 1 is usually made to increase the carrier frequency and a 0 to decrease the carrier frequency An Invert facility is included to reverse the polarity of the digital signal before it is applied to the modulator The most often used bit rate for generating the 23 bit code words and that which is specified in most standards is 134 bits s This allows the system to operate below the communications audio pass band See Signal routing and RF input attenuators starting on page 3 70 3 78 LOCAL OPERATION DCS receiver decoder testing To test the DCS decoder function of a mobile transceiver set up and connect the Service Monitor with the mobile as described in the Rx testing section earlier in this chapter Access the DCS facility within the RF tones mode by using the sequence Tones DCS The RF DCS Encoder screen and menu is displayed as shown in Fig 3 22 RF DCS ENC
165. emphasis ON OFF 300 Hz to AF filter 3 4 kHz 15 kHz LP Instruments can be set to 15 kHz or 300 kHz This also is irrespective of the spectrum analyzer resolution bandwidth selected The current setting is shown to the left of the display To change the setting first press the Listen IF BW key which will display 15 kHz and 300 kHz keys Press the appropriate key to select the required setting Switching to the Tx TEST mode after a signal has been located will allow the signal to be monitored with the IF bandwidth set to 300 Hz 3 0 kHz 30 kHz or 300 kHz 3 61 LOCAL OPERATION Resolution bandwidth selection The resolution bandwidth for the display can be selected from the following through the Res BW key Auto Res BW 3 kHz 30 kHz 300 kHz With automatic resolution bandwidth selected the resolution bandwidth is dependent on the sweep span as shown below Span Setting Resolution Bandwidth 1 MHz 500 kHz 200 kHz 100 kHz When operating in the Look and Listen mode some functions or options of SPEC ANA mode will be available to the user Reference to these is made on the display but their condition cannot be changed without returning to the main spectrum analyzer display These are Reference level dB div Video filter option Peak hold option Input sensitivity The input sensitivity of the Service Monitor in the Look and Listen mode is the same as for the normal spectrum analyzer input The reference
166. ent of responses to 00 Numeric only 1 beep differing function bit combinations 01 No message 2 beeps 10 No message 3 beeps 11 Alpha numeric 1 beep Addr Alert Tyre Message Tyre Addr Alert Tyre Message Tyre ype Addr Alert Tyre Message Tyre Addr Alert Type Message Tyre Address Alert Type messages are selected by repeatedly pressing the key 65649559 REESE fit CHA Numeric Message 6999 eu eso otote CHI Alert Only 859 C105 Alert Only orsono tbtt 9 C115 Text Messase C1883 Fig 3 25 Alternative address warning messages 3 86 LOCAL OPERATION Testing a radio pager Radio pagers are self contained units with no external antenna provision therefore it is not possible to make a direct RF connection between the Service Monitor and the pager The Service Monitor output can be taken from the BNC RF output connector using the telescopic antenna accessory part no 54421 001 or similar where suitable screening is available Alternatively a TEM cell may be preferable To configure the Service Monitor to make operational tests to a radio pager proceed as follows e Select the POCSAG option from the Rx TEST mode TONES function e Set the RF generator frequency to match the pager system operating frequency Press the RF Gen key to highlight the GEN FREQ legend on the display Enter the required frequency using the data input
167. ental conditions specified in Chapter 1 Performance data otherwise the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired This product is not approved for use in hazardous atmospheres or medical applications If the equipment is to be used in a safety related application e g avionics or military applications the suitability of the product must be assessed and approved for use by a competent person N Electrical hazards AC supply voltage Fuses This equipment conforms with IEC Safety Class I meaning that it is provided with a protective grounding lead To maintain this protection the supply lead must always be connected to the source of supply via a socket with a grounded contact Be aware that the supply filter contains capacitors that may remain charged after the equipment is disconnected from the supply Although the stored energy is within the approved safety requirements a slight shock may be felt if the plug pins are touched immediately after removal Do not remove instrument covers as this may result in personal injury There are no user serviceable parts inside Refer all servicing to qualified personnel See list of Service Centers at rear of manual Note that the internal supply fuse is in series with the live conductor of the supply lead If connection is made to a 2 pin unpolarized supply socket it is possible for the fuse to become transposed to the neutral conductor in which case parts of the equipment could rem
168. ents for these tests The minimum specifications for the test equipment listed at the start of each test description apply to that test only 5 4 ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF output tests Carrier frequency accuracy This check provides a conventional method of checking the signal generator frequency locking circuitry It will confirm correct operation of phase lock loop and dividers Overall accuracy is determined by the instrument s internal reference standard Specification Frequency range 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz Accuracy As frequency standard 1 count Resolution 10 Hz Test equipment Frequency 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz IFR 2440 or counter 1 Hz resolution external standard In Out E I P 25B Frequency counter BNC RF OUTPUT loza OF 500 LOAD i only when using A input A INPUT C6039 Fig 5 1 Carrier frequency accuracy 1 Refer to Results table 5 1 on page 5 36 Connect the BNC RF output socket on the UUT to the A input on the counter 2440 as shown in Fig 5 1 The connection to the A input should be made via a 50 Q load otherwise miscounting could occur 2 Lock the reference standards of the instruments together 3 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 400 kHz All modulation and noise measurements should be switched OFF 4 Set the counter to 1 Hz resolution 5 Check that the counter reads between 399 9
169. equipment as shown in Fig 5 4 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT N type output RF Gen LEVEL 27 dBm A INC 10 dB FREQ 251 MHz All modulation and noise measurements should be switched OFF 3 Tune the Spectrum analyzer to the signal from the UUT Using the UUT increment level down arrow key reduce the level of the UUT output in 10 dB steps down to 127 dBm At each 10 dB step ensure the level on the analyzer drops accordingly 5 9 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Spectral purity Harmonics spurious RF carrier leakage residual FM Specification Carrier range 400 kHz to 1 GHz Harmonics Better than 20 dBc Spurious signals Better than 30 dBc 10 kHz to 1 5 MHz offset from carrier frequency or over range 600 700 MHz Better than 40 dBc elsewhere Carrier leakage Less than 0 5 uV PD generated in a 50 Q load by a 2 turn 25 mm loop 25 mm from the case with output level less than 40 dBm and terminated in a sealed 50 load Residual FM Less than 15 Hz RMS 0 3 to 3 4 kHz up to 500 MHz Less than 20 Hz RMS 0 3 to 3 4 kHz up to 1000 MHz with OCXO Test equipment Spectrum 400 kHz to 3 GHz noise floor better than IFR 2383 analyzer 127 dBm at 500 MHz 50 sealed load 2 turn 25 mm loop Low noise FM Residual FM to be less than 2 Hz up to 1 GHz IFR 2305 demodulator IFR 2041 Spectrum analyzer
170. er meter 0 1 dB from 10 MHz to 1 GHz IFR 6960 A B 6912 and 6920 sensor Measuring receiver 21 dBm to 127 dBm 2 5 MHz to 1 GHz HP 8902A 11772A sensor Spectrum analyzer 400 kHz to 3 GHz noise floor lt 127 dBm IFR 2383 50 sealed load 2 turn 25 mm loop Low noise FM Residual FM to be less than 2 Hz up to 1 GHz IFR 2305 demodulator IFR 2041 Modulation meter RF I P 500 kHz to 1 05 GHz AM Measurement IFR 2305 accuracy up to 85 depth 1 of reading at 1 kHz mod rate 2 5 of reading for mod rates from 30 Hz to 50 kHz RF I P 500 kHz to 1 05 GHz FM Measurement accuracy 0 5 of reading 1 least significant changing digit at 1 kHz mod rate for deviation gt 5 kHz DVM 1 accuracy AC measurement 20 Hz to 50 kHz Solatron 7150 DC measurement to 1 mV Audio analyzer Capable of measuring distortion from 1 kHz to 15 kHz IFR 2965 HP down to 0 1 and AC measurement in a CCITT 8903B bandwidth LF generator 50 Hz to 50 kHz external frequency standard In Out IFR 2965 HP 30 mV to 5 V RMS 3325 RF signal generator 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz RF level accuracy 1 dB IFR 2041 AM depth 0 to 95 deviation O to 75 kHz Modulation rate 10 Hz to 15 kHz Power splitter 6 dB 50 Q 500 kHz to 1 GHz Weinschel 1870A DC PSU 0 to 50 V Calibrated power source Accuracy 3 596 up to 500 MHz 8 596 up to 1 GHz See broad band power test The minimum specifications for the test equipment listed above cover a requirem
171. er meter v o Pad ifi Power RF amplifier sensor SENSOR INPUT Fig 5 19 RF broad band power meter checks 5 34 C6054 1 Q G 4 a Q 3 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Set the calibrated power source to provide 100 MHz and 100 mW Press SELECT on the UUT to select N type input output 1 e both LEDs above the N type socket on Note the level on the UUT broad band power meter and check that it is within the stated specification Set the calibrated power source to provide 5 mW 7 dBm Note the level on the UUT broad band power meter and check that it 18 within the stated specification Press SELECT on the UUT to select N type input i e only the LED on Note the level on the UUT broad band power meter and check that it is within the stated specification Press SELECT on the UUT to select the antenna input socket and connect the calibrated power source to this Note the level on the UUT broad band power meter and check that it is within 15 functional check only The power meter sensor splitter and two pads associated with these items form the calibrated part of the source The attenuator pad values are dependent upon the gain of the amplifier used They should be chosen so that when the signal generator is set to its maximum output level the power arriving at the sensor is below 25 dBm i e not enough to damage the sensor If a calibrated power source is not available the UUT power measurement can be
172. erating Manual plus Maintenance Manual Serial cable 9 way female to 25 way male Serial cable 9 way female to 25 way female Serial cable 9 way female to 9 way female Chapter 2 INSTALLATION Contents Introductiob aci o a a tei 2 2 Initial visual inspection of new instruments 2 2 Venulatiornt TM 2 2 Operational case 46662 571 shoulder strap 2 3 Option siii dH HH EI E re nes 2 3 Power requiremehts aues ert RI UE ERR i e 2 3 USCS ne 2 3 Class I power cords 3 COrEC ss 2 4 Connecting to a DC supply and fitting batteries sse 2 6 RE and AF connections eec Roo PERS CHE REI 2 6 Accessory socket connections 2 7 Remote control connections 2 9 RS 2 9 2 10 Self tests and acceptance 2 11 Self tests eere e m ove oed eas 2 11 Using the Service Monitor ss 2 12 Routine maintenance nai aan 2 13 Ventilation fati laa 2 13 Routine safety testing and inspection 2 14 1 Visual inspection cecinere a Pe eerie He ER GR E ERE En 2 14 2 Earth bonding tests sise 2 14 3 2 Insul tionitests u PE its is 2 15 4 Restification ter PETRI ertet E a 2 15 Cleaning
173. eroflex vorgesehene Art und Weise verwendet werden kann die Schutzfunktion des Ger tes beeintr chtigt werden Aeroflex hat keinen Einfluf auf die Art der Verwendung und bernimmt keinerlei Verantwortung bei unsachgem sser Handhabung XV Precauzioni WARNING CAUTION Note Questi termini vengono utilizzati in questo manuale con significati specifici WARNING riportano informazioni atte ad evitare possibili pericoli alla persona CAUTION Note riportano informazioni per evitare possibili pericoli all apparec chiatura riportano importanti informazioni di carattere generale Simboli di pericolo Il significato del simbolo di pericolo riportato sugli strumenti e nella documentazione il seguente Simbolo Tipo di pericolo Fare riferimento al manuale operativo quando questo simbolo riportato sullo strumento Rendervi conto della natura del pericolo e delle precauzioni che dovrete prendere Tensione pericolosa Pericolo sostanze tossiche Superfici ad alta temperatura pP Condizioni generali d uso Questo prodotto stato progettato e collaudato per rispondere ai requisiti della direttiva IEC EN61010 1 2001 C1 2002 C2 2003 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use per apparati di classe I portatili e per l uso in un ambiente inquinato di grado 2 L apparato stato progettato per essere alimentato da un alimentatore di cate
174. ersorgung Klasse I oder II zugelassen Das Ger t sollte vor dem Eindringen von Fl ssigkeiten sowie vor Regen Schnee etc gesch tzt werden Bei Standort nderung von kalter in w rmere Umgebung sollte das Ger t wegen der Kondensation erst nach Anpassung an die w rmere Umgebung mit dem Netz verbunden werden Das Ger t darf nur in Umgebungsbedingungen wie in Kapitel 1 Leistungsdaten Performance data beschrieben betrieben werden ansonsten wird der vom Ger t vorgesehene Schutz des Anwenders beeintr chtigt Dieses Produkt ist nicht f r den Einsatz in gef hrlicher Umgebung z B Ex Bereich und f r medizinische Anwendungen gepr ft Sollte das Ger t f r den Einsatz in sicherheitsrelevanten Anwendungen wie z B im Flugverkehr oder bei militaerischen Anwendungen vorgesehen sein so ist dieser von einer f r diesen Bereich zust ndigen Person zu beurteilen und genehmigen xii A Elektrische Schlage Wechselspannungsversorgung Das Ger t entspricht IEC Sicherheitsklasse 1 mit einem Schutzleiter nach Erde Das Netzkabel muB stets an eine Steckdose mit Erdkontakt angeschlossen werden Filterkondensatoren in der internen Spannungsversorgung k nnen auch nach Unterbrechung der Spannungszuf hrung noch geladen sein Obwohl die darin gespeicherte Energie innerhalb der Sicherheitsmargen liegt kann ein leichter Spannungsschlag bei Ber hrung kurz nach der Unterbrechung erfolgen ffnen Sie niemals das Geh use der Ger te das dies zu ernsth
175. est muni d un connecteur m le angle droit type CEI83 standard C4 CEE 7 7 qui peut tre utilis dans une prise femelle ergot de terre standard C 3b ou clips lat raux standard C 2b cette derni re tant commun ment appel e prise Schuko allemande De la m me fa on que les autres connecteurs de type Schuko celui ci n est pas polaris lorsqu il s adapte une prise femelle Schuko Ce c ble d alimentation est homologu en Allemagne Autriche Belgique Finlande France Hollande Italie Norv ge et Su de A noter que ce connecteur n est pas compatible avec les prises de courant italiennes au standard CEI 23 16 Ce c ble ne doit pas tre utilis au Danemark cause du d faut de connexion de masse Deutsch Das kontinentaleurop ische Netzkabel ist mit einem rechtwinkeligen Stecker nach IEC83 C4 CEE7 7 Standard versehen welcher sowohl in Steckdosen mit Erde Stift Standard C 3b oder seitlichen Erdeklemmen im allgemeinen Schukosteckdose genannt pa t blicherweise ist der Schukostecker bei Verwendung in Schukosteckdosen nicht gepolt Dieses Netzkabel besitzt Zulassung f r Osterreich Belgien Finnland Frankreich Deutschland Holland Italien Norwegen und Schweden Hinweis Dieser Schukostecker pa t nicht in die italienischen Standardsteckdosen nach CEI 23 16 Norm Dieses Netzkabel sollte nicht in D nemark verwendet werden da hier keine Erdeverbindung hergestellt wird Espa ol El cable de al
176. evel measurements The signal to noise level is then calculated according to the formula 2 S N 20logdB 2 20log lI 2 dB The distortion measuring system within the Service Monitor has the capability to make all three measurements Pressing the Audio Meter key to change the soft keys as shown in fold out diagram 3 3 then pressing the Dist S N soft key accesses the distortion measurement menu shown in fold out diagram 3 3 2 The action of selecting a measurement system returns the TRANSMITTER TEST main top level menu to the display The result of the selected measurement will be displayed on a bar chart within the transmitter test screen and a digital read out given above it When no distortion measurement system is selected by pressing the Off key within the distortion measuring menu the distortion bar chart and digital read out are removed from the screen Hint By disabling this function the time taken to measure the remainder of the measurement functions is shortened thereby reducing the update time Measurements of SINAD and distortion percentage carried out by the monitor use a frequency of 1 kHz for the tests When either of these test methods is selected the system software sets the frequency of the modulation generator to this frequency to avoid erroneous results The input signal level influences the readings obtained by the distortion measuring system and is usually specified as part of the test specifi
177. f setting 1 digit Refer to Results table 5 14 on page 5 41 Reset Mod Gen 2 frequency to 1 kHz and level to 30 Set the Modulation meter to monitor AM in a 0 3 to 3 4 kHz bandwidth Connect the LF output from the Modulation meter to the AF input on the UUT Select the 0 3 to 3 4 kHz AF Filter on the UUT and select distortion measurement Check that the distortion indicated on the UUT display is less than 2 5 14 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Frequency modulation Specification Carrier range 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz Accuracyt 5 10 Hz at 1 kHz modulating frequency 10 for modulating frequencies from 50 Hz to 15 kHz Distortion Less than 1 at 1 kHz for deviation of 5 kHz CCITT Weighted T At low modulation levels the residual AM FM may become significant Test equipment Modulation meter RF I P 500 kHz to 1 05 GHz FM Measurement IFR 2305 accuracy 0 5 of reading 1 least significant changing digit at 1 kHz mod rate for deviation gt 5 kHz UUT Modulation meter Bo me E BNC EE OUTPUT O BO ES H oI 06 O O PF INPUT C6046 Fig 5 9 Internal FM accuracy checks 1 Refer to Results table 5 15 on page 5 42 Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 9 BNC output on UUT 2 Set the UUT to Rx TEST RF IN OUT SELECT BNC output RF Gen LEVEL 0 dBm FREQ 0
178. front panel rear panel and display unit modules The Service Monitor is microprocessor controlled and software driven Power supply CONTROL BOARD AC DC DC DC CONVERTER CONVERTER BATTERY CHARGER DC INPUT 11 to 32V 12 V Ni mH BATTERY PACK O ON CHARGE AC INPUT 90 to 264 V 45 to 440 Hz 24 V 24 V 12 V 5V 12V DC OUTPUT COOLING FAN C6038 Fig 4 1 Block diagram of power supply module The power supply module is a switched mode design which will operate from an AC supply of 90 to 265 V 45 Hz to 440 Hz or a DC supply of 11 to 32 V The circuits of the instrument require supplies of 100 mA output TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION The AC supply enters the instrument through a connector on the rear panel and passes through a fuse and supply on off switch The supply then enters the power supply module where it is fed to a bridge rectifier in the AC DC converter to produce an unregulated DC supply The voltage of this will depend on the supply voltage as the full range of AC input voltage is covered without range switching The second stage of the AC DC converter produces semi regulated DC supplies of 12 V or 24 V using a 60 kHz switched mode oscillator and transformer coupling This transformer also provides the safety isolation barrier The DC external or the DC supply from the AC DC converter is used to drive the DC DC converter The DC output circuits producin
179. g is changed will be stopped RF input attenuators The RF input circuits of the Service Monitor are auto ranging under most operating conditions When operating in some of the tones modes this can be a disadvantage as the tones decoders need to receive the leading burst of any transmission Therefore when TONES mode is selected the auto ranging function is disabled and the RF input sensitivity of the service monitor is set manually This is done by using the 2 and Y keys on the TONES selection screen For correct operation of the TONES decoders the input signal level should not exceed the level set Each key press will switch the sensitivity of the service monitor up or down by 10 dBm If the level of the applied signal is unknown it can be measured using the Tx TEST mode The Service Monitor RF Input Level can then be set above the measured level The following table shows the RF input level settings that are available for either of the RF input connectors RF Nin RF Antenna in Audio 56 0 30 0 dBm 46 0 dBm 20 0 dBm 36 0 dBm 10 0 26 0 dBm 00 0 dBm 16 0 dBm 10 0 dBm 6 0 dBm 20 0 4 0 dBm 30 0 dBm 14 0 dBm 40 0 dBm 24 0 dBm 50 0 dBm When using the AF INPUT connector for TONES operation the 2 and Y keys on the TONES selection screen set the AF input sensitivity The column headed Audio in the above table lists the AF input settings The AF input signal level should be less
180. g the Lock key locks the output level of the two modulation generators to the same level The unselected generator locks to the level of the selected generator 3 42 LOCAL OPERATION Pre emphasis filter The pre emphasis filter can be switched in or out of circuit after pressing the Mod Gen key Pressing the Pre emph key will toggle the pre emphasis filter into and out of circuit The time constant of the filter is 750 Us giving an increase with frequency of 6 dB octave The legend Pre emph ON is displayed when the filtering is in circuit No indication is given when the filtering 1s out of circuit External Modulation An external modulation source may be used to modulate the RF generator signal Pressing the Ext Mod key will display the external modulation input selection menu The options available are DC Ext Selects the EXT MOD IN connector on the rear of the instrument with DC coupling AC Ext Selects the EXT MOD IN connector on the rear of the instrument with AC coupling Mic Selects Microphone connected to the ACCESSORY socket on the front panel as the external modulation source The selection is shown on the display next to the Ext Level Source legend The frequency range for each input option is specified in the Performance data section of Chapter 1 The level of the external modulation signal should be 1 0 V rms This retains correlation of the modulation level indicated on the display with
181. g the four output supplies are each fed from an individual winding on the DC DC converter output transformer Regulation 1s applied to the DC DC converter from the output current and voltage sensing circuits Current monitoring to provide regulation is obtained from the three common return supplies and voltage monitoring from the 5 V supply The 36 V 1s generated by adding a 24 V floating supply onto the 12 V supply rail The floating 24 V supply has a voltage regulator configured within it A control circuit PCB contains the components for frequency control and regulation of both converters The on charge switch routes the output from the power supply to either power the instrument or charge the battery The display The display device is a color transflective TFT liquid crystal display module with an active viewing area 143 mm x 80 mm It comprises the display module a driver board and a cold cathode fluorescent tube CCFT backlight The viewing area is composed of a 1200 X 240 RGB dot matrix Each pixel is sequentially addressed with a 6 bit data bus to determine its color and intensity The display contrast is fixed but the brightness can be adjusted over a small range by varying the backlight drive This is achieved by generating a programmable voltage on the microprocessor board and feeding it to the backlight inverter mounted on the rear of the display module The inverter produces approximately 1500 V for the CCFT backlight I
182. ge to allow selection of modulation peak hold mode where the highest received level is displayed An inverse video red P in displayed near to power readings that are peak held This also applies when the instrument performs duplex testing Press More repeatedly to cycle through the three sub menus or Return to display the main Tx TEST menu 3 30 LOCAL OPERATION Audio generator setup Freq range 5 Hz to 33 kHz Level range 0 1 mV to 4 V rms Shape option Sine or square To set up the audio generators in order to modulate the transmitter press the Audio Gen key This will display the audio setup menu shown in fold out diagram 2 4 Set up the audio generator s for the required frequency and output level by using the soft keys and data input keys Gen 1 Gen 2 to select AF1 then FREQ n n kHz Hz LEVEL n n V mV dBm then Gen 1 Gen 2 to select AF2 if required dBm The FREQ 0 and 2 and the LEVEL and 3 keys can be assigned to AF generator frequency and level See Incremental adjustments which starts on page 3 67 Either or both generators can be switched off to suit the test requirement To disable a generator select it using the Gen 1 Gen 2 key to toggle between them When the title of the generator is highlighted on the display press the orange ON OFF function key Repeated presses of this key will toggle the ON OFF action The shape of each audio generator output waveform
183. ged into a Class II ungrounded 2 terminal socket outlet the cable should either be fitted with a 3 pin Class I plug and used in conjunction with an adapter incorporating a ground wire or be fitted with a Class II plug with an integral ground wire The ground wire must be securely fastened to ground Grounding one terminal on a 2 terminal socket will not provide adequate protection In the event that a molded plug has to be removed from a lead it must be disposed of immediately A plug with bare flexible cords is hazardous if engaged in a live socket outlet Power cords with the following terminations are available from Aeroflex Ltd Please check with your local sales office for availability This equipment is provided with a 3 wire grounded cordset which includes a molded IEC 60320 1 connector for connection to the equipment The cable must be fitted with an approved plug which when plugged into an appropriate 3 terminal socket outlet grounds the case of the equipment Failure to ground the equipment may expose the operator to hazardous voltage levels Depending upon the destination country the color coding of the wires will differ British IEC 60320 1 plug Aeroflex part number United Kingdom Straight through 23422 001 United Kingdom Right angled 23422 002 The UK lead is fitted with an ASTA approved molded plug to BS 1363 A replaceable 13 A fuse to BS 1362 is contained within the plug This fuse is only designed to pro
184. goria I o II Lo strumento deve essere protetto dal possibile ingresso di liquidi quali ad es acqua pioggia neve ecc Qualora lo strumento venga portato da un ambiente freddo ad uno caldo importante lasciare che la temperatura all interno dello strumento si stabilizzi prima di alimentarlo per evitare formazione di condense Lo strumento deve essere utilizzato esclusivamente nelle condizioni ambientali descritte nel capitolo 1 Performance data in caso contrario le protezioni previste nello strumento potrebbero risultare non sufficienti Questo prodotto non stato approvato per essere usato in ambienti pericolosi o applicazioni medicali Se lo strumento deve essere usato per applicazioni particolari collegate alla sicurezza per esempio applicazioni militari o avioniche occorre che una persona o un istituto competente ne certifichi l uso xvi N Pericoli da elettricit alimentazione c a Quest apparato provvisto del collegamento di protezione di terra e rispetta le norme di sicurezza classe 1 Per mantenere questa protezione necessario che il cavo la spina e la presa d alimentazione siano tutti provvisti di terra Il circuito d alimentazione contiene dei filtri i cui condensatori possono restare carichi anche dopo aver rimosso l alimentazione Sebbene l energia immagazzinata e entro 1 limiti di sicurezza purtuttavia una leggera scossa pu essere avvertita toccando i capi della spina subito dopo averla ri
185. h 3880 1500 1000 750 160 20 40 Audio Input Impedance HF Distri SINAD SH GEM 6000 Bal Averagest 4 mio ogg gt Imp dance Noise Samples x10 4 E Audio Attenuator El B6032 Test mode screen and menu 1 0 HELP SETUP with lower levels 3 97 LOCAL OPERATION TRANSMITTER TEST iH E 399 Gen ml OFFSET 83 532 rem POWER NO SIGNAL BB Tx Tn AF1 FREG 1 8BBBkHz M Frea Sin LEVEL 189 Am AF2 FREG 1 BBBBkHz Sin LEVEL 100 0 Off RxeTx z TEST MOD FREU B BHz Pk LEVEL GHz AA Hz Offset Increments Hz erm AFi FREQ iBBHz AF1 LEVEL 18 BmU IF FILTER 38kHz AF FILTER S88 to 3 4kHz TRANSMITTER TEST Broad 300 000000mHz Narrow BHz POWER 1 8dBm NB mu AF1 FREQ 1 0000kHz A 100 0mU Off o 100 200 300 1 0000kHz Sin LEVEL 188 0m Off 2 6999kHz Pk FM LEVEL 8 37kHz incrementa A KI AF1 FREQ 100Hz 0 2 4 6 8 10 AF1 LEVEL 10 0m4 IF FILTER 30kHz RF FILTEI 3 to 3 4kHz ON CHARGE TRANSMITTER TEST TX FREU 300 GOOGGAMHZ El E fon OFFSET 34 93kHz AF1 FREG 1 0090kHz POVERE HO RE BS Sin LEVEL 104 8mU AFZ FREQ 1 G0GGkHz Sin LEVEL 100 ort MOD FREQ 8 GHz TRANSMITTER TEST FM LEVEL Ghz Ts FREB 388 SEG888MHz Increments AF1 FREH 188Hz 10 zo OFFSET 3P 42kHz AF
186. he Governments of the United Kingdom and or the United State of America 12 NOTICES Any notice to be given by the Licensee to Aeroflex shall be addressed to Aeroflex International Limited Longacres House Six Hills Way Stevenage SG1 2AN UK 13 LAW AND JURISDICTION This Agreement shall be governed by the laws of England and shall be subject to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts This agreement constitutes the whole Contract between the parties and may be changed only by memorandum signed by both parties AEROFLEX INTERNATIONAL LTD 2004 48000 025 Issue 1 CHINA Beijing Tel 86 10 6539 1166 Fax 86 10 6539 1778 CHINA Shanghai Tel 86 21 5109 5128 Fax 86 21 5150 6112 FINLAND Tel 358 9 2709 5541 Fax 358 9 804 2441 FRANCE Tel 33 1 60 79 96 00 Fax 33 1 60 77 69 22 GERMANY Tel 49 8131 2926 0 Fax 49 8131 2926 130 HONG KONG Tel 852 2832 7988 Fax 4852 2834 5364 INDIA Tel 91 80 5115 4501 Fax 91 80 5115 4502 EROFLEX KOREA Tel 82 2 3424 2719 Fax 82 2 3424 8620 SCANDINAVIA Tel 45 9614 0045 Fax 45 9614 0047 SPAIN Tel 34 91 640 11 34 Fax 34 91 640 06 40 UK Burnham Tel 44 0 1628 604455 Fax 44 0 1628 662017 UK Stevenage Tel 44 0 1438 742200 Fax 44 0 1438 727601 Freephone 0800 282388 USA Tel 1 316 522 4981 Fax 1 316 522 1360 Toll Free 800 835 2352
187. he CTCSS function of the Service Monitor will generate a single AF tone selected from those listed on the display Output level The required output level of the tone signal can be set using the data entry keys after highlighting the legend ifm ewm by pressing the Tone Level key The units used to specify the output level will relate to the selected output routing and when RF output is selected the modulation method The modulation type is automatically set to be appropriate to the level terminator key used FM for Hz kHz or MHz AM for The valid output range for each output option is shown in the following table Output type Output range Default 0 99 0 75 kHz 100 uV 4 V Tone selection The required tone is selected from the table in the lower part of the display Press the Select Tone key to highlight the legend Me Use the data keys to enter the number of the required tone then press the ENTER key Tone frequency shift The frequency of the selected tone can be shifted by up to 10 Press the Freq Shift key to highlight the legend meem Si Use the data keys to enter the value of frequency shift required Only whole numbers within the above range are valid Complete the entry with the 96 key 3 76 LOCAL OPERATION Tone ON OFF control When the RF CTCSS ENCODER screen or the AF CTCSS ENCODER screen is displayed the tone is turned on or off by the orange ON OFF function key If the CTCSS
188. he Marker and Marker facility allows frequency and level measurements to be made to the signal displayed on the spectrum analyzer screen The Marker or 6 Marker readout is shown at the lower left of the display The RF level is given in dBm and the RF frequency in MHz KHz or Hz Pressing the Mkr mkr key toggles through the following actions e Displays marker line and marker readout e Selects Marker function and allows adjustment using the variable control e Selects Marker function and allows adjustment using the variable control e Removes marker line and marker readout from the display With Marker selected and the legend highlighted adjusting the variable control will move the marker line across the display The RF level and frequency of the signal at the intersection of the marker line and the displayed signal is shown by the marker readout With Marker selected and the legend highlighted adjusting the variable control will move the marker line across the display The marker readout shows the difference in RF level and frequency between the intersection of the marker line and the displayed signal and the intersection of the display center line and the displayed signal A negative frequency value indicates that the marker line is at a frequency lower than the frequency of the display center line Marker to reference Pressing the Marker to Ref key moves the marker line to the display center line e With the Marker functio
189. he data entry keys The entry must be terminated with the dBm terminator key 3 57 LOCAL OPERATION Vertical scale The vertical scale can be displayed with a range of 10 dB division or 2 dB division To select the vertical range press the Vert Scale key which will cause the menu shown in fold out diagram 5 2 to be displayed Repeated presses of the 10 dB 2 dB key will toggle the options with the current choice being shown in the display The LEVEL and keys adjust the reference level in either 2 dB or 10 dB steps depending on the setting of the reference level vertical range Video filter A video bandwidth filter can be switched into the display path to reduce the visible noise To set the state of this first press the Vert Scale key Alternate presses of the Video Filter key will set the Video filter ON or OFF The filter frequency is selected automatically to provide optimum performance for the selected resolution bandwidth Peak hold The spectrum analyzer mode has a peak hold facility When set ON this facility displays the highest received signal level at each frequency point of the display Signals of a lower level will not over write the display signals of a higher level will over write previously recorded signals To set the state of the peak hold facility first press the Vert Scale key Alternate presses of the Peak Hold key will set the facility ON or OFF Markers Marker and 6 Marker T
190. he level of the wanted signal The frequency of the Interfering signal should be slowly swept over a range of 1 to 10 MHz either side of the wanted signal frequency and the SINAD level observed for any significant variation If any interaction is found adjust the frequency of the interfering signal for maximum reaction Vary the level of the interfering signal until the SINAD level is 14 dB and note the RF level This is the blocking level of the receiver for the frequency concerned Spurious response The two types of spurious response measurements normally carried out on a receiver are image frequency rejection and IF rejection For a specific receiver type the frequency of the image signal of a wanted signal is twice the receiver intermediate frequency above the wanted frequency if the receiver local oscillator runs at a frequency above the wanted signal or twice the receiver intermediate frequency below the wanted frequency if the receiver local oscillator runs at a frequency below the wanted signal See Fig 3 10 Spurious response Image Frequency location For a 10 7 MHz Intermediate Frequency Local oscillator running Local oscillator running above tuned frequency below tuned frequency 885 7 MHz 864 3 MHz LOCAL OSCILLATOR LOCAL OSCILLATOR 875 MHz 896 4 MHz 853 6 MHz 875 MHz TUNED FREQUENCY IMAGE FREQUENCY IMAGE FREQUENCY TUNED FREQUENCY 5 O 15 O j Frequency Frequency
191. he manual to specific screens on the fold out diagrams is given as in the following example Fold out diagram 2 3 3 This is the screen shown after pressing the Tx TEST mode key then the Mod Meter key third key down followed by the AF Filter key third key down Where there are keys on both sides of a screen keys 1 to 6 are on the left keys 7 to 12 on the right To move to the top level menu of any test mode including the currently active mode press the relevant MODE key For detailed use of specific TEST MODES see the section later in this chapter relating to that test mode 3 10 LOCAL OPERATION HELP SETUP Pressing the HELP SETUP key at any time will display the screen shown in fold out diagram 1 0 or a variation of it Displaying the HELP SETUP screen does not interrupt any ongoing operation or test The center panel of the screen lists the following information Serial number of the Service Monitor Software fitted with the version codes and part numbers Help The help facility is accessed by using the HELP key Each soft key in the help menu displays On Screen Help relating to the blue system key to the left of it The Return key removes the on screen help and displays the top level screen of the mode from where HELP SETUP was selected Self Test Pressing this key gives access to the SELF TEST function of the Service Monitor Refer to Self tests and acceptance tests in Chapter 2 for deta
192. heck that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 7 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the Modulation meter 5 26 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 14 Set the RF signal generator modulation rate to 10 kHz and the UUT AF Filter to 50 kHz LP Check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 7 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the Modulation meter 15 Refer to Results table 5 32 on page 5 47 On the UUT select an AF filter of 0 3 to 3 4 kHz and an IF filter of 3 kHz 16 Set the external Modulation meter bandwidth to 50 Hz to 15 kHz 17 Set the RF signal generator modulation rate to 1 kHz and set 250 Hz deviation 18 Check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the Modulation meter 19 On the UUT select an IF filter of 30 kHz Set the RF signal generator to provide a deviation of 10 kHz and check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the Modulation meter 20 On the UUT select an IF filter of 300 kHz Set the RF signal generator to provide a deviation of 50 kHz and check that the deviation level indicated on the UUT is within 5 UUT resolution of the deviation indicated on the Modulation meter Repeat at 75 kHz 21 Refer to Results table 5 33 on page 5 48 Select the UUT demodulation oscilloscope by pressing Return Scope Bar Scope Using the
193. highlighted under the spectrum analyzer graticule on the display The corresponding datum will also be displayed Thus START FREQ and STOP FREQ will appear together and SPAN and CENTRE FREQ will appear together Center frequency Span Pressing the Centre Freq key highlights the legend MATA under the graticule and allows the entry of any frequency within the spectrum analyzer RF range This frequency will then be the center frequency on the graticule If a figure is entered which would result in the lowest frequency of the span becoming a negative value the span is reduced so as to set the span start to zero The variable control is active when the ERE legend is highlighted It will not adjust the center frequency to a figure below half of the set span frequency range The FREQ 1 and FREQ 5 keys can be used to change the center frequency when the en legend is highlighted Each press of one of these keys will increment the center frequency by the value last set up in the TX TEST mode Pressing the Span key highlights the legend SEEM under the graticule and allows the entry of any frequency within the spectrum analyzer RF range This frequency will then be the frequency range covered by the frequency sweep If the frequency entered conflicts with the center frequency by requiring a bottom frequency below zero or an upper frequency that is outside the spectrum analyzer RF range the span will be restricted The variable control is activ
194. hing and broad band power meter block diagram The N type connector which is also used as an output for receiver testing has a 20 dB power attenuator 20 dB between it and the input output switching circuits The RF signal from the transmitter under test can be within the frequency range of 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz A 10 dB attenuator pad can be switched into the transmitter test RF path by the instrument software Broad band power meter A proportion of the signal is fed directly to the broad band power meter circuits The RF signal is passed through a diode detector and the resultant DC signal integrated with a similar signal derived from a 25 kHz signal from board B2 As the integration is carried out using the inverting and non inverting inputs of an operational amplifier a stable condition will result when the two inputs are of the same value The output from the integrator is used as a control signal for an AGC amplifier acting on the 25 kHz signal with the output from the AGC amplifier supplying the integrator The loop will therefore remain stable with the AGC amplifier output voltage exactly equaling the voltage of the RF input to the detector This voltage 15 taken to the voltmeter ranging circuits on the AF Analyzer Board B1 and then to the AF voltmeter circuit on the microprocessor board 4 9 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Overload detection An overload detection circuit is activated if power in excess of 1 0 W is applied to the B
195. his has a minimum range of 10 dB with a maximum range of 20 dB at certain selected points of the output range The facility is enabled and set from the AF Setup page page 3 17 Modulation The RF signal generated for receiver testing can be modulated using either or both of the AF generators or by an external source Modulation type The modulation type is automatically set to be appropriate to the level terminator key used FM for Hz kHz or MHz AM for 3 41 LOCAL OPERATION Modulation generators Set up one or both of the modulation generators for the required frequency level and shape by using the soft keys and data input keys When these and the de emphasis filter are set to the required settings press the Return key to restore the RECEIVER TEST menu Modulation frequency and level The frequency range and level must not exceed the following limits Modulating freq range 20 Hz to 20 kHz AM depth range 0 to 99 total sum of active modulation sources FM deviation range 0 to 75 kHz total sum of active modulation sources To enable or set up the modulation generators press the Mod Gen key The screen and menu shown in fold out diagram 4 2 will be displayed Set up the modulation generator s for the required frequency and output level by using the soft keys and data input keys Gen 1 Gen 2 to select MODI then FREQ n n kHz Hz LEVEL n n KHz Hz then Gen 1 Gen 2 to select MOD if requ
196. http www avionteg com IFR Aeroflex 2944B Communications Service M onitor aspx AvionTEq SE ESE SSE SSE SSE g5 Test with full trust EROFLEX COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE MONITOR 2944B Operating Manual Document part no 46892 744 Issue 1 20 March 2006 COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE MONITOR 2944B O Aeroflex International Ltd 2006 No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying or recorded by any information storage or retrieval system without permission in writing by Aeroflex International Ltd hereafter referred to throughout the document as Aeroflex Printed in the UK Document part no 46892 744 PDF version Based on Issue 1 of the printed manual 20 March 2006 About this manual This manual explains how to use the Communications Service Monitor 2944B It applies to instruments fitted with main software version 5 xx or later and cellular software version 5 xx Intended audience People who need to test mobile radio systems and associated equipment Structure Chapter 1 General information and performance specification Chapter 2 Gives installation instructions including connection of peripheral equipment Chapter 3 Operating instructions Setting up and use Chapter 4 Brief technical description Chapter 5 Acceptance testing procedure for the Service Monitor Document conventions The follow
197. i LEVEL 18 8m POWER HO SIGNAL BB 12090832 IF FILTER 3BkHz Bm o 4 4 P Pod AF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz Return 1 GGGGk Hz Sim LEVEL 166 6m Off MOD FRE FM LEVEL _ TRANSMITTER TEST TRANSHITTER TEST _ AFi FREQ 196Hz 10 0 TM FREQ 300 OGGGGAMHZ Gd EE EN OFFSET 87 166 Pem o AFi LEVEL 16 ml OFFSET SO 45k Hz POWER NO SIGNAL BE POWER HO SIGNAL BB AF1 FREQ 1 8BBBkHz co sl 1 8BB8BkHz Sin LEVEL 180 FEE 4 Sin LEVEL 188 BmU IF FILTER Z8kHz AF FILTER 5 5 to 3 4kHz i AF2 FREQ 1 GAGOKHZ E EMITE Late e Sin LEVEL 198 804 in Bm HOD FREQ 8 GHz MOD FREQ B on Pk FM LEVEL BHz LEUEL GHz Las ue um iz neremente AFI FREQ 190Hz AFL FREQ 18BHz 10 20 AFL LEVEL 18 Bm AFL LEVEL 16 IF FILTER 3BkHz IF FILTER ZOkHz AF FILTER 9 3 to S 4kHz AF FILTER 388 to 3 4kHz TRANSMITTER TEST TRANSMITTER TEST TX FREQ 328 BBBABBMHZ 3BB 999988MHz sen 32 660kHz d En OFFSET 0 002 erm POWER 26 1d8n BB POWER NO SIGHAL BB u MH n AF1 FREQ 3B BBBkHz FEM AAA AF1 FREQ 158 BHz EE Sin LEVEL 188 BmU E W Uf Sin LEVEL 3 2584 AF2 FREQ 1 BBBBkHz RF2 FREG 1 8888kHz pes Sin LEVEL 190 800 Off Sin LEVEL 198 800 Off MOD FREB 1 9707kHz MOD FRER 9 GHz Pk FM LEVEL S 1d8r 13 58 Pk FM LEVEL GHz
198. ial tones encoder display main menu Setting the Tones mode The display is divided into three areas e At the bottom of the display is a table listing the frequencies allocated to the 15 tones 0 to E Above the table is shown the system type i e CCIR ZVEI etc e At the top of the display is a panel in which the tone sequence to be transmitted is assembled or edited e The center of the display shows information relating to the parameters of the system Check that the system type shown above the frequency table is the same as the system type on which the receiver to be tested operates If this is not correct press the Select Std key to display the SELECT TONES STANDARD screen and menu as shown in Fig 3 19 Sequential tones standard selection menu RF SEQUENTIAL TONES ENCODER SELECT TONE STANDARD Fresuenca Shift 6 Standard Tone Duration 166ms Extended Tone Duration 00 CCIR Sai kHz 4 1 355BkHz lzd kHz 5 1 amp 1 ri rdrakHz 2 24r6kHz AO kHz Return 36 GHz 1978kHz 278k Hz 3 3 a b 1 1 2 6486k Hz 3 B3266 Fig 3 19 RF Sequential tones standard selection menu Select the correct system standard by pressing the appropriate key The frequency allocation table will change to relate to the selected standard and the settings of the tone duration parameters will also change to the correct values for the system Return to the main sequential tones men
199. ication of 5 mW Lower levels of input signal are indicated as voltage levels the first bar chart graduation being at 20 uV The maximum continuous power rating of the antenna BNC connector is 5 W A power overload condition is indicated by an audible and visual warning Should this condition be indicated immediately reduce the level of RF power from the transmitter into the Service Monitor Do not stop the warning by switching off the Service Monitor as this will silence the warning but will leave the excessive RF power connected to the internal load Do not attempt to stop the warning by disconnecting the RF connector as this can damage the transmitter and may cause electric shock or skin burns 3 32 LOCAL OPERATION Hot surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is applied for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive With the monitor in the Tx TEST mode and the transmitter connected to the monitor as described above key up the transmitter The RF power bar chart gives an analog representation of the active power meter reading A digital read out of the power is displayed above the bar chart The options available for the digital read out from the power meter are dBm Watts or Volts The bar chart can be auto ranging or manually selected See Bar charts on page 3 19 External attenuators can be included in
200. ice Monitor the selection of the following parameters are selected from the RECEIVER TEST screen Audio filters Pre emphasis filtering Selection of distortion measuring methods 3 38 LOCAL OPERATION Connections AF VOLTMETER AF FILTERS DISTORTION gt METER RF 20dB GENERATOR ATTENUATOR gt COUNTER RF OUT SERVICE MONITOR ancy N AF I ALTERNATIVE CONNECTIONS 9 si Rx UNDER TEST C3374 Fig 3 8 Receiver test connections Before making any connections between the Service Monitor and the receiver ensure that the RF generator of the Service Monitor is OFF With the Rx TEST mode selected press RF Gen key to highlight the legend Pressing the orange ON OFF function key will change the state of the RF generator 9188 is shown adjacent to the indicated generator frequency when the RF generator 1s disabled The RF generator settings can be changed with the generator ON or OFF 3 39 LOCAL OPERATION When testing the receiver section of a transceiver ensure that the power output of the transmitter section will not exceed the power handling capability of the connector on the Service Monitor Also ensure that the transceiver cannot be switched to TRANSMIT inadvertently The receiver and the Service Monitor should be connected as shown in Fig 3 8 Receiver test connections The block diagram of the Service Monitor shows the signal r
201. ies must be within the range 100 V to 240 V at a frequency of between 50 Hz and 60 Hz or within the range 108 V to 118 V at a frequency of between 50 Hz and 400 Hz The maximum power consumption is 190 VA Voltage selection is not necessary as the AC power supply module within the Service Monitor is designed to handle this wide spread of input variations For DC operation the Service Monitor requires a supply within the range 11 V to 32 V The maximum DC power requirement is 100 W The AC input circuit is fed through a single fuse fitted to the rear panel of the Service Monitor within the AC input connector This should be a T2AL250V fuse The DC input circuit is also fed through a single fuse This is fitted within the fuseholder adjacent to the DC input connector This should be a TIOAH250V fuse 2 3 INSTALLATION Class power cords 3 core Disconnecting device The detachable power cord is the instruments disconnecting device but if the instrument is integrated into a rack or system an external power switch or circuit breaker may be required Whatever the disconnecting device make sure that you can reach it easily and that it is accessible at all times General The instrument is a Safety Class 1 product and therefore must be earthed Use the supplied power cord or an appropriate replacement Make sure that the instrument is plugged into an outlet socket with a protective earth contact When the equipment has to be plug
202. ilable The alert message generated by radio pagers can be selected from four formats The selection is controlled by two function bits within the transmitted address codeword The Service Monitor displays a representation of the audible alert message shows the relevant function bit combination and describes the type of message that is transmitted after the particular alert message See Fig 3 25 Alternative address warning messages The Service Monitor has 7 different inbuilt messages which can be sent to the radio pager These messages are selected by repeated presses of the Select Message key The selected message is shown in a panel on the display with the legend Mess 1 or Mess 2 etc The bit rate of the transmitted test signal can be set by the user within the limits 400 Hz to 4 8 kHz The default bit rate is the standard system bit rate of 512 Hz The generated data can be transmitted with normal or inverted polarity 3 85 LOCAL OPERATION The radio identification code RIC of the radio pager is set by the user This is entered into the Service Monitor as a seven digit decimal number corresponding to the 21 bit address code of the radio pager The number is unique to the radio pager and will have a maximum decimal equivalent of 2097151 Note Leading zero can be omitted from the entry of RIC to save time Function Bit Following Alerting Combination Message Type Tones Table showing one possible arrangem
203. ils Diagnostic The DIAGNOSTIC screen can only be accessed by entering a protection code When accessed it allows a low level of software fault diagnosis to be undertaken Certain areas of memory can also be reset from this screen Details of access are given in the maintenance manual relating to this instrument Calibrate Access to the CALIBRATION screen is also code protected Details relating to access and use are given in the maintenance manual relating to this instrument Backlight This key is the ON OFF control for the display backlight Brightness Selecting this key allows the illumination level of the display backlight to be varied using the variable control The illumination level can also be adjusted by the entering a number between 0 and 255 using the data input keys Options Fitted Shows which options are fitted to the Service Monitor except Option 3 Setup RF Setup Press this key to allow selection of RF generator facilities options the description starts on page 3 15 RF setup is shown in fold out diagram 1 10 2 The keys described may differ if some options are fitted See the descriptions relating to those options for details AF Setup Press this key to allow selection of AF level measurement units GPIB address setting remote control option selection and serial port setup the description starts on page 3 17 AF setup is shown in fold out diagram 1 10 3 The keys described may differ if some options are
204. imentaci n tipo Europeo Continental dispone de una clavija C4 normalizada IEC83 CEE 7 7 que permite su utilizaci n tanto en bases de enchufe con toma de tierra macho tipo 3b o con toma de tierra mediante contactos laterales tipo C 2b que en este ltimo caso suele denominarse Schuko Al igual que cualquier otra clavija tipo Schuko las conexiones a red no est n polarizadas cuando se conectan a una base tipo Schuko El cable lleva autorizaci n para su uso en Austria B lgica Finlandia Francia Alemania Holanda Italia Noruega y Suecia Observe que este cable no se adapta a la norma italiana CEI 23 16 El cable no debe utilizarse en Dinamarca en el caso de no efectuarse conexi n a tierra Italiano I cavi d alimentazione per l Europa continentale vengono forniti terminati con una spina ad angolo retto del tipo C4 secondo lo standard IEC83 CEE 7 7 che pu essere usato in prese in cui la terra pu essere fornita o tramite connettore maschio C 3b o tramite clips laterali C 2b quest ultima comunemente detta di tipo tedesca Schuko Questa spina quando collegata ad una presa Schuko non polarizzata Il cavo pu essere usato in Austria Belgio Finlandia Francia Germania Olanda Norvegia Svezia ed Italia E da notare che per l Italia questo non risponde allo standard CEI 23 16 Questa spina non dovrebbe invece essere usata in Danimarca in quanto non realizza il collegamento di terra 2 5 INSTALLATION
205. ing conventions apply throughout this manual Tx TEST Hard key titles are shown verbatim using normal lettering in square brackets Tx freq Soft key titles are shown verbatim using italic lettering in square brackets RF IN OUT Titles on the instrument panels are shown verbatim using capital letters Text displayed on screen See below References to text displayed on the screen of the Service Monitor are given verbatim using a font that resembles the displayed text e g GEN FREQ Ref Level KAMENZ Associated publications Other manuals that cover specific aspects of this service monitor are e Programming Manual 46882 683 provides programming information for remote control of the Service Monitor using MI BASIC and GPIB Service Manual 46880 118 comprising Operating Manual 46882 744 and Maintenance Manual 46882 745 provides servicing information for the Communications Service Monitor 2944B Contents PR CAUTIONS M Chapter 1 GENERAL 1 1 Chapter 2 INSTALLATION recare 2 1 Chapter 3 LOCAL OPERATION 3 1 Chapter 4 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION occccccocccononnnononnnncnnocnnocnocanocnnoonaconconanoonnonn non sts senses stes sensns 4 1 Chapter 5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING 2 22022000200200020000000000000200n000n00nn00nne0n
206. ing tones signals in other test modes The effect of any tones signaling on transmitters or receivers under test can be studied using any test mode of the Service Monitor When a test mode is selected either by pressing the Tx TEST key Rx TEST key etc or by pressing the Return key while any tones signal is running continuously CTCSS or DCS Tones On Sequential or DTMF continuous mode Sending the tones will continue to be generated See the Tones ON OFF control section of each specific tones description 3 69 LOCAL OPERATION Signal routing The tones sub mode can be entered from either Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST or AF TEST modes The encoded signal produced by the Service Monitor can be routed to the equipment under test in two ways e As a modulated RF signal from either of the RF output connectors e Asan AF signal from the AF GEN OUT connector Similarly an encoded signal produced by the equipment under test can be routed to the Service Monitor in two ways e Asa modulated RF signal to either of the RF input connectors e Asan AF signal to the AF INPUT connector The input and output routing settings are made from the TONES selection screen Pressing the Tones In or Tones Out key alternates the setting between BB and MMS The selected settings will be retained until reset either manually or by recalling instrument settings Any tone sequence or continuous tone that is running when an input or output routing settin
207. ion Ce produit n est pas garanti pour fonctionner dans des atmosph res dangereuses ou pour un usage m dical Si l quipement doit tre utilis pour des applications en relation avec la s curit par exemple des applications militaires ou a ronautiques la compatibilit du produit doit tre tablie et approuv e par une personne comp tente viii S curit lectrique tension d alimentation alternative Cet appareil est prot g conform ment la norme CEI de s curit Classe 1 c est dire que sa prise secteur comporte un fil de protection la terre Pour maintenir cette protection le c ble d alimentation doit toujours tre branch la source d alimentation par l interm diaire d une prise comportant une borne de terre Notez que les filtres d alimentation contiennent des condensateurs qui peuvent encore tre charg s lorsque l appareil est d branch Bien que l nergie contenue soit conforme aux exigences de s curit 1l est possible de ressentir un l ger choc si l on touche les bornes sit t apr s d branchement Ne d montez pas le capot de l instrument car ceci peut provoquer des blessures Il n y a pas de pi ces remplacables par l utilisateur l int rieur Faites effectuer toute r paration par du personnel qualifi Contacter un des Centres de Maintenance Internationaux dans la liste jointe la fin du manuel Fusibles Notez que le fusible d alimentation interne est en s rie avec la phase
208. ion from the unit under test Press the Mod Meter key The soft keys change to the demod soft keys shown in fold out diagram 2 3 Modulation Type The Service Monitor can demodulate AM and FM signals The demodulated signal is made available at the DEMOD OUT connector on the rear of the instrument SSB signals can be demodulated if the SSB option is fitted The AM FM key or AM FM SSB key is used to select the appropriate modulation type by sequential key presses The MOD LEVEL indication within the main display becomes suffixed by for AM and by MHz or kHz for FM When SSB has been selected no modulation level is shown either digitally or as a bar chart Selecting the modulation type for Tx TEST does not change the current modulation type set on the Service Monitor RF generator SSB Input sensitivity No RF carrier signal is produced by SSB transmitters Therefore the automatic gain control circuits of the Service Monitor cannot respond to these signals When SSB demodulation has been selected the RF sensitivity of the Service Monitor can be controlled manually Three sensitivity settings are given as soft key choices high medium and low The approximate sensitivities of these are shown in the following table High Sens 90 dBm to 30 dBm at N type 110 dBm to 50 dBm at Antenna Med Sens 30 dBm to 20 dBm at N Type 50 dBm to 0 dBm at Antenna Low Sens 20 dBm to 50 dBm at N
209. ion sise 5 15 AF output 5 A io ve 5 17 Audio generator output level ee LAI LIRA 5 17 Audio generator distortion idee ette ee 5 18 Audio generator frequency miii ak 5 19 AE anputtestecs Soo IA SD eme PHIL M MH T MEN dere lo 5 20 Audio frequency e toe ae nee aa en e ite DU s 5 20 Audio voltineter t 5 21 Audio oscilloscope at 5 23 AF distortion amp SINAD meter ss 5 24 RE Inp btests ns ae EB IRA ier ur sse Mure Mtis cat 5 25 Modulation analyzer FM eene 5 25 Modulation analyzer AM sise 5 28 RE frequency meter 5 30 RF spectrum analyzer eroest tete tiere etait RH I e ens 5 32 RF broad band power meter ses 5 34 Acceptance Test Results Tables secs sccssesssssveseessesvosdeosesenssennesssessoscsosvosdeasessossconess 5 36 5 1 List of figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 5 6 5 9 5 10 5 11 5 12 5 13 5 14 5 15 5 16 5 17 5 18 5 19 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Carrier frequency accuracy nono ener enne ennt nnne nennen 5 5 RF l vel rire adeant RE An a nie 5 7 Attenuator accuracy test set Up ses 5 6 Attenuator functional check ocio e ai tele 5 9 Carrier harmonics amp spurious check 5 10 RF carrier leakage check 5 11 Residual LEM
210. ipment Do not attempt to open disassemble or mutilate the battery pack The battery pack does not contain any user serviceable components and cannot be repaired Under abnormal conditions the battery pack can explode leak or catch fire if exposed to high temperatures fire or if it is opened or disassembled Do not short circuit the battery pack terminals This battery pack contains an absorbed CORROSIVE potassium hydroxide electrolyte which can cause burns to the eyes and skin and nickel hydroxide which is HARMFUL if inhaled or if it comes into contact with the skin resulting in possible sensitization of the affected area In all cases rinse the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical advice Use protective gloves when handling a damaged battery If the battery has leaked or vented it must be replaced immediately Replace only with an identical battery from the same manufacturer or with a type recommended by Aeroflex Remove the instrument power lead before removing the battery pack The battery pack contains a smart charge management system and must only be charged using the charging facilities in the equipment or by using an approved battery charger European legislation EC Directive 91 689 EEC classifies Ni MH batteries as hazardous waste due to the nickel content Collect spent batteries separately for disposal do not mix with other waste streams Contact your local battery supplier for up to date information on the collec
211. ired Hz Frequency and level increment The FREQ and and the LEVEL and 5 keys can be assigned to the modulation generator frequency and level See ncremental adjustments which starts on page 3 67 Modulation generator state Either or both generators can be switched off to suit the test requirement To disable a generator first select it using the Gen 1 Gen 2 key Repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key will disable or enable the selected generator Note that the modulation generators are also used as AF generators to provide a modulation source in the Tx TEST mode If both AF generators are set to ON in the Tx TEST mode switching to Rx TEST mode will show both modulation generators to be OFF Either or both generators can be set up and turned on within the Rx TEST mode The frequency level and shape settings of their last use in the Rx TEST mode will be retained within the Rx TEST mode setup These settings will be effective when the generators are switched to ON in the Rx TEST mode Their use as audio generators in the Tx TEST mode will then be disabled Modulation generator shape The shape of the output waveform from each modulation generator can be set to either sine or square wave To change the output waveform from a generator first select it using the Gen 1 Gen 2 key Repeated presses of the Shape key will toggle between sine or square wave Modulation generator level locking Pressin
212. isconnect the external reference from the UUT and connect an external reference with an accuracy of 1 part in 10 or better to the RF signal generator 5 30 9 10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Refer to Results table 5 43 on page 5 50 Set the RF signal generator to provide a frequency of 1000 MHz at a level of 0 dBm Check that the UUT indicates a frequency between 999 999500 MHz and 1000 000500 MHz If the instrument is fitted with option 3 the high stability OCXO internal frequency standard check that the reading falls between the limits 999 999750 and 1000 000250 The test limits in this step are for guidance and assume that the internal frequency standard has been recently adjusted Ageing and stability have to be considered when establishing the real test limits 5 31 ACCEPTANCE TESTING RF spectrum analyzer Specification Frequency range 100 kHz to 1 0 GHz Resolution bandwidth 300 Hz 3 30 300 kHz 3 MHz Display dynamic range 80 dB Noise floor Typically 75 dB below top of screen On screen linearity Typically 2 dB resolution 10 dB div 10 dB above the noise floor Resolution 0 1 dB on 2 dB division 0 5 dB on 10 dB division Level flatness 1 dB resolution over 50 MHz span Test equipment RF signal 100 kHz to 1 GHz Level accuracy 0 85 dB IFR 2041 1 Q 3 4 5 6 generator RF power meter 0 1 dB from 10 MHz to 1 GHz IFR 6960 A B 6912 sensor UUT Signal generator
213. itor from the mains supply and from any DC supply Remove any other connections to the Service Monitor Failing to disconnect the power source before removing the filter could result in the fan becoming switched on accidentally Stand the Service Monitor face down on a firm non scratch flat surface so that it is supported on the front handles The rear of the Service Monitor with the fan housing should be at a safe and accessible working height Remove the two M4 screws holding the fan filter to the rear of the Service Monitor and lift the filter away Take the filter to a suitably ventilated location and remove as much dust and other foreign matter as is practical Do not wet or wash the filter Refit the filter to the Service Monitor using the reverse procedure as appropriate If the filter is damaged or blocked a replacement is available as part no 35907 675 If the bail arm carrying handle has been fitted this should be positioned over the top of the Service Monitor before standing the instrument face down supported on the front bumpers 2 13 INSTALLATION Routine safety testing and inspection 1 Visual In the UK the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 section 4 2 places a requirement on the users of equipment to maintain it in a safe condition The explanatory notes call for regular inspections and tests together with a need to keep records The following electrical tests and inspection information is
214. ivity will be given in the form Sensitivity 12 dB SINAD 0 25 uv Or Sensitivity 20 dB SINAD 1 0 uV EMF Or 12 dB minimum SINAD for 0 31 uV pd signal input at 60 of maximum system deviation and 1 kHz modulation The test method for each of the above sensitivity specifications varies but the common features are that each requires a signal of accurately defined level modulation frequency and modulation level to be injected into the receiver the AF output level referenced the modulation or a portion of it to be removed and the audio level re referenced To carry out each of these tests using Service Monitor proceed as follows 12 dB SINAD sensitivity This test determines the level of the modulated RF signal at which the SINAD measurement is 12 dB The level of modulation is given as part of the test specification The standard modulation frequency is 1 kHz As the RF signal level is reduced the noise component of the AF output will become proportionally greater This will result in the SINAD dB reading becoming closer to zero To use this Service Monitor to make a 12 dB SINAD sensitivity test the Service Monitor is set up to make a SINAD distortion measurement and the RF level progressively reduced until the SINAD level reads 12 dB The RF level of the signal generator will equal the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity level of the receiver For a GO NO GO test the monitor is set up in the same manner as above The RF
215. kHz AF FILTER 8 3 to 3 4kHz RF FILTER 388 3 4kHz Return AF FILTER 8 3 to Z 4kHz AFL FREQ 1 GGGGkHZ RF FILTER 300 3 4kHz AF1 FREQ 1 0000kHz COUPLING AC Sin LEVEL 1868 amu Off COUPLING AC Sin LEVEL 100 0mU nr RECEIVER E DUPLEX TRANSMITTER Filter gt Ts FREQ 300 BOBBBOMHz 1B88 BdBm DFFSET B84 566 Fem Dist ER 1 BBBBkHz POWER NO SIGHAL BB 1 8 El i ZEN Sin LEVEL 1 5 ote f 1 1 i 5 Audio Pk AUDIO FREG B Hz MOD FREG 9 BHz LEWU m FM LEVEL Hz 29 RECEIVER il DUPLEX TRAMSMITTER E a m os ah 300 00060MHz TX FREQ 300 0AAAAOMHZ 18B8 BdEm OFFSET 3H 388kHz IF FILTER kHz POWERS SIGHAL BB 1 D000kHz RF FILTER 300 3 4kH Lisez off AF1 FREQ 1 6088kHz Sim LEVEL 100 MOD FREG B Hz Pk FM LEVEL GHz e mu Al kHz amp amp i RECEIUER il DUPLEX TRANSMITTER GEN FREH 309 BABAAMHZ TX FREQ 389 BBAAAAMHZ LEVEL 188 8dBm OFFSET 38 298kHz MODI FREQ 1 88GOkHz ly DOVER SIGNAL ER IF FILTER 3BkHz Sar LEVEL 1 588kHz Off G i 4 3 s HF FILTER 388 X 4kHz MOD FREG GHz Fk LEVEL GHz b sag 3 4kHz HF1 FREQ 1 6 amp BGBkHz Al AC
216. kHz AF filter and the 30 kHz IF filter 33 On the UUT switch distortion measurement ON and check that the distortion reading indicates less than 2 34 Set the UUT to Tx FREQ 300 MHz and set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 300 MHz with 5 kHz deviation at 1 KHz modulation rate The 2041 should be set to low noise mode 35 Note the voltage reading on the DVM connected to the DEMOD OUT socket of the UUT Reading 1 36 Switch the RF signal generator modulation off and note the reading on the DVM Reading 2 37 Calculate the residual FM as shown below and check that it indicates 35 Hz or less functional check only Reading 2 Reading 1 X 5000 5 27 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Modulation analyzer AM Specification Frequency range Modulation frequency range AM depth range Resolution Accuracy see Note 1 Demodulation distortion 1 Residual AM Note 1 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz 10 Hz to 15 kHz 0 to 99 manually tuned 0 to 90 below 100 MHz 0 to 80 from 100 to 400 MHz 1 AM 5 of reading 1 digit at 1 kHz 8 5 of reading 1 digit from 50 Hz to 10 kHz Less than 2 at 1 kHz amp 30 AM CCITT weighted Less than 196 0 3 to 3 4 kHz 1 At low modulation levels the residual AM FM may become significant Test equipment RF signal generator 500 kHz to 1 GHz AM depth 0 to 95 Modulation IFR 2041 rate 30 Hz to 15 kHz Modulation meter RF I P 500 kHz to 1 G
217. l printer port option 3 93 List of tables Table 3 1 Parallel printer port connections ss 3 93 Table 3 2 Rear accessory port connections 3 95 LOCAL OPERATION List of figures Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig Fig 321 Front panel tasten O Ei TE ALME 3 4 3 2 Typical displayS see 3 5 3 3 Rear panel layout with optional GPIB fitted 3 8 3 4 AF Filter HELP SETUP page en nennen nnne etre ne ren 3 12 3 5 Relationship of measurement and number of samples 3 18 3 6 Transmitter test connections 3 24 3 7 Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements 3 36 3 8 Receiver test connections nennen nono none nennen entente enne 3 39 EA E ee 3 0 3 10 Spurious response Image Frequency location nennen 3 51 3 11 One port duplex test setup ss 3 53 3 12 Alternative two port duplex SEetups nenne 3 54 3 13 Spectrum analyzer test setup iii 3 55 3 14 Spectrum analyzer test setup using the tracking generator ses 3 55 3 15 Spectrum Analyzer setup Look and Listen function sss 3 60 3 16 Audio test Setup sise 3 63 3 17 Tones selection screen and Tones mode receiver input level setting
218. l under the data input keys is used to make adjustments to frequencies and levels that require a finite change such as when matching a test signal to an undefined signal or assessing the squelch operating level of a receiver It has no mechanical stops This control is also used to select items or digits from displayed lists in conjunction with the TONES modes Audio connections AF GEN OUT socket The signal available at this BNC socket is the combined output from both or either of the AF generators and or the tones generator AF INPUT socket Signals fed into this BNC socket can be measured using the AF counter the AF voltmeter and the distortion measuring circuits It is also the input for the digital oscilloscope ACCESSORY socket Used for connecting accessories whose presence is automatically detected Also used for direct connection of a headset allowing modulation of the signal generator by a microphone and audio signal monitoring through headphones When using the accessory microphone with PTT switch automatic switching between Tx and Rx modes using the PTT switch is possible 3 6 LOCAL OPERATION DISPLAY HOLD key To the left of the variable control is the DISPLAY HOLD key Pressing this key at any time will freeze the display and prevent any adjustment to parameters displayed on the screen The soft key menu changes to show two keys Store and Print The Store key gives access to the STORE RECALL screen and menu
219. leichen Herstellers oder mit einem Typ wie er von Aeroflex empfohlen wird Stecken Sie vor dem Entfernen des Akkusatzes das Netzkabel aus Der Akkusatz enth lt eine spezielles Lade berwachungsschaltung und darf nur mit der Ladeeinrichtung des zugeh rigen Ger tes oder einem passenden Ladeger t geladen werden Die Europ ische Gesetzgebung EC Richtline 91 689 EEC stuft Ni MH Akkus wegen ihres Anteils an Nickel als gef hrlichen Abfall ein Sammeln Sie verbrauchte Akkus getrennt und mischen Sie diese nicht mit anderem Abfall Fragen Sie den in Ihrem Land zust ndigen Hersteller bez glich Sammlung Entsorgung und Wiederaufarbeitung von verbrauchten Akkus A Hei e Oberfl che Vorsicht bei Ber hrung der HF Eingangsbuchse Typ N nach Einspeisen hoher Dauerleistung Falls ber l ngere Zeit 50 Watt berschritten wird kann die Temperatur der Buchse ber Normal steigen N Hochfrequenz Bei Messung von hohen Stehwellenverh ltnissen k nnen sich auf der Leitung gef hrliche Spannungen aufbauen In solchen F llen darf das Ger t nicht bei ge ffnetem Geh use betrieben werden xiv N Schr gstellung Bei Schr gstellung des Ger ts sollten aus Stabilit tsgr nden keine anderen Ger te darauf gestellt werden CAUTION Eignung f r Gebrauch Dieses Ger t wurde von Aeroflex entwickelt und hergestellt um HF Signale geringer Leistung zum Test von Kommunikationseinrichtungen zu erzeugen Sollte das Ger t nicht auf die von A
220. levant The resolution of the RF generator frequency entry is 1 Hz but it is not necessary to enter every digit down to the least significant place The entry is completed by pressing a terminator key Using the MHz kHz or Hz key causes the entered frequency to be displayed according to normal convention The following examples explain further Pressing 1 2 5 MHz will display 125 000000 MHz 1 2 5 kHz v 125 000 kHz 1 2 5 0 kHz 1 250000 MHz 1 2 5 MHz 1 250000 MHz 1 2 5 0 0 0 1 Hz 1 250001 MHz Variable control With the legend highlighted the GEN FREQ parameter can be adjusted by using the variable control Frequency increment The FREQ f and keys can be assigned to RF generator frequency adjustment See Incremental adjustments which starts on page 3 67 3 40 LOCAL OPERATION Output level setting N Type connector 135 dBm to 15 dBm 0 04 mV to 40 mV pd BNC connector 115 dBm to 5 dBm 0 4 mV to 400 mV pd with uncalibrated overrange to 7 dBm Hot surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is applied for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive The signal generator output level is set using the data keys It can be defined in dBm with the dBm terminator key by voltage level with the V mV or uV terminator key
221. level can be set using the data input keys or adjusted using the variable control The LEVEL and 0 keys adjust the reference level in either 2 dB or 10 dB steps depending on the setting of the reference level vertical range Making measurements The monitor can be used to determine the frequency of a transmission and to identify the modulation type and content of asymmetric transmissions When the transmission to be examined Is visible on the display adjust the center frequency line on the display to coincide with the peak of the signal This will be the carrier frequency and will be shown as a digital readout Progressively reduce the span and optimize the filtering and demodulation method while listening to the demodulated output As the span is reduced the center frequency may need optimizing The peak level of the signal can be determined by reference to the RF level scale on the display The top of the graticule represents the reference set on the display Each division of the graticule represents either 10 dB or 2 dB as set in the vertical scale setup menu of the main SPEC ANA mode 3 62 LOCAL OPERATION AF test audio frequency testing Overview GEN lt A Y SERVICE AF AF Y out IN IU 0 Y IN e 5 OUT AMPLIFIER UNDER TEST C3380 Fig 3 16 Audio test setup To enter the AF TEST mode press the blue AF TEST key This will cause the screen and menu shown in fold
222. level is set to the specified sensitivity level and the SINAD distortion level observed A reading higher than 12 dB would indicate GO while a reading of less than 12 dB i e closer to zero would indicate NO GO 3 47 LOCAL OPERATION 20 dB weighted SINAD sensitivity This test is very similar to the 12 dB SINAD sensitivity test The differences are firstly that the SINAD level specified is 20 dB and secondly that a psophometric weighting filter is included in the test path This filter imposes a frequency response characteristic to the signal similar to that of the human ear response There are two specifications of filter in common use One is the European standard CCITT and the other is the American C MESS The specification of the receiver will state the correct filter to select The Service Monitor can have a filter meeting one of these specifications fitted as an option The test procedure is identical to that for 12 dB SINAD sensitivity except that the SINAD distortion pass level is 20 dB 20 dB signal to noise sensitivity This test determines the level of RF carrier which when unmodulated will produce an AF output level due only to receiver noise 20 dB below the AF level produced when modulated at the specified level and at the specified frequency As the RF signal level is reduced the noise component of the AF signal will become proportionally greater This will result in the Signal to Noise dB reading becoming closer
223. low impedance output which is fed to the loudspeaker It is also fed to the ACCESSORY connector on the front panel A 90 MHz reference oscillator on A9 1 provides the local oscillator signal for this mixer It also provides a 90 MHz reference for the 90 MHz voltage controlled swept oscillator on A10 AF test mode The AF TEST mode requires a signal source to apply to the circuit or equipment under test and a measuring facility to analyze the resultant output signal The signal source is provided by the audio generators as for the Tx TEST mode and the AF measuring circuits configured as for the Rx TEST mode The RF generator and IF local oscillators are disabled The power metering and modulation metering functions are also disabled 4 15 Contents Chapter 5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING TA A valina 5 3 Results tables ici acts 5 3 Before starting ii A Inga nern 5 3 IS A epis e m IRA scq 5 4 RE QUIPULtests s C E 5 5 Carrier frequency accuracy eme d ede eite RC I dete e Quee A n ee ee 5 5 RE output level ii yet een aeta A 5 7 ALG linearity cie ete e Up ee e RE T Ee heri dens 5 8 BNCoutputimode 2 echo eee det dee eret indi etta 5 8 JAttenuatot accuracy E ees ei ds debitos 5 8 Alternative attenuator functional check 5 9 Spectral purity RI RR QNM ceu 5 10 Harmonics spurious RF carrier leakage residual FM 5 10 Amplitude modulation ss 5 13 Frequency modulat
224. lue of the fundamental signal the values of any distortion products generated and the value of any noise present A notch filter tuned to the frequency of the input signal is then placed in the output signal path and the level again measured and noted The second measurement comprises only the values of any distortion products generated and the value of any noise present See page 3 36 Fig 3 7 a b amp c Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements 3 36 LOCAL OPERATION The SINAD level is then calculated according to the formula Y SINAD 20log dB V S N D B 20log N D To obtain the distortion factor of a signal at the output of a transmitter the output level is measured and noted as for SINAD level measurement A notch filter as used for SINAD measurement is used to make a second reading which comprises the same values as for the second SINAD measurement The distortion factor is then calculated according to the formula Distortion 1002 1 D S N D 0 For signal to noise level measurements a reading is taken of the output level as for SINAD level and distortion factor measurements The AF input signal is then disabled and a second level reading taken A notch filter is not included in the signal output path The second measurement only comprises the value of any noise present on the demodulated signal See page 3 36 Fig 3 7 a amp d Distortion level and signal to noise l
225. m it is routed through an AF amplifier to the internal loudspeaker to the accessory socket and to the demod out socket See Fig 3 15 Spectrum Analyzer setup Look and Listen function 3 60 LOCAL OPERATION Setting up Pressing the Look amp Listen key from the SPECTRUM ANALYZER menu selects this option The menu shown in fold out diagram 5 6 is displayed Center Freq and Span setting When operating in the Look amp Listen mode the spectrum display is defined only by the Centre Freq and Span settings The center frequency is set by selecting the Centre Freq key to highlight the legend ENT at the bottom of the display and then entering a value using the data input keys Fine adjustment can be made using the variable control when the 1 legend is displayed as above With an input signal displayed adjusting the center frequency will allow the listen detector to be tuned to an observed signal The Span setting controls the sweep range covered by the spectrum analyzer When in the Look and Listen mode the sweep span is selected from the Span menu accessible by pressing the Span key Four span widths are available as listed below 500 kHz 200 kHz 100 kHz Demod settings The listen demodulator and its associated circuits are set to extract the information from the signal tuned to the center frequency of the display The following options are available through the Demod key Modulation type AM FM De
226. modulator is fed to the AF amplifier as in Tx test mode However as the AF measuring circuits are continually switching functions when in Dx TEST mode the output from the loudspeaker or headset is discontinuous 3 53 LOCAL OPERATION D SERVICE MONITOR AF 20dB VOLT AF RF RF ANTENNA AF OUT BNC OUT N IN l IN Y A fe Y MM 5 AF AF IN OUT TRANSCEIVER UNDER TEST Y SERVICE SERVICE Y A MONITOR MONITOR 20dB 20dB ATTEN ATTEN RF RF RF RF BNC OUT N IN ANTENNA BNC OUT IN ANTENNA Y A Y RF RF RF RF OUT IN OUT IN C3377 Fig 3 12 Alternative two port duplex setups 3 54 LOCAL OPERATION Spectrum analyzer See Fig 3 13 Spectrum analyzer test setup and Fig 3 14 Spectrum analyzer test setup using the tracking generator SERVICE MONITOR OSCILLO SCOPE INPUT RECEIVER RF OUTPUT SWITCHING CIRCUIT DETECTOR LOG AMPLIFIER 2 N TYPE ANTENNA RF GENERATOR UNDER TEST C3378 Fig 3 13 Spectrum analyzer test setup SERVICE MONITOR OFFSET CONTROL OSCILLO SCOPE INPUT RECEIVER RF CIRCUIT DETECTOR LOG TRACKING 1 AMPLIFIER GEN BNC WTYPE RF OUT RFIN RF OUT FREQUENCY SHIFTING UNIT UNDER TEST C3379 Fig 3 14 Spectrum analyzer test setup using the tracking generator 3 55 Overview LOCAL OPERATION
227. mossa Non rimuovete mai le coperture perch cos potreste provocare danni a voi stessi Non vi sono all interno parti di interesse all utilizzatore Tutte gli interventi sono di competenza del personale qualificato Vedi elenco internazionale dei Centri di Assistenza in fondo al manuale Fusibili Notare che un fusibile posto sul filo caldo del cavo di alimentazione Qualora l alimentazione avvenga tramite due poli non polarizzati possibile che il fusibile vada a protezione del neutro per cui anche in caso di una sua rottura l apparato potrebbe restare sotto tensione N Pericolo d incendio Assicurarsi che in caso di sostituzione vengano utilizzati solo fusibili della portata e del tipo prescritti Se viene usata una spina con fusibili assicurarsi che questi siano di portata adeguata coi requisiti di alimentazione richiesti dallo strumento Tali requisiti sono riportati nel cap 1 Performance data Pericolo sostanze tossiche Alcuni dei componenti usati in questo strumento possono contenere resine o altri materiali che se bruciati possono emettere fumi tossici Prendere quindi le opportune precauzioni nell uso di tali parti Litio Quest apparato incorpora una batteria al litio o un circuito integrato contenente una batteria al litio Poich il litio una sostanza tossica la batteria non deve essere mai n rotta n incenerita n gettata tra i normali rifiuti Questo tipo di batteria non pu esse
228. n Accuracy Attenuator Hold Facility Reverse Power Protection Output Impedance VSWR N Type VSWR BNC Spectral Purity Residual FM Harmonics Spurious signals SSB phase noise 20 kHz offset RF carrier leakage 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz 10 Hz 10 digit display Keyboard entry delta increment decrement function and rotary control As frequency standard N Type socket 141 dBm to 21 dBm BNC socket 115 dBm to 5 dBm usable to 7 dBm 0 1 dB 4 digits plus sign dBm dBuV uV mV PD EMF 2 dB for level above 127 dBm on N Type socket up to 1 GHz Allows user to define start point for seamless generator operation across a range of up to 20 dB guaranteed 10 dB minimum N Type 50 W for 10 minutes normal operation 150 W for 1 minute at 20 68 F Overload indicated by audible and visual warning BNC 5 W Tripping indicated by audible and visual warning Nominally 50 Better than 1 2 1 up to 500 MHz Better than 1 35 1 up to 1 05 GHz Better than 2 2 1 up to 1 05 GHz Less than 15 Hz RMS 0 3 to 3 4 kHz up to 500 MHz Less than 20 Hz RMS 0 3 to 3 4 kHz up to 1000 MHz with OCXO Better than 20 dBc Better than 30 dBc 10 kHz to 1 5 MHz offset from carrier frequency or over range 600 700 MHz Better than 40 dBc from 400 kHz to 1 GHz Better than 95 dBc Hz up to 1 GHz Less than 0 5 uV PD generated in a 50 Q load by a 2 turn loop 25 mm from the case Output level less than 40 dBm i
229. n and Factory Preset settings respectively cannot have their protection removed or be deleted Titling store locations Store locations can be titled from either the STORE RECALL screen and menu or the DISPLAY HOLD STORE screen and menu Titles can be up to 20 characters long including any spaces Press the Enter Title key The inverse video message Title Store No will be displayed Key in the address of the store location to be titled The soft key menu will change to show the following keys 2 3 Enter Char Title Complet and Return A line of letters digits and symbols is shown at the bottom of the display An inverse video cursor which can be controlled using the variable control highlights a selected character on the line A similar cursor is shown in the title area of the location address The selected Character is entered into the title area of the location address list by pressing the Enter Char key Subsequent characters are entered in the same way Errors can be corrected by using the or keys to place the cursor over the incorrect character and then inserting the correct character When the title is complete press the Title Complet key The normal STORE RECALL screen or DISPLAY HOLD STORE screen will be displayed A title can be changed or corrected at any time using the titling procedure Error messages There are a number of error messages associated with the store facility whi
230. n active the marker readout will display the RF level and frequency of the signal at the intersection of the display center line and the displayed signal e With the 0 Marker function active the marker readout will display 0 dBm and 0 Hz until the marker line is repositioned 3 58 LOCAL OPERATION Tracking generator facility Note The tracking generator facility uses the RF generator of the Service Monitor to provide a tracking signal source This allows the spectrum analyzer to show the frequency response of frequency dependent circuits such as filters The frequency response of any circuit connected between the tracking generator output and the spectrum analyzer input will be displayed When making calculations relating to frequency response results take into account the impedance matching between the circuit and the Service Monitor See performance specification The frequency offset facility adds to the above capability by allowing tests to be made to frequency shifting circuits The tracking generator s sweep may be positively or negatively offset with respect to the spectrum analyzer s output The sum of the offset and the frequency analyzer span cannot produce a figure beyond the frequency range of the RF generator see performance specification Under these circumstances the Service Monitor selects an appropriate span Because the RF generator is used as the tracking generator control is required over both m
231. n be set up in the Off condition and enabled by the above procedure when all connections and setting are complete To select and set up the audio generators press the Audio Gen key This will display the audio setup menu shown in fold out diagram 6 2 Repeated presses of the Gen1 Gen2 key will highlight the and Ma legends in turn to indicate the selected generator Set up the audio generator s for the required frequency and output level by using the soft keys and data input keys Gen 1 Gen 2 to select AF1 then FREQ n n KHz Hz LEVEL n n V mV dBm then Gen 1 Gen 2 to select GEN if required dBm The FREQ 1 and X and the LEVEL and 2 keys can be assigned to AF generator frequency and level See Incremental adjustments which starts on page 3 67 The shape of each audio generator output waveform can be either sine or square wave This is controlled by first selecting the audio generator as for On Off control above then pressing the SHAPE key to toggle between the options Input level measurement The measured level of signals applied to the AF INPUT connector can be displayed in volts dBm dBV or mW The selection is made from the AF Setup page as described under Audio Level Measured in on page 3 17 When the input level is displayed in dBm or mW the signal is assumed to be measured across the impedance selected on the Audio Input Impedance Match selection made from the AF Setup page See A
232. n high ambient light conditions the backlight can be switched off to conserve battery power 4 3 A11 1 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION BROADBAND SEE DETAILED POWER METER BLOCK DIAGRAM n 1359 3 MHz aso 79 3 MHz om 10 7 MHz 10 625 MHz SSB MIXER d MIXER MIXER A11 1 A2 A3 A3 AAA 41 41 AAA AAA so INPUT Do X X X INPUT OUTPUT NO NU Xu NL SWITCHING 0 60dB X X X RL X LOG 20dB Y TO SQUELCH TO ON SYSTEMS 2409 3 MHz 1280 MHz ONLY PRESENT BOARD B3 1 WHEN SSB A7 A8 A9 1 10 OPTION FITTED SSB DEMOD 3RD LOCAL rar 10 MHz gt 10 MHz OSCILLATOR Ope ome i 20dB REF REF bs la 0 100dB 0 2 1 15 LOCAL 2ND LOCAL OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR i 1 A6 1 A6 1 A10 10 MHz i 400 kHz 1 05 GHz MODULATOR 0 Y SQUELCH 1 50dB i 1 DUPLEX ONLY PRESENT i RF OUTPUT LEVEL CONTROL OSCILLATOR WHEN SYSTEMS 8 MODULATION 1280 1 LOOK amp LISTEN OPTION FITTED B1 2 A13 1 A14 1 SWEEP INPUT A9 1 B3 1 2 FM MODULATION INPUT END FOCAL DEMOD AF ae EXTERNAL gt MODULATION 10 MHz OSCILLATOR SYSTEMS MODULATION CONTROLLER REF 90 MHz REF Y INPUT gt OSCILLATOR te LOOK amp LISTEN A 10 MHz lt SEE FIG MODULATION FROM DETAILED E MODULATION SYSTEMS BOARD B3 1 gt OUTPUT TO BLOCK OUTPUT DIAGRAM MODULATION CONTROLLER B1 2 Y LOOK amp LISTEN 10 7 MHz 20
233. n in Dx TEST mode Modulation distortion dB dB lt Filter Response Distortion Products Signal gt 1 Frequency mE Distortion Products Noise 1 kHz 1 kHz ES Frequency N Frequency C1640 Fig 3 7 Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements The signal containing the information being communicated will become distorted during its progress through the system This distortion may be very slight and almost unnoticeable to the ear or it may be so severe as to cause the information to become unintelligible The reasons for this distortion to the signal are the non linearity of the amplifiers and modulators in the system and noise within the circuits becoming attached to the signal By applying a sinewave signal of known purity to the input of the system and measuring the distortion and noise levels of the demodulated signal obtained at the output of the system evaluation of the quality of the transmitter is possible The three measurements used for this evaluation are SINAD level distortion percentage and signal to noise ratio The procedures described below are carried out repeatedly under the instruction of the instrument software and the displayed results are continually updated To obtain the SINAD level of a signal at the output of a transmitter the output level is measured and noted The signal measured comprises the va
234. n los ojos y en la piel as como hidr xido de N quel que es nocivo por inhalaci n o por contacto con la piel produciendo como consecuencia una posible desensibilizaci n del rea afectada En todos los casos lave la zona afectada con abundante agua y busque consejo m dico Use guantes de protecci n cuando manipule una bater a da ada Si el paquete de bater as ha sufrido p rdidas a fugas de gases debe reemplazarse inmediatamente Reempl zela con una bater a id ntica del mismo fabricante o con un tipo recomendado por Aeroflex Desconecte el cable de alimentaci n del equipo antes de quitar el paquete de bater as N Superficies a altas temperaturas Tenga cuidado al tocar el conector de entrada RF tipo N tras la aplicaci n continuada de altos niveles de potencia La temperatura del conector puede llegar a ser excesiva si se sobrepasan 50 W durante un periodo prolongado de tiempo N Riesgo de RF Cuando se miden valores elevados de ROE pueden existir tensiones elevadas debido a ondas estacionarias Bajo estas condiciones resulta peligroso operar con el equipo sin las tapas puestas N Tener en cuenta con el equipo inclinado Si utiliza el equipo en posici n inclinada se recomienda por razones de estabilidad no apilar otros equipos encima de l CAUTION Idoneidad de uso Este equipo ha sido dise ado y fabricado por Aeroflex para generar se ales de RF de bajo nivel para probar equipos de radiocomunicaciones
235. n made select the Tx TEST mode to display the screen and menu show in fold out diagram 2 0 Set the parameters or options to suit the test requirements from the TRANSMITTER TEST menus The complete setup can be stored by making use of the internal setup results memories This feature is described under Stores settings results later in this chapter starting on page 3 90 RF generator state This Service Monitor is a duplex instrument as mentioned earlier See Using the test modes on page 3 21 The state of the RF generator is shown on the TX TEST display by the legend ON or 9158 The state of the RF generator can be switched by pressing the top left soft key Input attenuator The Service Monitor s input attenuator can be preset to suit the RF input level expected from the transmitter or it can be set to auto range See page 3 15 for details Tx frequency Press the Tx Freq key The soft key options change to those shown in fold out diagram 2 1 The receiver circuits of the Service Monitor must be set to the RF output frequency of the transmitter under test This can be set manually using the data input keys or automatically by pressing the Auto Tune key 3 25 LOCAL OPERATION Manual frequency setting Range 100 kHz to 1 05 GHz With the IR legend highlighted data can be entered from the keyboard to the Tx FREQ parameter As the entry can only be a frequency setting it is not necessary to select the orange FR
236. n sources for the Tx Rx and Dx TEST modes and as audio test signal generators in the AF TEST mode Fig 4 3 is a detailed block diagram of the AF generators They have a frequency range of 20 Hz to 20 kHz The output waveform of either generator can be switched between sine wave or square wave Both generators are of similar design with minor variations The generator designated G N 2 is also used for other functions which do not conflict with its functions as an audio generator These uses will be mentioned where relevant 4 7 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Each of the circuits function in the following manner Instruction as to the frequency of the required signal is latched into a programmable array device which generates a repetitive digital output sequence recurring at the required frequency The digital output from the programmable array is transferred as a stream of 13 bit parallel data into an EPROM This holds look up tables containing shape details of sine wave and square wave signals Output from the EPROM is as 8 bit parallel information corresponding to the selected shape and at the repetition frequency instructed by the information latched into the programmable array device The EPROM output is applied to a digital to analogue converter which by converting each digital value to the corresponding analogue level produces the required signal The mean output level from the digital to analogue converter is constant The analogue outpu
237. nar carga una vez desconectado el equipo Aunque la energ a almacenada est dentro de los requisitos de seguridad pudiera sentirse una ligera descarga al tocar la clavija de alimentaci n inmediatamente despu s de su desconexi n de red No quitar las tapas en el interior no existen piezas reemplazables por el usuario Vea la lista de Centros de Servicios Internacionales en la parte trasera del manual Fusibles Se hace notar que el fusible de alimentaci n interno est enserie con el activo del cable de alimentaci n a red Si la clavija de alimentaci n de red cuenta con s lo dos terminales sin polaridad el fusible puede pasar a estar en serie con el neutro en cuyo caso existen partes del equipo que permanecer an a tensi n de red incluso despu s de que el fusible haya fundido N Peligro de incendio Aseg rese de utilizar s lo fusibles del tipo y valores especificados como repuesto Si se utiliza una clavija con fusible incorporado aseg rese de que los valores del fusible corresponden a los requeridos por el equipo Ver secci n de especificaciones del cap tulo 1 para comprobar los requisitos de alimentaci n Aviso de toxicidad Alguno de los componentes utilizados en este equipo pudieran incluir resinas u otro tipo de materiales que al arder produjeran sustancias t xicas Por tanto tome las debidas precauciones en la manipulaci n de esas piezas En este equipo se utiliza una bater a de litio o contenida dentro de un
238. ne and maintenance testing on radio transmitters receivers and two way radio communication equipment The Service Monitor contains modules to provide facilities equivalent to the following instruments RF generator two audio generators specialized tones generator RF power meter modulation meter RF counter AF counter AF voltmeter distortion meter large screen digital oscilloscope spectrum analyzer and monitoring receiver Distortion measuring filters AF post demodulation filters and IF passband filters are built in for inclusion in relevant measurement paths The signal obtained from the demodulators when in Tx test mode is fed to an AF amplifier and can be monitored on the built in loudspeaker on headphones connected to the accessory socket or taken from the DEMOD OUT connector to other equipment The monitor has a wide range of test capabilities including base station mobile and transponder commissioning and servicing radio telephone system and radio pager testing as well as production testing to all of the above The selection of a test mode configures the modules into set ups ready for connection to the equipment to be tested and produces the appropriate set up screen on the display The set up screen shows the settings of the active modules records changes to settings as they are made and gives readouts of test results both digitally and on barcharts The modules of the monitor can each be used to perform as individual te
239. nennnssnnssunssnnnsnnnunssnsssnnsansnanssnnenne 5 1 IIb Cr cS Index 1 Note Precautions WARNING CAUTION Note These terms have specific meanings in this manual WARNING information to prevent personal injury CAUTION information to prevent damage to the equipment Important general information Hazard symbols The meaning of hazard symbols appearing on the equipment and in the documentation is as follows Symbol Description N Refer to the operating manual when this symbol is marked on the instrument Familiarize yourself with the nature of the hazard and the actions that may have to be taken A Dangerous voltage Toxic hazard A Hot surface General conditions of use This product is designed and tested to comply with the requirements of IEC EN61010 1 2001 C1 2002 C2 2003 Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use for Class I portable equipment and is for use in a pollution degree 2 environment The equipment is designed to operate from an installation category I or II supply Equipment should be protected from the ingress of liquids and precipitation such as rain snow etc When moving the equipment from a cold to a hot environment it is important to allow the temperature of the equipment to stabilise before it is connected to the supply to avoid condensation forming The equipment must only be operated within the environm
240. nput of the audio routing circuits De emphasis filter The output from the discriminator passes through a 163 kHz low pass filter and then the 750 us de emphasis filter before being routed by the demodulation selection switches The de emphasis filter can be by passed as part of the test set up RF counter A sample of the 10 7 MHz IF signal is taken from one output of the phase splitter limiter and supplied to the IF counter circuit also located on B1 2 This counter measures the mean frequency of the IF signal and the result is written into memory By making a calculation using the reading from the RF counter and the division ratios from the three local oscillator control loops the instrument software can establish the mean frequency of the transmitter output Measurement ranging circuits The evaluation of RF level modulation depth modulation deviation distorted levels etc are all made using a metering circuit on the microprocessor board B2 1 Before the various levels can be measured each must be conditioned so as to bring the minimum and maximum levels of each parameter within the range of the metering circuit The signals to be measured are all brought to the analyzer ranging circuits on the audio processor board B1 2 Signals relating to RF power input to the instrument and power readings from an auxiliary power head are passed through various switched gain amplifiers before leaving the board to be measured Measurements to the
241. nto a sealed 50 Q load 1 7 GENERAL INFORMATION Amplitude Modulation Internal Frequency range AM depth range Resolution Indication Setting Accuracy Distortion Modulation Frequency Range Amplitude Modulation External Input impedance Frequency Range Modulation Frequency Range Sensitivity Frequency Modulation Internal Frequency range Maximum deviation Indication Setting Accuracy 1 Distortion Mod Frequency Range Resolution Pre emphasis Frequency Modulation External Input impedance Frequency Range Modulation Frequency Range Pre emphasis Sensitivity Microphone Input Input Level Input Impedance Press To Talk PTT 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz 0 to 99 1 96 2 digits Keyboard entry delta increment decrement function and rotary control For carrier frequencies from 1 5 MHz to 400 MHz 7 1 digit for mod freq of 1 kHz 10 1 digit for mod freq of 50 Hz to 5 kHz 15 1 digit for mod freq of 50 Hz to 15 kHz Less than 2 at 1 kHz for 30 AM CCITT Weighted 5 Hz to 33 kHz Nominally 10 kO in parallel with 40 pF As internal AM As internal AM 1 0 V RMS for 0 to 10096 AM 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz 0 to 75 kHz 3 digits Keyboard entry delta increment decrement function and rotary control 15 10 Hz at 1 kHz modulating frequency 10 at modulating frequencies from 50 Hz to 15 kHz Less than 196 at 1 kHz for deviation of 5 kHz CCITT Weighted 5 Hz
242. o 200 bits s The modulation level of the data signal is shown on the display 3 80 LOCAL OPERATION DTMF Overview Dual Tone Multi Frequency The DTMF tones function will generate and decode sequences of up to 40 characters corresponding to the standard DTMF frequencies The encoder allows the user to create characters sequences which are routed to the AF GEN OUTPUT connector or to the RF generator modulators The decoder will accept up to 40 tone pairs either from the modulation meter output or as AF signals from the AF INPUT connector Tx test DTMF tones function In the Tx TEST mode with Tones In set to RE DTMF tones generated within the mobile under test are recovered from the RF signal and routed to the DTMF decoder The RF frequency and modulation type of the transmitter under test is set up from the Tx TEST mode Pressing the Tones key will display the screen shown in fold out diagram 2 5 The DTMF key will then give access to the RF DTMF DECODER screen shown in Fig 3 23 RF DTMF DECODER screen and menu The decoder measures the frequencies and duration of each tone pair identifies the character and calculates any frequency errors The results of this are listed on the display as shown E RF DTMF DECODER 1Hz 2092k Hz 149 AHz 149 gt 15 SHE 15 Hz 151 1Hz 15 EIHz 15 Hz 15 1Hz 15 1Hz 158ms Frequencies Hz HI1 1 2090kHz 2
243. o two frequency plans may be defined and stored within the instrument for sequential tones Any of the standard tone frequency plans may be copied to the user defined plans and modified Tone length 20 ms to 20 s Standard tone frequencies may be selected from a menu Generation and decoding of DTMF tones Generation and decoding of Digitally Coded Squelch DCS Generation of POCSAG code CCIR No 1 Rec 584 Bit rates from 400 to 4800 bit s Inversion available Demodulated signals and audio signals may be monitored via the internal loudspeaker and via the accessory socket output on the front panel 10 MHz Better than 0 5 in 10 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F 0 6 in 10 0 to 50 C 32 to 122 F Better than 1 in 10 per year 1 minute to specified accuracy 1 2 5 and 10 MHz Greater than 1 V peak to peak Nominally 1 kQ GENERAL INFORMATION General Keyboard and Display Display size RS232C Connector Power Requirements AC Supply Voltage AC Supply Frequency Maximum AC Power DC Supply Voltage Maximum DC Power Calibration Interval Electro Magnetic Compatibility Safety Environmental Rated range of use Storage and transport Temperature Altitude Dimensions and Weight Standard dimensions Height Width Depth Option 30 dimensions Height Width Depth Weight Logical color coded keyboard with bright high resolution fast LCD 160 x 85 mm RS232C interface is provided for printing and remo
244. odes of its operation The RF generator On Off menu allows this to be enabled or disabled from the SPEC ANA mode Setting the tracking generator Control of the tracking generator parameters is carried out from the menu accessed by pressing the Track RF Gen key This key will either give direct access to the tracking generator parameters or to the RF generator On Off menu whichever was used last If the RF generator On Off menu is reached pressing the Track Gen key will display the tracking generator parameter control menu shown in fold out diagram 5 5 This menu gives the following options Tracking generator ON or OFF Alternate presses of the T Gen On Off key will toggle the tracking generator output ON and OFF When in the ON condition the RF level and frequency offset will be shown on the display Tracking generator level Pressing the Level key will highlight the ERR em EA legend and allow the level to be altered either by the variable control or by entering a new value using the data entry keys Locking tracking generator frequency to sweep frequency Pressing the Freq Locked key will lock the Frequency of the tracking generator to the sweep oscillator of the spectrum analyzer When locked the legend Locked is shown under the Offset legend on the display Repeated presses of this key will toggle between Locked zero offset and the offset previously set see below Setting the value of the tracking generator freq
245. offset frequency entered here will cause the signal generator frequency to differ from the measured transmitter frequency by the offset frequency To enter an offset frequency press the adjacent soft key key in the appropriate digits using the minus key and the decimal point key if necessary then use the relevant terminator key MHz kHz or Hz A positive figure will set the signal generator frequency above the measured transmitter frequency while a negative figure will set the signal generator to a lower frequency than the transmitter RF Level in The selection is made by toggle action of the soft key The PD or EMF flag is shown against output levels displayed as voltage or dBuV With the EMF option selected the displayed RF output level shows the open circuit voltage available at the RF output connector With the PD option selected the displayed RF output level shows the voltage that would be present across a 50 Q load Return Returns to the Setup page 3 16 LOCAL OPERATION AF Setup page This page allows the following optional settings to be selected Audio Level Measured in Repeated presses of the adjacent soft key will toggle through Volts dBm dBV or Watts and highlight the selection in inverse video The level of a signal applied to the AF input socket is measured in terms of the selected option This will then apply to all subsequent measurements The indicated output level from the AF generators is not aff
246. olution 0 1 distortion Indication 3 digits and barcharts Accuracy t 5 of reading 0 5 distortion Sensitivity 50 mV 100 mV for 1 96 distortion Reading suppressed if audio Audio S N Meter voltage is less than 5 mV Range 0 to 30 dB and 0 to 100 dB Resolution 0 1 dB Indication 3 digits and barchart Accuracy 1dB Sensitivity 50 mV 100 mV for 40 dB S N Reading suppressed if audio voltage is less than 5 mV 1 9 GENERAL INFORMATION Audio Oscilloscope Operating Modes Frequency Range Voltage Range Voltage Accuracy FM Ranges AM Ranges Timebase Graticule Special features Audio Barcharts Barchart Displays Vertical Resolution Ranging Audio and Modulation Filters Lowpass Filters Highpass Filters Bandpass Filters Audio Analyzer General Features Tones mode Single with digital storage on screen or repetitive sweep DC to 50 kHz 3 Hz to 50 kHz AC coupled 10 mV to 20 V per division in a 1 2 5 sequence 5 of full scale 75 30 15 6 3 and 1 5 kHz deviation full scale 10 accuracy 20 10 and 5 per division 10 accuracy 50 us div to 5 s div in a 1 2 5 sequence 10 horizontal by 6 vertical divisions Built in antialiasing circuitry and variable decode trigger level AF Voltage SINAD Distortion S N 2 of full scale Autoranging range hold or manual selection 1 2 5 sequence with hysteresis Four independently configurable Lowpass filters LP1 LP2 LP3 LP4 that can be set
247. on It is advisable to make the live neutral link on the appliance tester or its connector to avoid the possibility of returning the Service Monitor to the user with the live and neutral poles linked with an ad hoc strap The test voltage should be applied for five seconds before taking the measurement Aeroflex Ltd employs reinforced insulation in the construction of its products and hence a minimum pass limit of 7 MQ should be achieved during this test Where a DC power adapter is provided with the Service Monitor the adapter must pass the 7 MQ test limit We do not recommend dielectric flash testing during routine safety tests Most portable appliance testers use AC for the dielectric strength test which can cause damage to the supply input filter capacitors 4 Rectification It is recommended that the results from the above tests are recorded and checked during each repeat test Significant differences between the previous readings and measured values should be investigated If any failure 15 detected during the above visual inspection or tests the Service Monitor should be disabled and the fault should be rectified by an experienced Service Engineer who is familiar with the hazards involved in carrying out such repairs Safety critical components should only be replaced with equivalent parts using techniques and procedures recommended by Aeroflex Ltd The above information is provided for guidance only Aeroflex Ltd designs and const
248. on of each soft key on this menu is as follows 3 44 LOCAL OPERATION Disables any active distortion measuring function and removes the distortion bar chart from the display Hint By disabling this function the time taken to measure the remainder of the measurement functions is shortened thereby reducing the update time S N Selects Signal to noise ratio as the measurement method Compares the level of the demodulated signal together with the system noise against the level of the system noise only using the formula S N 20 log dB V 20log See Fig 3 7 a amp d Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 The distortion bar chart is graduated in dB and is also displayed as a digital read out above the bar chart The Rx test menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key Sinad Selects SINAD as the measurement method The modulation generator is setto 1 kHz By filtering the demodulated signal with a 1 kHz notch filter and comparing the result with the unfiltered signal the SINAD level is established using the formula SINAD 20log dB S N D y 20 log N D See Fig 3 7 a b amp c Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 The distortion bar chart is graduated in dB and the SINAD level is displayed as a digital readout above the bar chart The Rx test menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key Dist n
249. on of the non volatile RAM in the Service Monitor is designated as a user store for instrument settings and results Power Down and Factory Pre set settings are also held in this area of memory There are two routes through which the user memory can be accessed depending on the action to be performed To recall data from memory or to store settings press the orange MEM key This will display the STORE RECALL screen and menu To store test results or bit maps of test screens first press the DISPLAY HOLD key The soft key menu will change to show a Print key and a Store key Pressing the store key will display the DISPLAY HOLD STORE screen and menu STORE RECALL To store settings or to recall data from memory proceed as follows Press the orange MEM key The STORE RECALL screen and menu is displayed A message Recall from Store No is shown flashing in inverse video A sub heading INTERNAL STORE is shown above a list of the store locations with addresses from 00 to 09 A line of details relating to each store 1s shown against each address Store location 00 is followed by the information P Settings Power Down Store This location holds the settings of the Service Monitor when power was last switched off The P shows that the data is protected it cannot be over written or deleted Settings shows that the data is a set of instrument settings Power Down Store is a title identifying the contents Similarly
250. one type of modulation can be applied to the RF signal For example If the terminator key is used to complete a modulation setting when an FM deviation level is already set from another source the latest selection will cause the previous setting to be cancelled 3 43 LOCAL OPERATION AF input level measurement The measured level of signals applied to the AF INPUT connector can be displayed in volts dBm dBV or mW The selection is made from the AF Setup page as described under Audio Level Measured in on page 3 17 When the input level is displayed in dBm or mW the signal is assumed to be measured across 600 Q The 600 Q interface unit allows the Service Monitor to provide a 600 termination See Audio Input Impedance on page 3 17 With the input impedance set at 600 the indicated level is that of the input to the Service Monitor With the input impedance set at High the indicated level is that of the input to the Service Monitor with an assumed 600 Q load AF filters The AF signal to the AF INPUT connector on the front panel can be filtered using high pass low pass or band pass audio filters and with weighting filters as required Press the Audio Meter key followed by the AF Filter key The left hand soft keys change to allow selection of AF filters as shown below Press the Return key twice after selecting the required filter CCITT or 1 Only if option 23 CCITT filter is fitted Only if option 24 C M
251. onfidentiality shall cease when the Licensed Software and all copies have been destroyed or returned The copyright in the Licensed Software shall remain with Aeroflex The Licensee will permit Aeroflex at all reasonable times to audit the use of the Licensed Software The Licensee will not disassemble or reverse engineer the Licensed Software nor sub licence lease rent or part with possession or otherwise transfer the whole or any part of the Licensed Software 5 WARRANTY 5 1 5 2 5 3 Aeroflex certifies that the Licensed Software supplied by Aeroflex will at the time of delivery function substantially in accordance with the applicable Software Product Descriptions Data Sheets or Product Specifications published by Aeroflex The warranty period unless an extended warranty for Embedded Software has been purchased from date of delivery in respect of each type of Licensed Software is Embedded Software 12 months Add In Application Software 90 days Computer Application Software 90 days Downloaded Software No warranty If during the appropriate Warranty Period the Licensed Software does not conform substantially to the Software Product Descriptions Data Sheets or Product Specifications Aeroflex will provide 5 3 1 In the case of Embedded Software and at Aeroflex s discretion either a fix for the problem or an effective and efficient work around 5 3 2 In the case of Add In Application Software and Computer Application Software and
252. oscilloscope horizontal and vertical soft keys select a vertical scale of 25 kHz div and a horizontal scale of 200 us div 22 Adjust the deviation level from the RF signal generator until the 1 kHz trace on the oscilloscope occupies the full six deviations 23 Check that the deviation indicated on the external Modulation meter is between 67 5 and 82 5 kHz 24 Adjust the deviation level from the RF signal generator until the external Modulation meter reads 75 0 kHz deviation Leave all settings unaltered while carrying out step 25 25 Refer to Results table 5 34 on page 5 48 Connect the DEMOD OUT socket on the rear of the UUT to the DVM Set the DVM to monitor Volts AC and check that the level indicated is between 4 77 V and 5 83 V 26 Set the RF signal generator modulation rate to 2 kHz 27 On the UUT press Return Mod Meter Deemph to switch de emphasis on 28 Check that the deviation reading on the UUT drops by approximately half i e to 37 5 kHz functional check 29 Press Deemph to switch the de emphasis filter off and then Return Scope Bar Bar Chart Return to switch the oscilloscope off 30 Remove the splitter and Modulation meter and connect the RF signal generator directly to the UUT antenna input 31 Refer to Results table 5 35 on page 5 48 Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 300 MHz at 6 dBm with 5 kHz deviation at 1 kHz modulation rate 32 On the UUT select the 0 3 to 3 4
253. ot possible to achieve this the limits will need to be calculated for the readings obtained i Forthelower deviation in Results table 5 32 subtract the residual FM reading from the measured result 5 47 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 33 FM demodulation oscilloscope Carrier Deviation Lower Upper frequency kHz limit kHz limit kHz MHz Carrier Deviation frequency kHz MHz Results table 5 35 FM demodulation distortion 1 kHz rate Carrier Deviation frequency kHz MHz 300 5 2 Results table 5 36 AM measurement versus carrier frequency 1 kHz rate Carrier Depth Lower Upper frequency MHz limit limit T Lower Upper limit limit T 5 48 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Results table 5 38 AM measurement versus AM depth 1 kHz rate Depth Lower Upper limit limit Carrier Lower Upper frequency limit T limit T MHz The upper and lower limits in Results table 5 36 Results table 5 37 Results table 5 38 and Results table 5 39 are calculated on the assumption that it was possible to set the exact level on the external Modulation meter If it is not possible to achieve this the limits will need to be calculated for the DVM readings obtained Results table 5 40 AM demodulation distortion 1 kHz rate Carrier Depth 96 Upper frequency limit 9 MHz Results table 5 41 RF frequency meter at 60 dBm antenna input manual tuned
254. out diagram 6 0 to be displayed When the AF TEST mode is selected the combined output from the AF generators plus the data generator facility is available at the AF output connector Signals fed to the AF input connector are routed to the AF signal analyzing circuits See Fig 3 16 Audio test setup The frequency level and shape parameters of the audio generators can be set within the following limits Freq range 5 Hz to 33 kHz Level range 0 1 mV to 4 V rms Shape option Sine or square By using the AF signal generators and the measuring functions of the Service Monitor it can be used for performance testing of passive and active AF circuits such as filters and amplifiers Frequency level distortion level SINAD level and signal to noise ratio measurements can be made The oscilloscope facility is available to observe and measure waveforms The tones receiver facility 1s available for the performance checking of features such as digitally coded squelch generators The AF output signal and the measuring facilities can each be used independently 3 63 LOCAL OPERATION Setting up The audio generators are the signal sources for AF testing Good practice is to disable the source until tests are set up This is achieved by selecting each of the generators in turn and pressing the orange ON OFF function key to display Off adjacent to each of the generator s output data on the display The required generator or generators ca
255. outing within it Points to note are The power source for the receiver should be reliable and stable The battery of a vehicle may discharge if supplying a mobile transceiver during prolonged testing or the earth connection may become open circuit if the transceiver is removed from its normal location When testing the receiver section of transceivers take precautions to prevent the inadvertent keying of the transmitter The RF input connection to the receiver should be made using good quality RF cable with correctly fitted connectors Worn connectors and damaged or kinked cable can produce reflections and losses in the system which will give misleading results Setting up When all the required connections have been made select the Rx TEST mode to display the screen shown in fold out diagram 3 0 Set the parameters or options to suit the test requirements from the RECEIVER TEST menus 400 kHz to 1 05 GHz Press the RF Gen key The legend is highlighted as shown in fold out diagram 3 1 If the Rx Tx function has been set from the Tx TEST mode the GEN FREQ will be set to the receiver frequency relevant to that test If this is correct for the receiver under test there is no need to re enter the frequency Rx frequency Manual frequency setting With legend highlighted data may be entered from the keyboard to the GEN FREQ parameter Enter the required frequency by using the digit keys and the decimal point key if re
256. pause duration time between each tone can each be set independently from 20 ms to 1 0 s The default values are 150 ms duration and 50 ms pause A tones frequency shift facility is provided for testing decoder circuits To shift the frequency of the transmitted tones press the Freq Shift key to highlight the WERTEN legend on the display and enter the percentage value of the shift required using the data entry keys Frequency increases or decreases are possible Entering a negative value will cause the transmitted frequencies to be decreased from the stated frequency The maximum frequency shift is 1096 When the DTMF TONES functions are set return to the Rx TEST mode and enable the RF generator Return to the DTMF RF ENCODER function Press the Send Mode key to display the Send Mode menu The options available are Cont Tones Generates the tone sequence repeatedly until the orange ON OFF function key is pressed Tone Burst Generates one sequence of the tones then stops Step Tones The first press causes the first tone of the sequence to be generated for the duration specified When the Step Tones key is pressed again the next tone in the sequence will be generated for the duration specified Single Tone After pressing this key pressing any data entry key will cause the corresponding tone to be generated for the duration specified Using the appropriate keys to send the selected tones to the receiver tests can be made to
257. pe facility can be used for modulation testing When this facility is active within the Tx TEST mode the Service Monitor demodulator output is applied to the input of the oscilloscope The input to the oscilloscope is taken from the demodulators through any selected AF filters Therefore modulation measurements made using the oscilloscope will include the characteristics of the selected AF filter The Y ranges of the oscilloscope are directly calibrated in deviation frequency when FM demodulation is selected and in percent modulation when AM demodulation is selected The ranges are from 200 Hz Div to 10 kHz Div in a 1 2 5 sequence and 25 kHz Div FM and 5 10 and 20 Div AM The X ranges are from 50 us Div to 5 s Div in a 1 2 5 sequence When the oscilloscope facility is selected the modulation level bar chart is removed from the display The digital read out of modulation level including the positive and negative readings is retained The Modulation frequency digital readout is also retained EXPANDED OSCILLOSCOPE When the expanded oscilloscope is selected all of the above relating to the standard oscilloscope apply except that the positive and negative modulation readings are not displayed 3 35 LOCAL OPERATION DUPLEX All of the above information relating to modulation characteristics and frequency response testing also applies to tests made using the Dx TEST mode The oscilloscope facility is not available whe
258. put sensitivity n 3 7 SSB transmitter frequency 3 34 Stores settings results 3 90 Supply SOMES es 4 3 Technical description n 4 1 Terminator keys een 3 5 Test capabilities ne 1 2 Test equipment for Acceptance tests 5 4 Test mode SEEN esses och 3 0 Test modes USING eS ae 3 21 Testing AF Mode 3 63 Tilt warning vil TOS e illa na 3 22 CTE 3 76 DOS 3 78 DIMES 3 81 POCSAG ici 3 5 Sequential sse 3 71 Tones iode 3 69 Tones mode RF input attenuators 3 70 Tones mode signal routing 3 70 Tracking generator n 1 6 Tracking generator spectrum analyzer 3 59 Transmitter power measurement 3 32 Transmitter test measurements 3 32 Transmitter testing rererere 1 3 3 23 Tx power measurement ii 3 27 TX DEST mode 5 io tss 4 7 V Ventilation Ventilation fan and filter 2 13 Index 3 Visual inspection new instruments Warning audible and visual AEROFLEX INTERNATIONAL LTD SOFTWARE LICENCE AND WARRANTY This document is an Agreement between the user of this Licensed Software
259. r s power supply module to the instrument the CHARGE position allows the power supply to recharge the internal battery 1f fitted See Getting started on Page 3 9 DC supply input voltage connector For powering the instrument from DC supplies See Performance data in Chapter 1 DC supply pin connection diagram Shows the polarity of the DC power connector DC supply fuse GPIB interface connector This connector is only present when the GPIB interface option is fitted Connection details are given in Chapter 2 under Remote control connections GPIB GPIB interface unit Optional See 6 above External frequency standard input This can be 1 2 5 or 10 MHz the Service Monitor identifies the applied frequency In the event of external standard failure control reverts to the internal standard Demodulated signal output The demodulated signal removed from the input RF signal is brought to this connector for feeding to external equipment EXT MOD IN External modulation input A signal applied to this connector can be used as a modulation source for the receiver test signal The input level of the applied signal should be 1 00 V RMS sinewave in order to maintain the correlation with the modulation level calibration The frequency of the signal should be within the range of the internal modulation source of 20 Hz to 20 kHz AM DC to 100 kHz FM Serial port The SERIAL PORT connector provides RS232 interface facilities for remot
260. r setup explanation starts on page 3 11 3 64 LOCAL OPERATION Distortion measurement Off The distortion measuring facilities of the monitor are available within the AF TEST mode Pressing the Audio Meter key to change the soft keys as shown in fold out diagram 6 3 then pressing the Dist S N soft key accesses the distortion measurement menu shown in fold out diagram 6 3 2 Pressing each of the soft keys will have the following effect Disables any active distortion measuring function Hint By disabling this function the time taken to measure the remainder of the measurement functions is S N shortened thereby reducing the update time Selects signal to noise ratio as the measurement method The AF generator is disabled and enabled alternately by the monitor software and the total output level from the circuit under test 15 measured by the AF voltmeter at each state See Fig 3 7 a amp d Distortion level and signal to noise level measurements on page 3 36 Calculations are performed by the software to calculate the signal to noise ratio using the formula V S N 20log dB V S N D 20log dB The distortion bar chart ranges available are 0 to 30 dB and 0 to 100 dB The signal to noise ratio is displayed as a digital read out above the bar chart The AF test menu is recalled automatically after pressing this key SINAD Selects SINAD as the measurement method The AF generator is set to 1 kHz and the
261. r the various test parameters They are arranged in three groups Function keys on the left of the group are colored orange They are used to define the parameter to be addressed frequency level increment change or memory store location before any digits are entered The ON OFF function key acts directly on the selected function Digit keys are in the center of the group and include the minus sign and decimal point These two keys have alternative symbols printed beneath them on the front panel which can be entered as data where appropriate No action other than a normal key press is required as only one of the three options for each of these keys is relevant to the entry at any one time The Delete key back spaces over figures entered on the display to correct any errors Corrections cannot be made to an entry after a terminator key has been pressed for that entry The original setting will be retained if an entry is not completed The incomplete entry will be replaced on the display by the original setting when a key press is made that confirms to the program that the setting being made has been aborted Terminator keys used to conclude a parameter value are on the right of the group They are colored orange When setting a modulation level the entry is completed using the Hz kHz MHz or key The appropriate modulation type FM or AM is automatically selected 4 5 amp 6 RF input and output connectors The three sockets a
262. re Sean gt Span 600MH Mkr 47 5dEm 388MHz Res 3HBkHz Res EM ZBBkHz 16d8 SPECTRUM ANALYZER Ret SPECTRUM ANALYZER 206 1 i Leuel Ref Level i 2 BdEm GdEm Tides 18dB div Vert 10dB diw Filter Vid Filter Scale Vid Filter On On Peak Peak Hold i Mkr Peak Hold Hold oft Off RF Gen On Marker to Ref RF Gen On Tr Gen Look ketur Centre Gran EBHTHz Listar Centre 398MHz EE 600mHz ON Mkr 49 HdBEm 36BMHz Res BW Res CHARGE Ret SPECTRUM ANALYZER Level Ref Level 9 GdEm Uer 18dB div Scale Vid Filter Or Hkr Peak Hold like Off Level Ref Level Ret SPECTRUM ANALYZER 1 9 amp dEm Vert 16dB diw A I Scale Vid Filter On i 1 Mkre Peak Hold shkr OFF Gen on SPECTRUM ANALYZER Centre Marker RE Gen on e Ref Ref Leuel Frea to Ref Ta i amp dEm F ee Ben TedBediy Baz RF Ben Vid Filter Look n Fe Look Listen Centre 300MHz Span GOANNZ Listen
263. re sottoposto n a ricarica n a corto circuito o scarica forzata Queste azioni possono provocare surriscaldamento fuoriuscita di gas o esplosione della batteria xvii Rame berillio Alcuni componenti meccanici in questo strumento sono realizzati in rame berillio Si tratta di una lega con contenuto di berillio di circa il 5 che non presenta alcun rischio in usi normali Questo materiale non deve essere lavorato saldato o subire qualsiasi processo che coinvolge alte temperature Deve essere eliminato come rifiuto speciale Non deve essere eliminato tramite inceneritore Nickel Metallo Idrido Quest apparato contiene un pacco batterie al Nickel Metallo Idrido Ni MH Nickel Metal Hydride che non deve essere aperto disassemblato o mutilato di alcuna parte Il pacco batterie non contiene parti riutilizzabili n puo essere riparato In particolari condizioni anormali esso puo esplodere pu gocciolare o infiammarsi se esposto al alte temperature o messo a contatto col fuoco o se aperto o disassemblato Non corto ciruitare i poli Questo pacco batterie contiene idrossido di potassio un elettrolito CORROSIVO che pu causare bruciature agli occhi ed alla pelle e sensibilizzare l area con cui viene a contatto In ogni evenienza lavare l area interessata con abbondante acqua corrente e rivolgersi ai consigli di un medico Usare guanti protettivi quando si maneggia un pacco batterie danneggiato Se la batteria gocciola o forat
264. requency range 200 kHz to 1 05 GHz Accuracy 10 resolution Resolution 0 1 dB Test equipment Calibrated RF Accuracy better than 2 1 power source consisting of RF signal 11 MHz to 1 GHz frequency range RF level generator 13 dBm Power splitter 6 dB 50 Q 11 MHz to 1 GHz RF Amplifier 3W 40 dB gain 11 MHz to 1000 MHz Attenuator pads Values dependent upon amplifier used RF power meter 0 1 dB from 11 MHz to 1 GHz See below IFR 2041 Weinschel 1870A IFR 2177 or AR5W1000 MHz IFR 6960 A B 6912 sensor 1 Refer to Results table 5 45 on page 5 51 Set the UUT to Tx TEST SELECT N type input socket i e only the LED on From power up the instrument should already be set to Autotune mode with wide band power meter WB selected 2 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 19 connecting to the N type input socket on the UUT 3 Set the calibrated power source to provide a signal at 11 MHz and 100 mW 20 dBm to the UUT input Note the level on the UUT broad band power meter and check that it is within the stated specification Repeat at 100 MHz and then in 100 MHz steps up to and including 1000 MHz UUT Signal generator Be E d do o E IE ID FN t B Sg D A ooo 000 e N TYPE EE O INPUT RF OUTPUT Splitter a Pad Pad Pow
265. res O o 4 2 Power supply see TH RU ara 4 2 The display ted oou uh dis 4 3 Txctest mode x illa eda lla Denis nee een 4 7 ModulationsoUrces uoce see iaia ano ao 4 7 Audio generators rina e SERE ue ii ia 4 7 E O 4 8 Receiver CCU 4 9 A A ud RR HUI REDE UNE NE 4 9 Broad band power meter uiae op eie tds 4 9 Overload detect Gin i ter e S alan 4 10 Switched attenUator ariani UR EE TRES UNT OGNI as 4 10 TE Cir Cuts rtr e Ee RUE PE UR Re earn 4 10 First frequency changer mixer eese enne 4 10 First l cal oscillator eene edere iege e ees Ins 4 10 Second frequency changer mixer 4 10 Second local oscillators ii a nr 4 11 Third frequency changer mixer ss 4 11 Bandwidth filters eS RE e eite 4 11 Demodul tors bd rere qe 4 11 AM demodulatotzz sensato een babeat Ar et ue 4 11 EM demodulator ses tn Re e ios 4 11 SSB demodulator optional ss 4 12 De emphasis filter deci RR teed EUR Oe E e ve ede added 4 12 RECOURS nn tnt oue mbi e uaque 4 12 Measurement ranging CITCUITS ener enne nennen enne nennen 4 12 Distortion SINAD filter t Rte e en ali 4 13 Oscilloscope function sis oe Ete tiere rie ti alia a ee edes 4 13 Rx test mode erede A dg ede aR 4 13 RFSener REN E 4 13 Mod lators dei dee lo 4 14
266. results displayed using the selected measurement units The results obtained from tests can be stored for later analysis or transfer to hard copy by making use of the internal setup results memories Test mode screen settings can similarly be stored for future use All of these features are described under Stores Settings results or Printer later in the chapter Transmitter power Broad Band and Narrow Band power measurements CAUTION The monitor has both Broad Band and Narrow Band power measurement facilities The Broad Band power meter measures the total average power of all signals present at either RF input while the Narrow Band power meter measures only the average power of the signal contained within the IF pass band selected for the Tx TEST mode The facilities of the Service Monitor allow the RF signal generator to remain active in the Tx TEST mode Therefore the signal from this will be present at common points within the RF input output circuits of the instrument and will contribute to measurements made by the power meters When making measurements where this will make any significant difference to the measurement disable the RF generator by selecting the RF Gen OFF condition from the Rx TEST mode or the Dx TEST mode Narrow band power measurements cannot be made when the frequency of a transmitter has been set using the Auto Tune key The maximum continuous power rating of the N Type connector is 50 W with a minimum ind
267. rom the display but the digital read out of the power level 1s retained DUPLEX With the monitor in the Dx TEST mode the POWER bar chart and digital display remain in the same location and the indications are identical to those given in the Tx TEST mode 3 33 LOCAL OPERATION Transmitter frequency The digits adjacent to the Tx Freq legend on the Tx TEST display refer to the frequency to which the Service Monitor receiver circuits are tuned If the frequency of the transmitter is known this figure can be entered manually This is done by firstly pressing the Tx Freq key in the Tx TEST mode menu and then entering the figure using the data input keys Complete the entry by use of the appropriate terminator key The receiver circuits of the monitor will then be tuned to that frequency and any signal within the IF pass band will be examined The frequency difference between the set frequency and the true frequency will be displayed as offset Hint When testing a transmitter using sequential tones it may be necessary to pre tune the Service Monitor receiver circuits in this way in order to successfully decode the initial tones If the transmitter frequency is unknown or it is to be measured key up the transmitter and use the key sequence 7x Freq Autotune The receiver circuits of the monitor will then carry out a sweep to locate the signal and tune to it The frequency of the signal is displayed against the Tx FREQ legen
268. ructs its products in accordance with International Safety Standards such that in normal use they represent no hazard to the operator Aeroflex Ltd reserves the right to amend the above information in the course of continuing its commitment to product safety Cleaning Before commencing any cleaning switch off the Service Monitor and disconnect it from the supply The exterior surface of the case may be cleaned using a soft cloth moistened in water Do not use aerosol or liquid solvent cleaners 2 15 Contents Chapter 3 LOCAL OPERATION About this chapten au de de e Ml e nitet atis 3 3 Front panel layout deter alii a dt 3 4 Rear panel controls and connectors ss 3 8 Getting Started nsa eee a 3 9 Applying power and selecting test modes 3 9 Test mode screens and menus cna bon adds 3 10 HELP SETUP erret he rie ne RET EUR ia ree eie Siete 3 11 charts nsu nce ER is otio e c 3 19 Spectrum analyzer oce tte atin i e P doe n be ot rh e dd 3 19 OS CULOS COP eet Re ti s seis 3 19 Using the SII ERRE ert ES 3 21 Brief descriptions i cR OSA nn E He P tbe de ERU its 3 21 Tx test transmitter testing 3 23 OVERVIEW dto o ieri a E ALTI 3 23 Connections ius ia Moine Un nette te on AE sn ais 3 24 Setting up A eT RENATA tente RI Rene tt 3 25 Making measurements cui A dae ee es 3 32 External Attenuators e a SA 3 33 Rx test receiver testing at uu non lille fon bava lo n e itu ie e e RO langs 3 38 OVELVICWAS sien
269. rvice monitor After making changes to S1 refit the option assembly to the service monitor before re connecting the power lead Each of the four lines can be set individually When any section of S1 is closed and the connector output of that line pins 2 3 4 or 5 is at a logic state high the associated pin 6 7 8 or 9 will also be at logic state high When any section of S1 is open and the connector output of that line pins 2 3 4 or 5 is at a logic state low the associated pin 6 7 8 or 9 will be open circuit Logic line control Additional control is provided to logic lines 0 and 1 from the two top soft keys on the left of the logic line setup menu When set to As setting the output will be as set by the right hand soft keys When the Line 0 Mode is set to Close for Transmit the state of this line will depend upon which operating mode the instrument is set to When the instrument is in the Rx TEST mode line 0 will take up the Closed Logic High state and the Open Logic Low state for all other test modes The Press To Talk switch on the accessory microphone if this accessory is fitted will switch the instrument from Rx TEST mode to Tx TEST mode Therefore line 0 will also change state when the Press To Talk switch is operated When the Line 1 Mode is set to Close on Squelch line 1 will take up the Closed Logic High state when the instrument is in a squelched condition an
270. s in the table UUT B eee o LF generator 000 and AF INPUT 500 lt y Y DVM ii A VOLTMETER INPUT TERMINALS C6049 Fig 5 12 Audio frequency meter check 5 20 ACCEPTANCE TESTING Audio voltmeter Specification Level accuracy 3 3 mV resolution 20 Hz to 50 kHz DC and 20 Hz to 50 kHz when DC coupled Resolution 1 mV or 1 of reading Test equipment Description Minimum specification Example LF generator 50 Hz to 50 kHz 30 mV to 5 V RMS IFR 2965 DC power supply 0 to 50V DVM DC measurement and AC measurement 20 Hz to Solatron 7150 50 kHz 1 Refer to Results table 5 26 on page 5 46 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 13 connecting the LF generator output to the UUT AF input and via a T piece to a DVM 2 Press HELP SETUP Setup AF Filters Factory Preset Return Return Return Set the UUT to AF TEST press AF Filter 50 kHz LP to set the Audio Input filter to 50 kHz Low pass Press AC DC coupling until AC coupled is displayed 3 Setthe DVM to measure Volts AC and the LF generator to frequency 1 kHz level 30 mV RMS adjust until the DVM indicates as close to 30 mV as possible Check that the level indicated on the UUT voltmeter is within 3 3 mV resolution of the level indicated on the DVM 4 Repeat step 3 with LF generator levels of 200 mV 0 4
271. s key will select each visible bar chart in turn The selected bar chart is indicated by a highlighted A or H at the left of it Auto range This key will set the selected bar chart to autorange If it is currently set to autorange the key will have no effect gt lt Each press will change the bar chart to the next highest range If the selected bar chart is set to autorange the first press will remove autoranging and hold the current range The next press will change the range When the highest range is set subsequent presses will have no effect o Each press will change the bar chart to the next lowest range If the selected bar chart is set to autorange the first press will remove autoranging and hold the current range The next press will change the range When the lowest range is set subsequent presses will have no effect Scope Bar Pressing this key once will remove the bar charts from the display and cause the normal oscilloscope to be displayed Subsequent presses will display the expanded oscilloscope then the bar charts again Return This key will display the top level screen of the selected test mode Spectrum analyzer The spectrum analyzer SPEC ANA mode presents a graphical display of Radio Frequency against RF level over a selected sweep of the RF spectrum Data relating to the setup and to measurements of the signals being analyzed is presented on the periphery of the display As well as the basic spectr
272. sed through the New Std key Key the transmitter to transmit a tone sequence Within the Service Monitor the TONES decoder will decode the tones sequence obtained from the modulation meter The decoded sequence will appear in the panel at the top of the display with the first 10 characters underlined The sequence decoder store can hold up to 40 decoded characters Any received in excess of this will be lost 3 74 LOCAL OPERATION The underlined tones are listed in the center of the display with an analysis of the parameters of each tone as below e The measured frequency of each tone e percentage error from the true tone frequency e The duration of each tone By using the 2 or Y J keys the analysis of all tones in the decoded sequence can be shown The stored sequence can be cleared from the store by pressing the Clear Sequ key Revertive tones Revertive tones signaling takes various forms The common factor is that a tone sequence received by a mobile transceiver or other receiver will trigger a second sequence to be returned The second sequence may be a duplicate of the first or a different sequence It can be used to modulate a signal on a reverse channel or on a different channel For some applications either or both of the tone sequences may be used as an AF signal The routing of the original tone signal out of the Service Monitor and the revertive tone signal into the Service Monitor is dependent on
273. source The frequency to which the Service Monitor will tune will be the true RF frequency of the sideband and not that of the channel frequency Pressing the Rx 7x key causes the RF generator used for the Rx TEST mode to be set to the same frequency as the measured RF from the transmitter under test A frequency offset facility can be set up which gives a set difference between the frequency of the measured transmitter RF and the set frequency of the receiver test generator Rx Tx offset See the option selections within the RF Setup page page 3 15 for more information Pressing the Offset Hz ppm key causes the Frequency Offset readout error from the set frequency to be displayed as a frequency or in parts per million of the set Tx frequency After setting the Tx FREQ and any associated adjustments use the Return key to revert to the original TX TEST menu 3 26 LOCAL OPERATION Tx power The Tx Power key gives access to RF power measurement functions or associated functions Broad Band or Narrow Band power The Broad Narrow key selects which of the RF power measurement methods is operative The selected method is indicated on the display by the letters BB or NB to the right of the digital power reading The use of this facility is explained under Making measurements later in this chapter See page 3 32 Modulation meter demodulation options setup Set up the demodulation options to be compatible with the transmiss
274. ssing of the Help Setup mode key Return on the HELP SETUP screen Returns to the last used main mode 3 14 LOCAL OPERATION RF Setup page RF Counter Resolution The RF counter resolution can be set to 0 1 Hz 1 Hz or 10 Hz Selecting 1 Hz will slow the screen update rate by a factor of 10 1 selecting 0 1 Hz will slow it by a factor of 100 1 The choice is made by stepping through the three options using the soft key adjacent to the text Note The speed of the autotune function is also related to the selected RF Counter Resolution RF Level Measured in The RF level from the transmitter being tested can be displayed in terms of Watts into a 50 ohm load voltage across the 50 ohm load or dBm into 50 ohm The choice would normally be made so as to match the specification parameter of the transmitter under test The selection is made by pressing the soft key adjacent to the text This will toggle through the three options RF Input Level Holds the receiver s input attenuator at a fixed level The level is set manually by using these up down soft keys The displayed values indicate the maximum input level that should be applied to the receiver A held input level is indicated on the Tx and Dx screens by a red inverse video H 9 Auto Range Sets the receiver input attenuator to autorange Atten Hold The Attenuator Hold facility provides a seamless range of RF Generator output that is not subject to swi
275. st AF2 FREQ on the TRANSMITTER TEST DUPLEX or AF TEST screens If is selected the DCS tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If is selected the DCS tone is still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the DCS tone will cease It can then be re started only when the RF DCS ENCODER screen or the AF DCS ENCODER screen is displayed DCS transmitter encoder testing The decoders within transceivers equipped with DCS signaling are usually programmed to generate their code for inclusion on the reverse channel The DCS RF decoder function of this Service Monitor is able to demodulate the DCS signal and display the digital data The DSC signal is fed into a comparator register and occurrences of bit patterns corresponding to the three fixed bits 0 0 1 of the coded signal are flagged 23 bit samples of the coded signal are placed in registers with the occurrences of the 0 0 1 sequence occupying the 12 11 and 10 bit positions The value of the data in bit positions 1 to 9 1s decoded This corresponds to the DCS code number The binary representations of all the decoded sequences are displayed along with the DCS code The oct values are compared with the system permitted codes in a look up table and the true code indicated The user can select the decoder bit rate to match that of the system within the range 100 bits s t
276. st instruments A hard copy of most screens can be made to a suitable printer using the screen capture feature This is one of the functions accessed after pressing the DISPLAY HOLD key on the front panel See Front panel layout DISPLAY HOLD key in Chapter 3 A memory facility allows instrument settings and test results to be stored within the instrument The RS232 control facility permits operation of the instrument by remote or automatic control as an alternative or supplement to the conventional front panel local control IEEE 488 2 GPIB remote control is available as an option RS232 and GPIB control facilities are detailed fully in the Programming Manual supplied The test modes are outlined in the following descriptions with interconnection diagrams showing the principles of the test procedures GENERAL INFORMATION Transmitter testing Service Monitor MODULATED RF SIGNAL lt PO AF GENERATOR Tx OUTPUT Under Test AF MODULATION INPUT C6025 Fig l 1 Transmitter test setup The transmitter test procedure uses The AF generators to provide a source of modulation for the transmitter under test The RF power meter to measure the mean output power level of the transmitter The RF counter to obtain the mean RF frequency of the transmitter output The modulation meter to measure the modulation depth or the deviation level and to provide a demodulated output signal Single sideband transmissions can
277. store location 01 contains the factory default settings Recalling To recall the contents of a store location proceed as follows Press the Recall key to display the inverse video message Recall Store No if it is not already displayed Key in the two digit address of the location using the data entry keys Recalling Settings Note Entering 00 or 01 will recall the settings described above When Settings are recalled the Service Monitor will set to the mode that was current when the settings were saved Take care after recalling settings as selections such as RF IN OUT SELECT incremental settings and bar chart ranges are included The addressing procedure of all memory functions is similar The flashing inverse video message describes the action that will happen when a location address is entered and requests a two digit store address The first digit entered appears beside the message but the second digit of the address implements the action Recalling Results When Results are recalled the RESULTS SCREEN is displayed The test results are shown against each of the parameter headings Results of tests made when in the Dx TEST mode are shown with the RECEIVER TEST results in the top half of the display and the TRANSMITTER TEST results in the bottom half 3 90 LOCAL OPERATION Storing Storing settings To store settings make sure that all the parameters selections bar chart ranges an
278. t as seen from the front of the Service Monitor is shown in Fig 2 2 Accessory in out socket pin numbers EARTH SHIELD C1785 Fig 2 2 Accessory in out socket pin numbers The socket is used for connecting dedicated accessories such as microphones with press to talk switching capabilities Selection logic or data signals on pins 1 3 and 6 enables the Service Monitor to recognize the connections of an external accessory The appropriate pins are at TTL levels and are active low L as shown below 2 7 INSTALLATION Table 2 2 Accessory socket logic and applications Microphone press to talk Low External power Auto zero Low Low External power Peak power Low Refer to Chapter 3 Operation for details of using the socket A 3 0 m lead assembly part no 43130 591 is available as an optional accessory INSTALLATION Remote control connections RS232 The serial port connection requires a 9 way female D Type connector This should be correctly fitted to appropriate cable and the locking screws should be used to prevent undue strain from being applied to the connector housing The pin connections are listed below and the pin locations shown in Fig 2 3 RS232 serial port connections as seen facing panel Emm rst emma Not connected Rx data in Tx data out 6 DSR i 7 RTS 8 CTS DTR 9 Not connected Ground Fig 2 3 RS232 serial port connections as seen facing panel
279. t is filtered by a 50 kHz low pass active filter to remove any spikes created by the digital generation process The output from the filter has a peak to peak level of 5 7 V Output level is controlled by a digital to analogue converter configured as a digital level control circuit The constant level AF signal is applied to the reference voltage level input while the digital input register is supplied with the data relating to the level of output signal required The output from the digital to analogue converter will be a replica of the signal at the reference voltage terminal but proportionally reduced relative to the data values at the digital input terminals After buffering the AF generator outputs are switched to the AF output drivers for impedance matching prior to routing to the AF OUTPUT connector on the front panel The output level available at the AF output connector is infinitely variable from 0 1 mV to 4 0 V RMS Note The AF generators are also used as modulation sources for receiver testing Therefore the options available to the user when carrying out duplex tests are Both generators to modulate the transmitter under test receiver test signal not modulated Both generators to modulate the receiver test signal transmitter under test not modulated One generator to modulate the transmitter under test and one to modulate the receiver test signal Data generator The data generator is a D type flip flop used to
280. t keys the oscillator will be made to run at a frequency 1 3593 GHz above this value By mixing this signal with that from the input circuits the output from the mixer will contain a signal of 1 3593 GHz Where the required frequency of the monitor receiver circuits 1s to be established by the Auto Tune function the variable oscillator is made to sweep through its operating range by the instrument s software When a signal is detected at the demodulators the sweep rate is slowed and locked Filtering in the mixer output removes the upper frequency components of the mixing process Second frequency changer mixer The signal from the first mixer is further reduced in frequency by a second frequency changing mixer which has an output of 79 3 MHz This is on the second and third mixer board A3 The signal arriving at board A3 is first passed through a 1 3593 GHz band pass filter and is then applied to the input of the second mixer 4 10 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION Second local oscillator The local oscillator signal for the second mixer has a frequency of 1 280 GHz and is generated on the second and third oscillator board A9 1 This oscillator is a phase locked loop device locked to the instrument s 10 MHz reference oscillator The output from the second mixer is passed through a 79 3 MHz band pass filter to remove the unwanted products of the mixing process before being given 20 dB amplification The 79 3 MHz IF signal is split and fe
281. t panel This signal should be used to modulate the transmitter by direct connection to the AF input of the transmitter under test With the modulation meter options set to correspond with the modulation characteristics of the transmitter the signal can be examined Modulation measurement with the Service Monitor is made using a method that evaluates the positive value and negative value as separate readings This allows the results of both to be given on the display The bar chart is a dual display indicating the positive value on the top bar and the negative value on the lower bar The digital read out is given in three parts The normal size legend displays the P P 2 modulation level while the individual levels are given in half size numerals By making changes to the level of the applied AF signal the linearity of the modulating circuits can be checked limiting circuits companders and voice activated switching circuits can be tested and adjusted The dual positive and negative readings are particularly useful when checking and adjusting the symmetry of transmitters Similarly by repeating the tests at differing frequencies the frequency response of the modulating circuits and filters can be plotted and adjusted By using both AF generators at different frequencies or by using square wave output intermodulation distortion levels can be explored and transient response examined STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE The digital oscillosco
282. t the right hand edge of the front panel are the RF input output connectors Refer to the Performance data section in Chapter 1 for measurement accuracy maximum power input levels and reverse power limits The nominal impedance of all RF input and output circuits is 50 Q 4 ANTENNA connection This is a female BNC connector for Off Air measurements and monitoring using a suitable antenna This connector can also be used for direct input of low level signals 5 BNC RF output connector This provides output from the RF signal generator 3 5 6 LOCAL OPERATION N type RF connector This is dual function input and or output A 20 dB Delta attenuator is incorporated within the Service Monitor This interconnects the N type connector with the RF generator output and the measuring receiver input through the input output selector switching Hot surfaces 7 8 9 10 Take care when touching the RF Input N Type connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is exceeded for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive RF input select key The SELECT key switches through all the RF connector combinations available The current selection is indicated by LEDs The symbol shows the RF output connector and the O symbol shows the RF input connector Increment adjustment keys Under the variable control are the two pairs of increment adjustment keys FREQ
283. tched attenuator action The available range is up to 20 dB with a guaranteed range of 10 dB Atten Hold Level The value entered here sets the upper level of the seamless range of RF Generator output The value must be within specified output range of the RF Generator There is no account taken of any RF Power External Attenuator settings entered in the Test Set neither 1s the settable range restricted when the N type Connector is selected RF Power Ext Atten The value of any attenuator entered here is considered as part of the instrument and all power measurements will be as from the input to the attenuator not to the instrument input Similarly power output levels will be adjusted to take account of the external attenuator value entered To enter a value of attenuation which must be in dB press the adjacent soft key key in the digits of the value using the data entry keys and then press the dB terminator key The entered value will be applicable to all RF connectors into and out of the monitor When changing test setups or test modes this must be taken into account to prevent erroneous readings The indicator A is shown against any signal level which has been calculated to include the external attenuator 3 15 LOCAL OPERATION Rx Tx Offset Freq A setup option within the Tx TEST mode Rx Tx will set the signal generator used for receiver testing to the measured frequency of a transmitter being tested An Rx Tx
284. te instrument control 9 way male D Type 108 V to 118 V Limit 98 to 132 V 50 Hz to 400 Hz Limit 45 to 440 Hz 100 V to 240 V Limit 90 to 264 V 50 Hz to 60 Hz Limit 45 to 66 Hz 190 VA 11 to 32 V 100 W 2 Years Conforms with the protection requirements of the EEC Council Directive 89 336 EEC Conforms with the limits specified in the following standards IEC EN61326 1997 A1 1998 A2 2001 RF Emission Class A Immunity Table 1 Performance Criterion A Conforms with the requirements of EEC Council Directive 73 23 EEC as amended and is designed to the product safety standard IEC EN 61010 1 2001 C1 2002 C2 2003 for Class 1 portable equipment for use in a Pollution Degree 2 environment The instrument is designed to operate from an Installation Category 2 supply 0 C to 50 32 to 122 F and up to 95 relative humidity at 40 C 104 F 30 C to 70 C 22 to 158 F Up to 2500 m 1 55 mile pressurized freight at 27 kPa 3 9 Ib in differential 185 mm 7 3 inches 400 mm 15 7 inches 460 mm 18 1 inches including handle feet and covers 185 mm 7 3 inches 420 mm 16 5 inches 565 mm 22 2 inches including handle feet and covers Typically less than 11 4 kg less than 25 Ib 10 5 kg 23 Ib no options less than 13 kg 29 Ib fully equipped GENERAL INFORMATION Options and accessories Options Option 1 Option 3 Option 4 Option 5 Option 8
285. tect the lead assembly Never use the plug with the detachable fuse cover omitted or if the cover is damaged UNITED KINGDOM C3510 The fuse s or circuit breaker to protect the equipment is fitted at the back of the equipment North American IEC 60320 1 plug Aeroflex part number North American Straight through 23422 004 C YE EARTH Q North American Right angled 23422 005 LIVE NEUTRAL The North American lead is fitted with a NEMA 5 15P Canadian CS22 2 No 42 plug and carries approvals from UL and CSA for use in the USA and Canada U S CANADA KOREA C3511 24 INSTALLATION Continental Europe IEC 60320 1 plug Aeroflex part number Straight through 23422 006 Right angled 23422 007 CONTINENTAL EUROPE C3512 The Continental European lead is fitted with a right angle IEC83 standard C4 plug CEE 7 7 which allows it to be used in sockets with either a male earth pin standard C 3b or side earth clips standard C 2b the latter is commonly called the German Schuko plug In common with other Schuko style plugs the plug is not polarized when fitted into a Schuko socket The lead carries approvals for use in Austria Belgium Finland France Germany Holland Italy Norway and Sweden Note that this plug will not fit Italian standard CEI 23 16 outlets The lead should not be used in Denmark given that the earth connection will not be made Francais Le c ble d alimentation d Europe Continentale
286. test modes They are active whenever the instrument is powered up and under local control HELP SETUP key Above the test mode select keys is the HELP SETUP key Pressing this key will cause the HELP SETUP access screen to be displayed if the instrument is under local control This does not interrupt any on going function of the Service Monitor See HELP SETUP on page 3 11 When the instrument is under remote control pressing this key will return control to LOCAL unless an instruction to prevent local operation has been sent from the remote control device 3 7 LOCAL OPERATION Rear panel controls and connectors 1 Q 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 T CE _ CHARGE ON 000000 pc seu 0000000 00000000 ojo 000 000 100W MAX e e e e TA T10AH250V 000 000 00000000 0000000 000000 Q Soze SERIAL EXT MOD DEMOD EXT STD O sas jo T2AL250V f C6031 000 0 Fig 3 3 Rear panel layout with optional GPIB fitted On the rear panel of the instrument are AC power supply input connector One range for all mains voltages See the Performance data section in Chapter 1 The AC supply fuse is contained within this connector Power switch The power switch has two positions ON or CHARGE The ON position connects the output of the Service Monito
287. than 1 part in 107 per year after 1 month continuous use Less than 10 minutes to within 2 parts in 10 at 20 68 F Allows direct connection of a parallel printer Additionally provides 4 software programmable output lines 25 way female D type 75 100 150 dots per inch laser printers FX80 FX100 Epson format 9 way female D type 4 independently programmable output lines each one configurable as a logic line or as a relay contact closure 5 V supply available GENERAL INFORMATION GPIB Option 5 Capability SSB Demodulator Option 8 Modulation Meter Frequency range AF demodulation range Distortion Detection range Features CCITT Filter Option 23 CMESS Filter Option 24 Look and Listen Option 27 Bail arm and front panel stowage cover Option 30 Internal Battery Option 32 Type Normal capacity when new Weight Charge time from instrument Temperature range Supplied Accessories For printing remote instrument control or for programming of user defined test sequences Complies with the following subsets defined by IEEE488 SH1 AH1 T6 L4 SR1 RL1 E1 DC1 DTO The SSB demodulator allows signals to be demodulated either via the intenal loudspeaker or via the accessory Socket Provides demodulation of SSB signals upper and lower sideband 400 kHz to 1 GHz 10 Hz to 15 kHz Typically less than 3 at 1 kHz 300 Hz to 3 4 kHz 2 uV to 150 W Automatic detection of USB or LSB
288. the Call Pager key The radio pager will respond To test the differing response options of the radio pager the user can select the combination of function bits and the contents of the message transmitted The Function bits are changed by repeated presses of the Alert Type key See Fig 3 24 POCSAG radio pager test screen and menu above The message content of the signal can be selected from 7 options by repeated presses of the Select Message key Message 1 contains no data and thus produces an alert only response from the radio pager The parameters of the test signal can be varied within the limits mentioned in Facilities above to test the performance tolerances of the radio pager 3 87 LOCAL OPERATION Oscilloscope The digital oscilloscope option is available from within the Tx TEST Rx TEST and AF TEST modes There are two display functions The standard display with a viewing area of approximately 38 x 65 mm The expanded display with a viewing area of approximately 63 x 90 mm The oscilloscope display may or may not be shown when the Tx TEST Rx TEST or AF TEST modes are selected This is dependent on the last use of the selected test mode and the selection made using the Power Up From key on the Setup page HELP SETUP key followed by Setup To access the oscilloscope function from a bar chart display press the Scope bar key the first press will show the standard display the second press will show the e
289. the DTMF decoder Dx test DTMF tones function When in Dx test mode the DTMF tones function can be accessed by pressing the Tones key The user can select encode or decode The encode function will produce tones for mobile receiver testing and decode will interpret tones produced by a mobile transmitter The encoder and decoder cannot operate simultaneously AF test DTMF tones function The use of the DTMF tones function within the AF test mode allows the Service Monitor to produce DTMF tones for direct injection into the DTMF decode circuits of mobiles or other equipment The decoder will analyze DTMF tones produced within mobiles and other equipment The DTMF tones are obtained from the AF output connector on the front panel The output levels and impedances are as for the AF generator output The input to the DTMF decoder within the Service Monitor is through the AF input connector The decoder will respond to signal levels above approximately 150 mV rms 3 83 LOCAL OPERATION Tones ON OFF control When the RF DTMF ENCODER screen or the AF DTMF ENCODER screen is displayed the tone is turned ON or OFF by the orange ON OFF function key If the DTMF tone is ON and the Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST or AF TEST mode selected the DTMF tone will continue to be generated If the tones out routing has been set to give RF tones these are provided by modulation generators 1 and 2 The legend Tones will be displayed against both MOD
290. the audio counter hardware Overall accuracy is governed by the instrument reference frequency The reference is checked independently elsewhere Note If the LF generator is not available then the Audio generator frequency check will confirm that the audio frequency meter is functional Specification Frequency range 20 Hz to 20 kHz Resolution 0 1 Hz less than 10 kHz 1 Hz at 10 kHz and above Accuracy As frequency standard digit resolution Sensitivity 50 mV Test equipment Description Minimum specification Example LF generator 20 Hz to 20 kHz frequency external standard HP 3325B In Out DVM 1 96 accuracy 20 Hz to 20 kHz Solatron 7150 1 Refer to Results table 5 25 on page 5 45 Connect the equipment as shown in Fig 5 12 connecting to the UUT AF input socket The frequency standards of the UUT and LF generator should be locked together The 50 Q load is in circuit because the LF generator used indicates level across 50 Q 2 Press HELP SETUP Setup AF Filters Factory Preset Return Return Return Set the UUT to AF TEST Press AF Filter 50kHz LP to set the Audio Input filter to 50 kHz Low pass 3 Setthe DVM to monitor Volts AC 4 Setthe LF generator to the first frequency shown in the Results table 5 25 and adjust the level for an indication of 50 mV RMS on the DVM Check that the frequency indicated on the UUT audio counter is within the limits shown Repeat for the remaining frequencie
291. tion disposal or recycling procedures for your country A Hot Surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is exceeded for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive vi N RF hazard When measuring high VSWR ratios hazardous voltages may be present on the line due to standing waves Under these conditions it is dangerous to operate the equipment with the covers removed N Tilt facility When the equipment is in the tilt position it is advisable for stability reasons not to stack other equipment on top of it CAUTION Suitability for use This equipment has been designed and manufactured by Aeroflex to generate low power RF signals for testing radio communications apparatus If the equipment is not used in a manner specified by Aeroflex the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Aeroflex has no control over the use of this equipment and cannot be held responsible for events arising from its use other than for its intended purpose vii CAUTION Note Precautions WARNING CAUTION Note Les termes suivants ont dans ce manuel des significations particuli res WARNING contient des informations pour viter toute blessure au personnel contient des informations pour viter les dommages aux quipements contient d importantes informations d ordre
292. tion frequencies of 10 kHz and 15 kHz 5 16 ACCEPTANCE TESTING AF output tests Audio generator output level Specification Level range 0 1 mV to 4 V RMS Accuracy 5 1 resolution 50 Hz to 15 kHz Test equipment 1 accuracy 50 Hz to 15 kHz Solatron 7150 VOLTMETER OUTPUT INPUT TERMINALS C6047 Fig 5 10 Audio generator level accuracy checks 1 Refer to Results table 5 19 on page 5 43 Connect the test equipment as shown in Fig 5 10 connecting the UUT AF Gen output socket to the DVM voltmeter input terminals 2 Set the DVM to measure Volts AC RMS 3 Set the UUT to AF TEST Audio Gen 1 FREQ 1 kHz LEVEL 4 V Audio Gen 1 should be set to Sinewave and Audio Gen 2 should be OFF Check that the DVM reads the level set t5 1 mV Repeat with frequencies of 50 Hz 150 Hz 500 Hz 2 kHz 5 kHz 10 kHz and 15 kHz in turn checking that the DVM reads the level set t5 1 mV 4 Set the UUT to AF Gen 1 FREQ 1 kHz LEVEL 20 0 mV Repeat with the level set to 400 mV Check that for each level the DVM reads the level set 5 0 1 mV Repeat with the level set in turn to 1000 mV 2000 mV and 3000 mV and check that in each case the DVM reads the level set 5 1 mV 5 Refer to Results table 5 20 on page 5 43 Repeat the above checks for AF Gen 2 with AF Gen 1 switched OFF 5 17 ACCEPTANCE TES
293. tions are Epson FX80 or FX100 Laser Printer 75 dpi 100 dpi 150 dpi RS232 serial port or Centronics parallel port The selected port is highlighted in inverse video If the parallel port option is not fitted it is not shown on the menu and the Printer Port key enables or disables the RS232 serial port as a printer port 3 13 LOCAL OPERATION Power Up From Successive presses of this key will toggle through the options available for configuration of the Service Monitor at Power Up Last Used Store 0 Store 0 is loaded with the current settings each time power is removed from the instrument With this selection made the instrument will power up to the same settings as when power was removed whether this was by user action or through power failure Preset Store 1 Store 1 contains the factory preset settings With this selection made the instrument will power up to the Rx TEST mode with all settings for every mode to the factory preset settings and options User Store 2 Store 2 is the first user accessible store which is loaded through the user memory function With this selection made the instrument will power up to the settings stored in user memory store 2 without having to access the memory as a separate function Access to the user memory is by pressing the orange MEM key See Stores settings results later in this chapter starting on page 3 90 Return Returns to the last screen displayed prior to the pre
294. tivi di stabilit non sovrapporre altri strumenti CAUTION Caratteristiche d uso Questo strumento stato progettato e prodotto da Aeroflex generare segnali RF in bassa potenza per provare apparati di radio comunicazione Se lo strumento non e utilizzato nel modo specificato da Aeroflex le protezioni previste sullo strumento potrebbero risultare inefficaci Aeroflex non pu avere il controllo sull uso di questo strumento e non pu essere ritenuta responsabile per eventi risultanti da un uso diverso dallo scopo prefisso xix CAUTION Note Precauciones WARNING CAUTION Note Estos t rminos tienen significados espec ficos en este manual WARNING contienen informaci n referente a prevenci n de da os personales contienen informaci n referente a prevenci n de da os en equipos contienen informaci n general importante S mbolos de peligro El significado de los s mbolos de peligro en el equipo y en la documentaci n es el siguiente S mbolo Naturaleza del peligro N Vea el manual de funcionamiento cuando este s mbolo aparezca en el instrumento Familiar cese con la naturaleza del riesgo y con las acciones que deban de tomarse AN Voltaje peligroso Aviso de toxicidad A Superficies a altas temperaturas Condiciones generales de uso Este producto ha sido dise ado y probado para cumplir los requerimientos de la normativa IEC EN61010 1 2001 C1 2002 C2 2003
295. to 33 kHz 25 Hz 750 us selectable Nominally 10 kO in parallel with 40 pF As internal FM DC to 100 kHz 750 us selectable 1 V RMS for 0 to 75 kHz deviation 2 mV to 200 mV AGC leveled Nominally 150 Q When using the optional microphone in Tx Test mode the PTT will switch instrument to Rx Test T Atlow modulation levels the residual AM FM may become significant 1 8 GENERAL INFORMATION Audio analyzer Audio Voltmeter Input Impedance Frequency Range Level Ranges Nominally 1 MQ in parallel with 40 pF DC and 50 Hz to 50 kHz AC only 50 Hz to 50 kHz Polarized DC below 1 Hz 0 100 mV to 0 30 V RMS in a 1 3 10 sequence Digital readout also in mW dBm dBV dBr user selectable External load R selectable compensation for 4 8 16 75 100 150 300 600 ohm Peak hold facility Resolution 1 mV or 1 of reading Indication 3 digits and barchart Accuracy 3 3 mV 1 digit Audio Frequency Meter Frequency Range Audio Distortion Meter 20 Hz to 20 kHz Resolution 0 1 Hz at less than 10 kHz 1 Hz at 10 kHz and above Indication 5 digits Accuracy As frequency standard 1 digit resolution Sensitivity 50 mV Audio SINAD Meter Frequency 1 kHz Range 0 to 18 dB and O to 50 dB Resolution 0 1 dB Indication 3 digits and barcharts Accuracy 1dB Sensitivity 50 mV 100 mV for 40 dB SINAD Reading suppressed if audio voltage is less than 5 mV Frequency 1 kHz Range 0 to 10 0 to 30 and 0 to 100 Res
296. tone is ON and the Tx TEST Rx TEST Dx TEST or AF TEST mode selected the CTCSS tone will continue to be generated If the tones out routing has been set to give RF tones this is provided by modulation generator 2 The legend CTCSS will be displayed against MOD2 FREQ on the RECEIVER TEST or DUPLEX screens If MOBA is selected the CTCSS tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If Mena is selected the CTCSS tone is still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the CTCSS tone will cease It can then be re started only when the RF CTCSS ENCODER screen or the AF CTCSS ENCODER screen is displayed If the tones out routing has been set to give AF tones this is provided by audio generator 2 The legend CTCSS will be displayed against AF2 FREQ on the TRANSMITTER TEST DUPLEX or AF TEST screens If is selected the CTCSS tones can be controlled by repeated presses of the orange ON OFF function key If is selected the CTCSS tone is still controlled by the ON OFF key but if a frequency is entered using the data keys or if the variable control is adjusted the CTCSS tone will cease It can then be re started only when the RF CTCSS ENCODER screen or the AF CTCSS ENCODER screen is displayed 3 77 LOCAL OPERATION DCS Overview Digitally Coded Squelch signaling is a system for addressing mobile radio transceivers from th
297. tor to provide a signal of 500 kHz with 70 AM at 1 kHz modulation rate Set the RF level to 6 dBm Ifa 2041 is being used it should be set to normal noise mode Check that the AM depth indicated on UUT is within 5 of reading 1 digit of the depth indicated on the external Modulation meter Repeat steps 4 and 5 for RF carrier frequencies of 500 MHz and 1050 MHz Refer to Results table 5 37 on page 5 48 On the UUT select the 300 Hz low pass filter and TX FREQ 100 MHz Set the external modulation monitor bandwidth to 30 Hz to 50 kHz Set the RF signal generator to provide a signal of 100 MHz with 7096 depth at 50 Hz modulation rate Check that the modulation depth indicated on the UUT is within 8 5 of reading 1 digit of the depth indicated on the Modulation meter On the UUT select the 50 kHz low pass AF filter and the 300 kHz IF filter Change the modulation rate on the RF signal generator to 10 kHz and check that the modulation depth indicated on the UUT is within 8 5 of reading 1 digit of the depth indicated on the Modulation meter Refer to Results table 5 38 on page 5 49 When finished select the 0 3 to 3 4 kHz filter on both the UUT and the external Modulation meter Select the 30 kHz IF filter on the UUT Set the RF signal generator modulation rate to 1 kHz and set 5 AM depth Check that the AM depth indicated on UUT is within 5 of reading 1 digit of the depth indicated on the Modulation meter Repeat with th
298. tors are located on the audio processor board B1 2 The IF signal from the IF and Log amplifier board A4 1 is fed to a phase splitter circuit which provides anti phase outputs for the AM demodulator The outputs from the phase splitter are taken to the positive and negative inputs of the balanced demodulator The demodulator is also fed with balanced unmodulated inputs obtained from the modulated 10 7 MHz signal by way of a phase splitting limiter The demodulator produces a balanced output equal to the difference between the two input signals This will have an AF component equaling the modulation signal and a DC component relating to the level of the IF signal The modulation is fed to the AF switching circuits while the DC component is used for automatic gain control FM demodulator FM demodulation is performed by a pulse width discriminator operating at 700 kHz The signal for this is obtained by mixing the 10 7 MHz output from the limited signal fed to the AM demodulator with the 10 0 MHz reference frequency and passing the resultant signal through a low pass filter The 700 kHz signal containing the FM information is fed into a both halves of a dual monostable flip flop By putting this signal to Al and B2 inputs the Q outputs from the monostables will be in anti phase By summing the two output signals the resultant signal will be a true representation of the modulation TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION SSB demodulator optional The single si
299. ts the address and the message The POCSAG test facility within the Service Monitor generates a paging signal containing all elements of a live signal This signal is transmitted using the RF generator output to feed a suitable test rig or TEM cell The decoder test facility allows a POCSAG type encoded signal to be decoded and displayed To access the POCSAG test facility use the following key sequence Rx TEST Tones POCSAG The screen and menu shown in Fig 3 24 POCSAG radio pager test screen and menu will be displayed RF POCSAG ENCODER GEH FREG 153 12586MHz LEVEL 18 dBm Bit Rate 512 GHz Tone Level 1 S88kHz Polarity Hormal Tone RIC Bia Level RF Gen Addr Alert Tore 454 4404444 COG Tyre Humeric Hezzaae t e 1 Select Message Return B2605 Fig 3 24 POCSAG radio pager test screen and menu The facilities offered by this Service Monitor for testing radio pagers are e RF generator of the Service Monitor can be set to any frequency within the specified range of the Service Monitor The default frequency is 153 125 MHz e RF level can be set to any level within the normal operating level of the Service Monitor e modulation level of the signal can be to any level within the normal operating level of the Service Monitor The default level is 1 5 KHz e The Address and Alert warning type can be set to any of the four ava
300. ttached to the store location See Titling store locations later Other memory functions Other memory functions can be carried out from either the STORE RECALL or DISPLAY HOLD STORE screen and menu Protecting store contents The contents of any store location can be protected from being over written or deleted To protect a store location Proceed as follows Press the Protect Store key The inverse video message Protect Store No is displayed Key in the two digit address of the location to be protected using the data entry keys A P will be shown against the location address in the list Any attempt to over write or delete the contents of the location will cause the message ERROR Store protected to be displayed momentarily To remove the protection from a location use the same procedure used to protect the location The P will be removed from the location address 3 91 LOCAL OPERATION Deleting store contents To delete the contents of an unprotected store location proceed as follows Press the Delete key The inverse video message Delete Store No will be displayed Key in the two digit address of the location to be deleted using the data entry keys The contents will be deleted as soon as the second digit is keyed and the location address list will show the location as Empty Once deleted the contents cannot be retrieved Note Store locations 00 and 01 which contain Last Power dow
301. ty test above The carrier from the signal generator providing the adjacent channel signal is switched on and the level of its output increased until the SINAD level is reduced to 12 dB The RF output level should be noted The difference in output level of the two RF generators expressed in dB is the 12 dB Adjacent Channel Selectivity level In the example above with a wanted signal level of 90 dB and a adjacent signal level of 7 dB the performance of the receiver would be satisfactory If the adjacent signal level was found to read 13 dB the performance of the receiver would be below specification 3 50 LOCAL OPERATION Blocking or desensitization Blocking or desensitization is an undesirable response by a receiver to a signal whose frequency Is spaced from the wanted signal by a frequency difference greater than the adjacent channel spacing The interfering signal will enter the pass band of the receiver with sufficient strength to cause the automatic gain control to operate This will reduce the gain of the receiver and block out weak signals The test setup is the same as for selectivity testing The generator being used to provide the wanted signal is set as for selectivity testing and the level adjusted to produce a SINAD level of 20 dB The generator providing the interfering signal should be unmodulated and set to an RF level of between 80 and 90 dB above t
302. u When the frequency allocation table is correct for the system check that the other parameters are correctly set The tone modulation level has a default setting of 1 5 kHz but can be set by the user to any level up to the instrument s maximum of 75 kHz 3 72 LOCAL OPERATION Creating the tone sequence To create the required tone sequence first press the Enter Sequ key to display the cursor in the tone sequence panel Enter the required sequence by using any of the data entry keys 1 to 9 zero and the Hex digits A to E The Extend Tone key is used to convert a standard tone to an extended tone or an extended tone to a standard tone With the cursor positioned over the tone to be changed each press of the Extend Tone key will extend it or reduce it to standard The cursor is moved by using the variable control Editing a tone sequence An existing tone sequence can be edited as required Using the rotary control move the cursor over the character to be changed To delete the unwanted character and insert a new character in its place press the data key corresponding to the new character To delete an unwanted character and close up the sequence press the DELETE key Editing the tone standard Tone frequency shifting The frequency of all the tones in the table can be collectively altered by up to 10 for tolerance checking Tone duration The duration times for standard and extended tones are set to the system standard
303. udio Input Impedance Match on page 3 17 The 600 Q interface unit allows the Service Monitor to provide a 600 2 termination See Audio Input Impedance on page 3 17 With the input impedance set at 600 Q the indicated level is that of the input to the Service Monitor With the input impedance set at High the indicated level is that of the input to the Service Monitor with an assumed 600 Q load Input filtering The AF signal to the AF INPUT connector on the front panel can be filtered using high pass low pass or band pass audio filters and with weighting filters as required Press the AF Filter key The right hand soft keys change to allow selection of AF filters as shown below Press the Return key after selecting the required filter CCITT or Only if option 23 CCITT filter is fitted i Only if option 24 C MESS filter is fitted The high pass filter options are 50 Hz or 300 Hz There are five low pass filter soft keys The 50 kHz LP filter can be considered to be the unfiltered selection as this represents the normal full bandwidth of the audio circuits The other four low pass preset filters can each be set to any cut off frequency within the range 250 Hz to 1 0 KHz and 3 0 KHz to 20 0 KHz The band pass preset filters can be customized by selecting either of the high pass options in combination with any of the four preset low pass filters The preset filters are set from the HELP SETUP facility The AF Filte
304. uency offset A new value is entered by first pressing the Freq Offset key and then using the data entry keys Additionally the RF generator may be disabled from the spectrum analyzer tracking generator menu Pressing the RF Gen key will display the RF Generator On Off menu Repeated presses of the RF Gen On Off key will display the RF Gen Off or the RF Gen On legend This indicates the state of the RF generator when the tracking generator facility is off 3 59 LOCAL OPERATION Look and Listen th E 000 J IL 6055 Fig 3 15 Spectrum Analyzer setup Look and Listen function The optional Look and Listen facility allows the instrument to be used for OFF AIR monitoring of transmissions while examining the area of radio spectrum on which the transmission being monitored is centered The width of RF spectrum scanned in the Look and Listen mode is adjustable in steps from a minimum of 100 kHz to 1 MHz The RF signal from a suitable antenna is coupled to the Service Monitor through either the antenna BNC connector or the N type connector on the front panel The signal is passed through the spectrum analyzer circuits to be displayed as a conventional spectrum analyzer display The listen demodulator obtains its signal from a non sweeping IF circuit and is tuned to the center frequency of the display The output fro
305. um analyzer function the monitor has a Look and Listen function that allows the operator to listen to the demodulated signal extracted from the RF signal being examined Oscilloscope The digital oscilloscope function available from the Tx Rx and AF test modes displays signal waveforms on part of the display screen The operation of the oscilloscope function is described in detail later in this chapter under Oscilloscope starting on page 3 88 When reference to the oscilloscope facility is necessary when describing other functions this is indicated by heading the reference OSCILLOSCOPE STANDARD OSCILLOSCOPE or EXPANDED OSCILLOSCOPE as appropriate 3 19 LOCAL OPERATION Using the test modes Brief descriptions As the Service Monitor is a duplex instrument the RF signal generator and the receiver circuits are able to operate simultaneously This allows mobile transceivers to be tested under their normal operating conditions with both their receiver section and transmitter section functioning By selecting a particular test mode on the Service Monitor one or both sections of the transceiver can be studied A brief description of the function of each test mode is given below Detailed user instructions follow under the relevant headings Tx TEST With Tx TEST selected the TRANSMITTER TEST screen is displayed and access to all Tx TEST mode features 1s available See fold out diagram 2 0 at the end of this chapter
306. when the system is selected They can be altered by the user from the EDIT TONE STANDARD screen which is accessed by pressing the Edit Std key on the SELECT TONE STANDARD screen Press the Tone Durat n key or the Tone Ext Dur key as appropriate and enter the required duration using the data entry keys and the ms terminator key Producing the sequential tone signal The Service Monitor has four tone modes for producing sequential tone signals These are selected after pressing the Send Mode key This will display the soft keys shown below Cont Tones Generates the tone sequence repeatedly Tone Burst Generates one sequence of the tones then stops Step Tones Each initiation causes one tone of the sequence to be generated for the stated duration Subsequent initiations step to the next tone in the sequence Single Tone Pressing any data entry key will cause the corresponding tone to be generated for the stated duration Return Returns to the main Sequential Tones menu The selected send mode i e Cont Burst Step or Single will be shown on the display against the legend Tone Generate Mode Before sending tones using the RF generator ensure that the RF generator is ON 3 73 LOCAL OPERATION Tone ON OFF control When the SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen or the AF SEQUENTIAL ENCODER screen is displayed the sequential tones are turned on or off by the orange ON OFF function key If the sequential tones are ON and
307. xpanded display the third press will return to the bar chart display Setting up The Y sensitivity and the timebase ranges of the oscilloscope are set from the right hand soft keys The current settings are shown above the oscilloscope display When in Rx TEST and AF TEST modes the Y vertical input is by the AF input connector The Y sensitivity is switchable in a 1 2 5 sequence from 10 mV division to 20 V division The AC DC key selects AC or DC coupling into the oscilloscope When in Tx TEST mode the Y input is taken directly from the modulation meter output The Y axis is calibrated to display modulation level FM ranges are from 0 5 kHz division to 25 kHz division AM ranges are 5 division 10 division and 20 division The horizontal timebase has ranges of 100 us division to 5 s division in a 1 2 5 sequence The soft keys have the following functions top to bottom Y J Increases Y Sensitivity by one range per key press J Decreases Y Sensitivity by one range per key press gt lt Increases Time Division by one range per key press 4 Decreases Time Division by one range per key press Bar Steps to Expanded display or Scope i J Bar chart display Return Returns display and menu to Tx TEST Rx TEST or AF Test Standard Persistence Steps persistence setting through Expanded Off Low Med High Inf The vertical position of the oscilloscope trace can be adjusted using the
308. y The values are incorporated into the display and updated continually Rx test mode The Rx TEST mode uses the signal from the RF signal generator circuits as an input signal for the receiver under test The AF signal produced by the demodulator within the receiver is analyzed within the Service Monitor to produce results of the test Selecting the Rx TEST mode does not disable the functions of the Tx TEST mode The receiver circuits remain active at their last settings The AF generators will also continue operating at their last settings unless either is enabled as a modulation generator Calling up one modulation generator will allow the other to function as an AF generator for the Tx TEST mode but using both as modulation sources will remove both from Tx TEST use RF generator The RF signal is produced within the monitor by a fractional N controlled oscillator with a range of 1 280 1 MHz to 2 280 0 MHz This is located on the RF generator oscillator board A13 1 The oscillator and its control system are of a complex design in order to meet strict requirements of frequency stability low phase noise and very fast settling after a change of frequency The output from this oscillator is fed to the RF generator mixer board A12 1 where it is combined with a signal taken from the output of the second local oscillator on A9 1 The mixer output is filtered by a 1050 MHz low pass filter to remove all unwanted frequencies before passing to the
309. y Aeroflex RF and AF connections RF and AF connections should made using good quality connectors correctly fitted to appropriate cable All connectors should be locked to the Service Monitor using the bayonet or threaded locking rings Do not use leads that have damaged connectors or cable as this can cause poor performance and might damage the Service Monitor RF leakage levels in a test set up can be aggravated by the use of poor quality connector leads A double screened lead 1 meter in length and terminated with male BNC connectors part no 43137 052 and a 1 meter N type male to N type male connector lead 54311 095 are both available from Aeroflex sales offices Hot Surfaces Take care when touching the RF Input Type N connector after the application of high levels of continuous power If 50 W is exceeded for a prolonged period the temperature of the connector can become excessive INSTALLATION Accessory socket connections The accessory socket located on the front panel is of the 7 pin DIN 45 configuration The function of each of the pins on this socket is shown in the following table The pin numbering is shown in Fig 2 2 Accessory in out socket pin numbers and is as viewed from the front of the Service Monitor Table 2 1 Accessory socket pin numbering location and functions Mic input PTT logic Reverse power 12 V DC at approx 100 mA Loudspeaker output The pin numbering of the Accessory socke

2944B operations manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents